General Dynamics SATCOM Technologies Antenna Control System 950A

May 2018
Antenna
Control
System
Model 950A
Operation &
Maintenance
Manual
Doc No. & Rev: M950-02-0857 Rev C
Cage Code: 0P0N7
This document contains General Dynamics proprietary information and is not releasable outside
of General Dynamics without prior approval.
RELEASED M950-02-0857-DOC.PDF C v3
This page intentionally left blank.
Model 950A O&M Manual
Revision and Change Record
Date ECN Aff. Reason for Authorized

Rev
(YYYY/MM/DD) No. Sheets Change Comments By
A 2017/09/07 111190 All Original release of Model 950A with J. Kailukaitis

updated GUI
B 2018/01/26 112020 All Updated General System J. Spears

Specifications to include additional
detail.
Added information about selecting
optional Analog Input as the TRU
type.
Added note for ACB real-time
clock, additional troubleshooting
items, clarification for M&C
network, and tool list for installation.
C 2018/05/14 114655 All Added support for monopulse J. Kailukaitis

tracking.
Added information about
customizing the POL settings for
each RF band in the Band Table.
General Dynamics Proprietary i M950-02-0857 Rev C
General Dynamics Proprietary ii M950-02-0857 Rev C
Contact Information
Contact Information
In case a problem occurs that is not covered in this manual or additional information is required,
use the following contact information.
Web: https://gdmissionsystems.com/satcom-technologies/
(Contains a link for SATCOM Customer Care)
Email customercare@gd-ms.com
Support:
Phone +1-770-689-2040
Support: (M – F, 8:00 AM – 5:00 PM U.S. Eastern Time)
Customer 1-888-874-7646
Care Hotline: (North America)
(24 x 7 x 365)
+1-619-240-8480
(Outside North America)
General Dynamics Proprietary iii M950-02-0857 Rev C
Contact Information
General Dynamics Proprietary iv M950-02-0857 Rev C
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
Revision and Change Record ........................................................................................... i

Contact Information ........................................................................................................ iii
List of Figures and Tables ............................................................................................. xv
Safety Information ....................................................................................................... xvii
Acronyms and Abbreviations ........................................................................................ xix
SECTION 1 - SYSTEM OVERVIEW........................................................................... 1-1

1.1 Major System Components .................................................................................... 1-1
1.2 General System Specifications .............................................................................. 1-2
1.3 CE and FCC Standards ......................................................................................... 1-3
1.3.1 CE Standards ................................................................................................. 1-3
1.3.2 FCC Standards............................................................................................... 1-4
SECTION 2 - INSTALL THE SYSTEM ....................................................................... 2-1

2.1 Overview of System Interface Connections............................................................ 2-2
2.2 Tools Required ...................................................................................................... 2-3
2.3 Receive and Inspect Equipment ............................................................................ 2-4
2.4 Mount Equipment .................................................................................................. 2-4
2.4.1 Mounting the ACU, TRU, and Ethernet Switch in the Rack ............................. 2-5
2.5 Connect Cables ..................................................................................................... 2-6
2.5.1 Additional Cable Installation Information ......................................................... 2-8
2.6 Configuring the PDU for Optional Equipment ....................................................... 2-10
2.7 Power Up the PDU .............................................................................................. 2-12
2.8 Power Up the Antenna Control Unit (ACU) .......................................................... 2-13
2.9 Disable the Motion Detect Faults Temporarily ...................................................... 2-14
2.10 Verify Emergency Stop Operation........................................................................ 2-14
2.11 Set Up the Motor Controllers ............................................................................... 2-15
2.11.1 Program the Parameter Values for Each Controller ...................................... 2-15
2.11.2 Verify the DIP Switches ................................................................................ 2-17
2.11.3 Autotune the Motor Controllers ..................................................................... 2-18
2.12 Phase the Motors................................................................................................. 2-19
2.13 Set the AZ and EL Hardware Limits ..................................................................... 2-20
General Dynamics Proprietary v M950-02-0857 Rev C
Table of Contents
2.13.1 Setting a Final Switch ................................................................................... 2-21

2.13.2 Setting a Prelimit Switch ............................................................................... 2-21
2.14 Set Up the Encoder ............................................................................................. 2-22
2.14.1 Phase Position Feedback ............................................................................. 2-22
2.14.2 Calibrate Position Feedback ......................................................................... 2-23
2.15 Set Up the Antenna Control Unit (ACU) Parameters ............................................ 2-24
2.15.1 Set Up the System Options .......................................................................... 2-24
2.15.2 Set Up Information About the Site ................................................................ 2-25
2.15.3 Set Up the Date and Time ............................................................................ 2-25
2.15.4 Set Up for Latched Faults ............................................................................. 2-26
2.15.5 Set the Software Travel Limits ...................................................................... 2-26
2.15.6 Set the Axis Loop Parameters for the Motors ............................................... 2-27
2.15.7 Re-Enable the Motion Detect Faults ............................................................. 2-28
2.15.8 Set Up the Band Table ................................................................................. 2-29
2.15.9 Set Up the TCP/IP Address for the ACB ....................................................... 2-29
2.16 Set Up the Monopulse Parameters (Monopulse only) .......................................... 2-30
2.16.1 Setting Initial Values ..................................................................................... 2-31
2.16.2 Adjusting the Modulation Index ..................................................................... 2-32
2.16.3 Adjusting the Phase Angles .......................................................................... 2-33
2.16.3.1 Autophasing............................................................................................ 2-33
2.16.3.2 Manual Phasing ...................................................................................... 2-33
2.16.4 Testing the Phase Shift Values ..................................................................... 2-35
2.16.5 Setting the Error Slope (Scale Factor) .......................................................... 2-36
2.16.6 Setting Up and Verifying the Table Phasing Data ......................................... 2-38
2.17 Set Up and Execute a Tracking Profile for a Satellite ........................................... 2-39
2.18 Verify Performance Using the SAT Procedure ..................................................... 2-39
SECTION 3 - SATELLITE TRACKING QUICK START GUIDE .................................. 3-1

3.1 Set Up a Tracking Profile for the Satellite .............................................................. 3-2
3.2 Set Up a Point Mode for the Satellite's Initial Position ............................................ 3-2
3.3 Set Up an Acquire Mode ........................................................................................ 3-4
3.4 Set Up a Track Mode ............................................................................................. 3-5
3.5 Set Up the RF Parameters for the Satellite ............................................................ 3-6
3.6 Set Up the POL Mode (Optional) ........................................................................... 3-7
3.7 Execute the Profile to Begin Tracking .................................................................... 3-7
General Dynamics Proprietary vi M950-02-0857 Rev C
Table of Contents
SECTION 4 - ANTENNA CONTROL UNIT ................................................................ 4-1

4.1 Powering Up and Shutting Down the ACU ............................................................. 4-2
4.1.1 Startup Procedure .......................................................................................... 4-2
4.1.2 Normal Operation and System Control ........................................................... 4-2
4.1.3 Logging In and Logging Out ........................................................................... 4-3
4.1.4 Power Shutdown Procedure ........................................................................... 4-3
4.2 Overview of the ACU Screen ................................................................................. 4-4
4.3 Important Operational Features ............................................................................. 4-6
4.3.1 Direct Mode vs. Profile ................................................................................... 4-6
4.3.1.1 Advantages and Disadvantages of Direct Mode ....................................... 4-7
4.3.1.2 Advantages and Disadvantages of Profiles ............................................... 4-7
4.3.1.3 Determining if the System is in Direct Mode or Running a Profile ............. 4-8
4.3.1.4 How Direct Mode and Profiles Share Data Presets ................................... 4-8
4.3.1.5 Does a Dashboard Button Affect a Profile or the Direct Mode? ................. 4-9
4.3.2 AZ/EL and POL Angles Are Entered in Separate Windows ............................ 4-9
4.4 Working with the User Interface ........................................................................... 4-10
4.4.1 When a Command Window is Open ............................................................. 4-10
4.4.2 Closing a Command Window ....................................................................... 4-10
4.4.3 Expanding the Status Bar ............................................................................. 4-11
4.4.4 Number of Command Windows That Can Be Open at a Time ...................... 4-11
4.4.5 Expanding a Command Window in the Tri-Pane View .................................. 4-13
4.4.6 Redisplaying the Dashboard on the Main ACU Screen ................................. 4-14
4.4.7 Entering Data Using the On-Screen Keyboards............................................ 4-14
4.4.8 Locking or Unlocking the Screen .................................................................. 4-16
4.5 Axis Status and Position Boxes ........................................................................... 4-17
4.5.1 POL Box ....................................................................................................... 4-18
4.6 AZ/EL Graphical Displays .................................................................................... 4-19
4.7 Tracking RF Graphical Display ............................................................................ 4-19
4.8 Profile Button ....................................................................................................... 4-20
4.9 Point, Acquire, and Track Buttons ........................................................................ 4-20
4.9.1 RF Button ..................................................................................................... 4-21
4.10 Button Bar 1 - Profile ........................................................................................... 4-22
4.11 Button Bar 2 - Direct Mode .................................................................................. 4-26
4.11.1 Point Modes ................................................................................................. 4-27
4.11.1.1 Stop ........................................................................................................ 4-28
General Dynamics Proprietary vii M950-02-0857 Rev C
Table of Contents
4.11.1.2 Geo Designate........................................................................................ 4-29

4.11.1.3 Geo Preset ............................................................................................. 4-30
4.11.1.4 Intelsat Track .......................................................................................... 4-31
4.11.1.5 Manual Position ...................................................................................... 4-34
4.11.1.6 Manual Rate ........................................................................................... 4-35
4.11.1.7 Moon Track ............................................................................................. 4-36
4.11.1.8 NORAD Track......................................................................................... 4-38
4.11.1.9 Optrack ................................................................................................... 4-43
4.11.1.9.1 Examples of Optrack Operations ........................................................ 4-45
4.11.1.9.2 Optrack Details ................................................................................... 4-46
4.11.1.10 Position Designate .................................................................................. 4-47
4.11.1.11 Preset Position ....................................................................................... 4-48
4.11.1.12 Star Track ............................................................................................... 4-49
4.11.1.13 Stow ....................................................................................................... 4-52
4.11.1.14 Sun Track ............................................................................................... 4-53
4.11.1.15 Table Track............................................................................................. 4-55
4.11.2 Acquire Modes ............................................................................................. 4-58
4.11.2.1 Box Scan ................................................................................................ 4-59
4.11.2.1.1 Box Scan Process .............................................................................. 4-61
4.11.2.2 Geo Scan ............................................................................................... 4-63
4.11.2.2.1 Geo Scan Process ............................................................................. 4-65
4.11.3 Track Modes................................................................................................. 4-66
4.11.3.1 Steptrack ................................................................................................ 4-66
4.11.3.1.1 Steptrack Design Goal........................................................................ 4-68
4.11.3.2 Optrack ................................................................................................... 4-71
4.11.3.3 Autophase (only for Monopulse systems) ............................................... 4-73
4.11.3.4 Monopulse (only for Monopulse systems) ............................................... 4-75
4.11.4 RF Setup ...................................................................................................... 4-77
4.11.4.1 Monopulse Parameters (only for Monopulse systems) ............................ 4-80
4.11.4.2 Phase Shift Table Parameters (only for Monopulse systems) ................. 4-81
4.11.5 POL Modes (Optional) .................................................................................. 4-83
4.11.5.1 Stop - POL .............................................................................................. 4-84
4.11.5.2 Auto - POL .............................................................................................. 4-84
4.11.5.3 Preset Position - POL ............................................................................. 4-85
4.11.5.4 Position Designate - POL........................................................................ 4-86
General Dynamics Proprietary viii M950-02-0857 Rev C
Table of Contents
4.11.5.5 Table Track - POL .................................................................................. 4-87

4.12 Button Bar 3 - Offsets .......................................................................................... 4-89
4.13 Button Bar 4 - Monitor .......................................................................................... 4-91
4.13.1 Data Log Functions....................................................................................... 4-92
4.13.2 Record Data Log........................................................................................... 4-94
4.13.3 Edge Meter ................................................................................................... 4-96
4.13.4 Round Meter................................................................................................. 4-98
4.13.5 X-Y Plot ...................................................................................................... 4-100
4.13.6 Strip Chart .................................................................................................. 4-102
4.13.7 Spectrum Display (Digital TRU Only) .......................................................... 4-104
4.13.8 NTP Monitor ............................................................................................... 4-105
4.13.9 Tracking Receiver ...................................................................................... 4-106
4.13.10 Encoder Feedback ..................................................................................... 4-109
4.13.11 Commands/Offsets ..................................................................................... 4-109
4.13.11.1 Commands/Offsets AZ/EL .................................................................... 4-109
4.13.11.2 Commands/Offsets Geo ....................................................................... 4-110
4.13.12 Power Supplies .......................................................................................... 4-111
4.13.13 Software Version and Contact Information ................................................. 4-111
4.13.14 Preview ...................................................................................................... 4-112
4.14 Button Bar 5 - Control ........................................................................................ 4-114
4.15 Button Bar 6 - Utility ........................................................................................... 4-116
4.15.1 Encoder Test .............................................................................................. 4-117
4.15.2 Upgrade Software ...................................................................................... 4-118
4.15.3 Simulator .................................................................................................... 4-121
4.15.3.1 Simulator Main Window ........................................................................ 4-121
4.15.3.2 General Parameters ............................................................................. 4-123
4.15.3.3 Intelsat Parameters............................................................................... 4-124
4.15.3.4 NORAD Parameters ............................................................................. 4-125
4.15.3.5 Table Track Parameters ....................................................................... 4-126
4.15.3.6 JamSet Parameters .............................................................................. 4-127
4.15.3.7 Simulator Status ................................................................................... 4-128
4.15.4 Database Utility .......................................................................................... 4-129
4.16 Button Bar 7 - Setup .......................................................................................... 4-133
4.16.1 Motion Detect Faults................................................................................... 4-134
4.16.2 Encoder Offset ........................................................................................... 4-135
General Dynamics Proprietary ix M950-02-0857 Rev C
Table of Contents
4.16.3 Travel Limit ................................................................................................. 4-137

4.16.4 Error Correction .......................................................................................... 4-138
4.16.4.1 EL Droop Table .................................................................................... 4-139
4.16.4.2 EL Velocity Correction Table ................................................................ 4-139
4.16.5 Axis Parameters ......................................................................................... 4-141
4.16.5.1 AZ Parameters ..................................................................................... 4-141
4.16.5.2 EL Parameters...................................................................................... 4-143
4.16.5.3 POL Parameters ................................................................................... 4-144
4.16.6 ACB Serial Ports......................................................................................... 4-145
4.16.7 ACB TCP/IP ............................................................................................... 4-146
4.16.8 TRU (Tracking Receiver Unit) ..................................................................... 4-147
4.16.8.1 TRU External Status ............................................................................. 4-147
4.16.8.2 TRU Serial Port .................................................................................... 4-148
4.16.8.3 TRU TCP/IP.......................................................................................... 4-148
4.16.8.4 TRU DAC Output .................................................................................. 4-149
4.16.8.5 BITE Generator .................................................................................... 4-150
4.16.9 Analog Input ............................................................................................... 4-150
4.16.10 Band Table ................................................................................................. 4-152
4.16.11 Custom POL ............................................................................................... 4-153
4.16.12 Latched Faults ............................................................................................ 4-155
4.16.13 Monopulse .................................................................................................. 4-156
4.16.13.1 Phase Shift Table ................................................................................. 4-156
4.16.13.2 Mono Filter ........................................................................................... 4-158
4.16.13.3 Autophase Algorithm ............................................................................ 4-158
4.16.14 System Options .......................................................................................... 4-159
4.16.15 Date Time................................................................................................... 4-162
4.16.16 Site Setup ................................................................................................... 4-163
4.16.17 Hour Meter Monitor ..................................................................................... 4-164
4.16.18 Data Log Options ....................................................................................... 4-165
4.16.19 Screen Control ........................................................................................... 4-166
4.16.20 Major Events .............................................................................................. 4-167
SECTION 5 - OTHER CONTROL UNITS ................................................................... 5-1

5.1 Portable Maintenance Unit (PMU) ......................................................................... 5-1
5.1.1 PMU Controls and Indicators .......................................................................... 5-2
General Dynamics Proprietary x M950-02-0857 Rev C
Table of Contents
5.1.2 PMU Display................................................................................................... 5-3

5.1.3 PMU Operating Modes ................................................................................... 5-4
5.1.4 Operating the PMU ......................................................................................... 5-4
5.2 PMU J-Box (Optional) ............................................................................................ 5-8
5.3 Manual Control Unit (MCU) .................................................................................... 5-8
5.4 Supervisory Computer ........................................................................................... 5-9
5.5 Remote-Client Connections ................................................................................... 5-9
SECTION 6 - HARDWARE........................................................................................ 6-1

6.1 ACU - Antenna Control Unit ................................................................................... 6-1
6.2 PDU - Power Drive Unit ......................................................................................... 6-1
6.2.1 General Information ........................................................................................ 6-1
6.2.2 PDU Components .......................................................................................... 6-3
6.2.3 Antenna Control Board ................................................................................... 6-6
6.3 Position Transducers and Encoders ...................................................................... 6-7
6.3.1 Position Transducer 1:1 (Optional) ................................................................. 6-7
6.3.2 Optical Encoder (Optional) ............................................................................. 6-7
6.4 RF Scanner (Monopulse) Plate .............................................................................. 6-8
6.5 Emergency Stop (E-Stop) Switches (Optional) ...................................................... 6-9
6.5.1 Standard E-Stops ........................................................................................... 6-9
6.5.2 E-Stop/PMU J-Box Combinations ................................................................... 6-9
6.6 Safety Switches ................................................................................................... 6-10
6.6.1 Travel Limits (Optional) ................................................................................ 6-10
SECTION 7 - STATUS MESSAGES ............................................................................ 7-1

7.1 List of Status Messages ......................................................................................... 7-1
SECTION 8 - TROUBLESHOOTING AND MAINTENANCE ......................................... 8-1

8.1 Fault Messages ..................................................................................................... 8-1
8.2 General Troubleshooting Guide ........................................................................... 8-29
8.2.1 Troubleshooting Test and Safety ................................................................... 8-33
8.2.2 Troubleshooting Motion Issues ..................................................................... 8-34
8.2.3 Troubleshooting Tracking Issues .................................................................. 8-35
8.3 Component Troubleshooting ................................................................................ 8-36
General Dynamics Proprietary xi M950-02-0857 Rev C
Table of Contents
8.3.1 ACU ............................................................................................................. 8-36

8.3.2 PDU ............................................................................................................. 8-36
8.3.2.1 ACB Troubleshooting .............................................................................. 8-36
8.3.2.2 ACB Replacement .................................................................................. 8-36
8.3.2.3 Motor Controller Troubleshooting............................................................ 8-37
8.3.2.4 Motor Controller Repair/Replacement ..................................................... 8-37
8.3.3 PMU and MCU ............................................................................................. 8-39
8.3.3.1 PMU and MCU Troubleshooting ............................................................. 8-39
8.3.4 Position Transducer and Resolver, 1:1 ......................................................... 8-41
8.3.4.1 Troubleshooting ...................................................................................... 8-41
8.3.4.2 Encoder Replacement ............................................................................ 8-42
8.3.5 Optical Encoder ............................................................................................ 8-43
8.3.5.1 Encoder Replacement ............................................................................ 8-43
8.3.6 RF Scanner (Monopulse) Plate .................................................................... 8-44
8.3.7 Emergency Stops ......................................................................................... 8-45
8.3.8 Safety Switches ............................................................................................ 8-46
8.3.8.1 Travel Limits ........................................................................................... 8-46
8.4 System Software ................................................................................................. 8-47
8.5 Regular Maintenance........................................................................................... 8-47
SECTION 9 - DRAWINGS AND PARTS LIST ............................................................. 9-1
SECTION 10 - VENDOR DATA ............................................................................... 10-1
APPENDIX A - MISCELLANEOUS ACU OPERATIONS ........................................... A-1

A.1 Configuring the AZ and EL Graphical Displays ...................................................... A-1
A.2 Configuring the Tracking RF Graphical Display ..................................................... A-4
A.3 Changing Your Password ...................................................................................... A-6
A.4 Managing the User Database ................................................................................ A-7
A.4.1 Opening the User Management Window ........................................................ A-7
A.4.2 Creating a New User ...................................................................................... A-8
A.4.3 Editing a User’s Database Information............................................................ A-9
A.4.4 Deleting a User............................................................................................... A-9
General Dynamics Proprietary xii M950-02-0857 Rev C
Table of Contents
APPENDIX B - SETTING THE BAND TABLE ............................................................B-1

B.1 Band Table Overview ............................................................................................ B-1
B.2 How the Band Table Works ................................................................................... B-2
B.3 Common Band Table Errors .................................................................................. B-3
APPENDIX C - INVERTER DRIVES AND LONG-TERM STORAGE .......................... C-1

C.1 Long-Term Storage Problems ................................................................................ C-1
C.2 Procedure for Reforming the Inverter Bus Capacitor .............................................. C-1
APPENDIX D - ACU QUICK REFERENCE GUIDE/MENU MAP ............................. D-1
General Dynamics Proprietary xiii M950-02-0857 Rev C
Table of Contents
General Dynamics Proprietary xiv M950-02-0857 Rev C
List of Figures and Tables
List of Figures
Figure 2-1: Motor Controller Front Panel ............................................................................... 2-15
Figure 2-2: DIP Switch S2 ..................................................................................................... 2-17
Figure 2-3: DIP Switch S3 ..................................................................................................... 2-18
Figure 4-1: Typical Tracking Signal Beam Pattern ................................................................ 4-69
Figure 4-2: Steptrack Process ............................................................................................... 4-70
Figure 6-1: Location of Components Inside the PDU............................................................... 6-3
Figure 6-2: PDU Block Diagram .............................................................................................. 6-5
Figure 6-3: ACB Block Diagram .............................................................................................. 6-6
List of Tables
Table 2-1: Minimum Conductor Sizing, per EN 60950-1.......................................................... 2-9
Table 2-2: PDU Configuration for Optional Equipment .......................................................... 2-10
Table 2-3: Motor Controller Configuration Parameters .......................................................... 2-16
Table 2-4: S2 and S3 DIP Switch Settings ............................................................................ 2-17
Table 4-1: Refraction Corrections ........................................................................................ 4-138
General Dynamics Proprietary xv M950-02-0857 Rev C
General Dynamics Proprietary xvi M950-02-0857 Rev C
Safety Information
Safety Information
Safety of personnel is the primary concern during all procedures. Users are responsible for their
own safety, the safety of others working on or near the system, and the safe operation of the
system. Read and become familiar with the safety information in this section.
Although General Dynamics SATCOM Technologies (GDST) has attempted to detail in this
document all areas of possible danger to personnel in the use of this equipment, personnel
should use caution when installing, operating, and servicing this equipment. Take care to avoid
electrical shock, whether the hazard is caused by design or malfunction. GDST is specifically
NOT liable for any damage or injury arising from a technician’s failure to follow the instructions
in this document or to exercise due care and caution while installing, operating, and servicing
this equipment. GDST is NOT responsible for injury or damage resulting from improper
procedures or from the use of improperly trained or inexperienced personnel performing such
tasks.
This document is intended as a general guide for trained and qualified personnel who are aware
of the dangers of handling potentially hazardous electrical and electronic circuits. This document
is not intended to contain a complete statement of all safety precautions that should be
observed by personnel in using this or other electronic equipment.
Warnings, Cautions, and Notes
Warnings, Cautions and Notes provide personal safety and equipment protection information in
the transport, installation, operation, maintenance, and disassembly of the equipment described
in this manual. Failure to comply with the Warnings, Cautions, and Notes may result in personal
injury or death, damage to the equipment, or loss of mission effectiveness. Definitions for each
are:
WARNING
An operating or maintenance procedure, practice, condition, statement,
etc., which, if NOT strictly observed, could result in personal injury or
death.
CAUTION
An installation, operating or maintenance procedure, practice,
condition, statement, etc., which, if NOT strictly observed, could result
in long-term health hazards to personnel, damage to or destruction of
equipment, or loss of mission effectiveness.
NOTE
An installation, operating or maintenance procedure, practice,
condition or statement, which, if heeded, could enhance efficiency
and/or safety of said procedures.
General Dynamics Proprietary xvii M950-02-0857 Rev C
Safety Information
Electrical Hazards
The electrical currents and voltages associated with this equipment, whether supplied by GDST
or others, are dangerous. At all times, personnel must observe the Warnings listed below.
Failure to comply may result in severe personal injury or death.
WARNING
 Equipment is intended for installation in a restricted access
location. The interiors of the Antenna Control Unit (ACU) and
Power Drive Unit (PDU) are NOT operator access areas. Only
qualified personnel with approved technical training and
experience should be permitted access.
 Safeguard personnel and property by complying with all local

safety procedures as established by the customer site
representative, as well as local building codes and fire
protection standards.
 All persons working on the antenna system must comply with

the Occupational Safety and Health Act (OSHA) standards and
all other federal, state, and local laws, ordinances, regulations,
and codes relating to designated work.
 Never perform maintenance or service when alone or fatigued.
Electrostatic Sensitive Device (ESD) Hazards
CAUTION
Electrostatic sensitive equipment. To prevent equipment damage, use
proper grounding techniques.
Explanation of Safety Symbols on Equipment
Symbol Description
Protective Earth/Ground Terminal
Caution, Risk of Electric Shock
Caution, Risk of Danger
General Dynamics Proprietary xviii M950-02-0857 Rev C
Acronyms and Abbreviations
Term Definition
ACB Antenna Control Board
ACU Antenna Control Unit
AZ azimuth
BUC block up converter
C Celsius
Calib calibration
CCW counterclockwise
cm centimeter
Com communications
CP circular polarization
CW clockwise
DC direct current
EL elevation
ESD electrostatic sensitive device
F Fahrenheit
FET field-effect transistor
ft feet
ft3 cubic feet
FPGA Field Programmable Gate Array
Freq frequency
GHz gigahertz (one billion Hertz)
GPS Global Positioning System
General Dynamics Proprietary xix M950-02-0857 Rev C
Term Definition
GUI graphical user interface
hr hour
IF intermediate frequency
in inch
H horizontal (typically refers to polarization orientation)
IP Internet Protocol
km kilometers
km/hr kilometers per hour
LAT latitude
LED Light-emitting diode
LCD Liquid-crystal display
LHCP left-hand circular polarization
LNB low noise block converter
LON longitude
LP linear polarization
m meter
MCU Manual Control Unit
MHz megahertz
M&C Monitor and Control
m3 cubic meter
mm millimeter
mph miles per hour
OSHA Occupational Safety and Health Administration (U.S. Government)
PD position designate
PDU Power Drive Unit
General Dynamics Proprietary xx M950-02-0857 Rev C
Term Definition
PMCS Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services
PMU Portable Maintenance Unit
POL Polarization
RBW resolution bandwidth
RF radio frequency
RHCP right-hand circular polarization
RL resistance and conductance
RPM revolutions per minute
RX receive
SSPA solid-state power amplifier
SSPB solid-state power block
TLE two-line element
TLNB tunable low noise block
TP test point
TRU Tracking Receiver Unit
TX transmit
URL uniform resource locator
V volt; vertical (typically refers to polarization orientation)
VBW video bandwidth
VDC volts direct current
W watt
W/m2 watts per square meter
General Dynamics Proprietary xxi M950-02-0857 Rev C
General Dynamics Proprietary xxii M950-02-0857 Rev C
Section 1 - System Overview : Major System Components
SECTION 1 - SYSTEM OVERVIEW
The Model 950A Antenna Control System provides precision satellite tracking applications when
used with almost any limited-motion antenna.
1.1 Major System Components
Power Drive Unit (PDU) – Houses the motor controllers and other equipment that drive the
system. The PDU also contains the interface for the ACU to control the antenna.
Tracking Receiver Unit (TRU) – Receives the RF tracking signal from the satellite and
converts it into a signal that can be used by the system.
Antenna Control Unit (ACU) – Provides the primary user interface for system control and
monitoring capabilities. The ACU is a rack-mounted computer with a touch screen LCD display
that communicates with the PDU via an Ethernet link.
Manual Control Unit (MCU) – An optional unit used to control the antenna axes. The MCU is a
rack-mounted version of the PMU.
General Dynamics Proprietary 1-1 M950-02-0857 Rev C
Section 1 - System Overview : General System Specifications
Portable Maintenance Unit (PMU) and J-Boxes – Provides a portable means of controlling
the antenna axes, typically for maintenance operations, from a location other than the ACU. The
PMU has a 10-foot pendant cable and connector with a 40-foot extension cable that can be
plugged into a dedicated port at the PDU or into one or more optional PMU Junction Boxes
(J-Boxes) installed at convenient locations around the antenna.
E-Stops – Issues an Emergency Stop command to the system to stop all antenna movement
when an operator depresses the E-Stop switch. One or more E-Stops are mounted at
convenient or required locations on the antenna structure.
Limit Switches – Mounted on the antenna structure to prevent each axis from moving beyond
its allowable limits. Typically, each axis has a prelimit and a final limit.
Position Transducers – Measures the angle positions of each axis to determine where the
antenna is pointed.
Linear Polarization Axis Control (Optional) – Provides the capability of tracking linear or
circular polarized satellite signals.
AC Inverter Motors – Drives the axes to the positions commanded by the system's pointing
and tracking functions.
1.2 General System Specifications
Tracking Accuracy ≤ 5% of Beamwidth
Pointing Accuracy ≤ 0.05° RMS
ACU Indoor Equipment

(7RU rack-mount chassis
Size: 12.25" H x 19" W x 3" D
with slides)
(31.12 cm H x 48.26 cm W x 7.62 cm D)
Weight: 10 lbs (4.5 kg)
Power: Single-Phase 100-240 VAC~ 350 VA
PDU Outdoor Equipment

(AC inverter or
Size: 66.5" H x 30" W x 11.25" D (Including Floor Stand)
single-speed contactor)
(168.91 cm H x 76.20 cm W x 28.58 cm D)
Power:
Single-Phase Electronics 100-250 VAC~ 500 VA
208/380/415 VAC~, 3Ø, KVA Motor Dependent
Three-Phase 200-240 VAC~, 7.5 HP (5.6 kW) Max
Three-Phase 380-480 VAC~, 10 HP (7.46 kW) Max
Single-Speed 5 HP (3.73 kW) Max, Three-Phase 208/380/415 VAC~
Section 1 - System Overview : CE and FCC Standards
Optional MCU Indoor Equipment

(1RU rack-mount chassis
Size: 1.75" H x 19" W x 8" D
with slides, PDU Powered
(4.45 cm H x 48.26 cm W x 20.32 cm D)
or External Power)
Power:
Powered by PDU
Single-Phase 100-240 VAC~ 15 VA
Fuse (Single-Phase Only):
5 x 20 mm, Slow Blow, 4.0 A @ 250 VAC~
Environmental
Maximum Operating 10,000 ft (3,048 m)

Altitude
Operating Indoor Temperature: 0° to 50°C Humidity: 95% Non-Condensing
Operating Outdoor Temperature: -20° to 50°C Humidity: 100% Condensing
Operating Outdoor Temperature: -40° to 40°C Humidity: 100% Condensing

(optional extended)
Storage Temperature: -10° to 70°C Humidity: 100% Condensing
1.3 CE and FCC Standards
1.3.1 CE Standards
System components such as the ACU and PDU display the CE mark based on compliance with
the European EMC guidelines and the European Low Voltage Directive.
Equipment used in combination with the Antenna Control System must also be CE-compliant
and display the CE mark. When using the Antenna Control System displaying the CE mark in
combination with other equipment, it is ultimately the responsibility of the user to ensure
compliance with CE standards. After setting up the equipment, verify that conditions meet
European standards.
The safety of system components has been assessed by European standards that mirror their
respective UL (Underwriters Laboratories) Standards. The PDU has been evaluated against
standards set by EN/UL 60950 and the ACU has been evaluated against standards set by
IEC/UL 61010.
Section 1 - System Overview : CE and FCC Standards
1.3.2 FCC Standards
System components such as the ACU and PDU bear the following FCC Part 15 Verification
label.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is

subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not
cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any
interference received, including interference that may cause
undesired operation.
Section 2 - Install the System
SECTION 2 - INSTALL THE SYSTEM
This section provides step-by-step procedures to install the equipment and set up system
parameters. Unless a paragraph indicates it is optional, follow each instruction in the order
listed. For an optional paragraph, perform the procedure if the option is included in your system.
The outline of the procedure detailed in the following paragraphs is:
 Step 1: Receive and inspect the equipment.

 Step 2: Mount the equipment.
 Step 3: Run cables and terminate per the System Schematic. Verify proper terminations,
and verify there are no shorts to ground or between phases on the power wiring.
 Step 4: Configure the PDU for optional equipment.

 Step 5: Apply power to the PDU.
 Step 6: Apply power to the ACU.
 Step 7: Disable the Motion Detect Faults temporarily.
 Step 8: Verify Emergency Stop operation.
 Step 9: Set up the motor controllers.
 Step 10: Phase the motors using the PMU.
 Step 11: Set hardware travel limits.
 Step 12: Set position feedback scaling and offsets.
 Step 13: Set the ACU parameters.
 Step 14: Set the Monopulse parameters (for Monopulse systems only).
 Step 15: Set up a tracking profile (RF parameters, tracking mode, etc.).
 Step 16: Verify performance by performing the Site Acceptance Test Procedure.
The following documentation is required to properly install and test the system. These
documents are included in the Drawings and Parts List section of this manual.
 System Schematic, 8200-02-0002
 Cable Diagram, 8200-02-0004
 PDU Schematic, 1-10HP, 8200-02-2011
 Hardware Interface Specification, 8200-02-0007
 Site Acceptance Test Procedure, 8200-02-0045
Read this section thoroughly before installing, operating, maintaining, or inspecting the Antenna
Control System.
Section 2 - Install the System : Overview of System Interface Connections
2.1 Overview of System Interface Connections
The Model 950A PDU interfaces to external components as shown below. The graphic shows
what equipment can be connected, and the table gives information about where and how that
equipment is connected.
PDU Component External Component Description
Antenna Control Board Antenna Control Unit Main user interface to control the antenna
Antenna Control Board Manual Control Unit Backup maintenance unit
Antenna Control Board Portable Maintenance Unit Maintenance unit located near the antenna
AZ Motor Control Kit Azimuth Motor Motor Power interface to the Drive cabinet for
Azimuth
EL Motor Control Kit Elevation Motor Motor Power interface to the Drive cabinet for
Elevation
POL Motor Control Kit Polarization Motor(s) Interface for the Polarization Motor Power
(optional)
Section 2 - Install the System : Tools Required
PDU Component External Component Description
Field Wiring Board Braking Units Allows the system to interface to AZ and EL
(optional) brakes
Field Wiring Board Motion Warning Horn Warning horn to alert personnel that the
(optional) antenna is about to move
Field Wiring Board Servo Active Light Warning Light to alert personnel that the
(optional) system is active and could move at any time
without warning
Field Wiring Board CP/LP Control Box Interface to control feeds that have both Linear
(optional) and Circular polarization
Field Wiring Board Handcrank Switches Interface for Handcrank Limit Switches to inhibit
(optional) motion when the handcrank is used
Field Wiring Board Limit Switch Kit End of travel protection in AZ, EL, or POL
Field Wiring Board Position Transducer Kit Interface connections to the on axis position
transducers
2.2 Tools Required
The Antenna Control System can be installed with the following hand tools. This list does not
include tools needed for erecting the actual antenna or connecting to the RF receive and
transmit equipment.
 Phillips screwdriver, #2
 Flat head screwdriver, 3/32” (2.5 mm), 1/8” (3 mm), and 1/4” (6 mm)
 Hex wrenches, 5 mm, 3/16”, and 1/8”
 Hammer drill with 1/2” carbide tipped masonry drill bit complying with ANSI B212.15-
1994 or later (may be different if metric concrete mounting is used)
 Socket/wrench, 3/4” (may be different if metric concrete mounting is used)
 Hacksaw, adequate for cutting conduit
 Conduit knockout punch, 2”, actual sizes determined by conduit entering PDU cabinet
 Tongue and groove pliers, 16” (400 mm), actual size dependent on conduit size
 Fish tape, length depends on conduit length
 Cable jacket stripping tool
 Wire strippers, 24 AWG (0.50 mm), 22 AWG (0.65 mm), 16 AWG (1.3 mm),12 AWG
(2.0 mm)
 DB connector pin crimper for 22 and 24 AWG, M22520/2-01 or equivalent for pins
205089-1 and 205090-1
 DB connector pin inserter/extractor
Section 2 - Install the System : Receive and Inspect Equipment
2.3 Receive and Inspect Equipment
1. Carefully remove the packing material from the shipping container(s) and remove the
equipment. Do NOT dispose of the shipping material until the equipment is determined
to be in good operating condition.
CAUTION
 Do NOT install or operate any equipment that is damaged or has
missing parts. Failure to observe this caution may result in
personal injury or equipment damage.
 Some of the system equipment is very heavy. Use proper lifting

equipment and personnel during installation to avoid personal
injury and/or equipment damage.
2. Closely inspect the system units to ensure no damage has occurred in shipment. If
damage has occurred, notify the carrier immediately. Annotate the type of damage and
photograph all packing materials and equipment involved.
2.4 Mount Equipment
1. Verify all equipment has been received and unpacked. Refer to the Hardware Interface
Specification (8200-02-0007) for all weights, dimensions, alignment specifications, and
power requirements supplied by General Dynamics SATCOM Technologies.
2. Move all equipment to the proper locations for mounting, and secure the equipment into
place.
WARNING
 Install the equipment in a restricted access location.
 Mount the PDU directly and permanently on a non-combustible

surface.
CAUTION
 The Power Drive Unit (PDU) is extremely heavy. Use proper
lifting equipment and personnel to mount this unit. Failure to
observe this caution may result in serious personal injury
and/or equipment damage.
 All equipment must be secured in place before operating.

Failure to comply may result in personal injury and/or
equipment damage.
3. The position transducers must be aligned to the axis of rotation to meet the
manufacturer's misalignment specifications. Failure to properly align the transducers will
result in poor system performance and could damage the transducer. These are
precision instruments and need careful alignment and handling.
4. Mount all rack-mounted equipment.
Section 2 - Install the System : Mount Equipment
2.4.1 Mounting the ACU, TRU, and Ethernet Switch in the Rack
The ACU, TRU (4RU model), and Ethernet switch are designed to be mounted in a single front-
to-back arrangement in the rack.
1. Mount the 4RU TRU using the provided sliders, and slide the unit toward the back of the
rack. Leave enough space at the back to mount the Ethernet switch later.
NOTE
 Attach the front of the slider brackets to the back side of the
rack's mounting strip. Attaching the brackets to the front of the
strip may reduce the horizontal spacing enough to prevent the
TRU from sliding into the rack. It also interferes with mounting
the ACU properly.
 Use the provided countersunk screws to attach the front of the

slider brackets. The countersunk screws allow the ACU to
mount flush against the strip.
Slider Slider
bracket bracket
correctly incorrectly
mounted mounted
on back of on front of
mounting mounting
strip strip
2. Mount the ACU at the front of the rack, in front of the TRU.
TRU
Back of
ACU
Section 2 - Install the System : Connect Cables
3. Mount the Ethernet switch on a DIN rail across the back of the rack. (You can also use
the L-brackets supplied with the switch to mount it at a more convenient location.)
4. As necessary, reposition the TRU to allow proper cabling for each unit.
2.5 Connect Cables
1. Read the following warnings and cautions before connecting any cables.
WARNINGS
 The Model 950A system is intended for permanent installation.
Install following local codes.
 Wiring should be performed only by qualified personnel.
 The Power Drive Unit contains multiple power sources (1Ø and
3Ø). Disconnect all power before wiring.
 The PDU uses dangerous voltages. Wear appropriate Personal
Protective Equipment (PPE) and follow site protocol for high-
voltage safety when working inside the PDU.
 The protective ground conductor must be longer than the supply
conductor to ensure that, if pulled, the ground connection is the last
to be disconnected.
 The inside of the ACU and PDU are NOT operator-access areas.
Only service personnel with appropriate technical training and
experience are permitted access.
 Do NOT remove any high-voltage covers inside the PDU when
power is ON.
 The customer is responsible for selecting proper circuit protection,
cabling, and lock-out features for power input to the cabinet. These
must follow local regulations. The Model 950A system supplies
circuit protection from the cabinet to subcomponents.
 Lock-out electrical safety for maintenance can be accommodated

various ways. The PDU has an emergency stop (E-Stop) on the
cabinet. E-stops are recommended at each motor location. The
design of the overall installation, safety switches, and power
disconnect depends on local codes and should be reviewed by the
installer.
 The PDU has high-leakage current. Earth connection is essential

before connecting to power mains.
 To maintain compliance with EMC standards, all cable lengths

should not exceed 30 m (100 ft).
 Verify that local site voltage is compatible with power cord(s)

supplied with equipment. Users may need to supply their own style
IEC60320 C-13 power cord(s) with appropriate ratings.
 Failure to comply with the above warnings may result in

severe personal injury or death and/or equipment damage.
CAUTIONS
 Do NOT use a line-to-line voltage as the single-phase source.
Voltages must be between 100 – 250 VAC.
 Overload devices that protect the drive motors must be set to

match the motor rating. Set the devices for the full load ampere
rating stated on the motor nameplate. Failure to comply may result
in equipment damage.
 Route protective ground conductors separate from motor output

conductors to reduce possible interference-related issues.
 Failure to comply with the foregoing cautions may result in

personal injury or equipment damage.
2. Connect components for the Antenna Control System equipment using the wiring
information in System Schematic. Cables called out on the Cable Installation Kit are
designated by a number to match those in the System Schematic.
3. The PDU is designed to be powered from both a single-phase and three-phase source.
GDST recommends that the single-phase logic power input be supplied separately from
the three-phase motor power circuit.
When connecting the 3-phase neutral, be aware that the terminal block is on the back
side of the S1 power disconnect switch, toward the back of the PDU.
Top of Switch
Power
Inside PDU
Disconnect
Switch on
Back of Front of Outside of
PDU PDU PDU
Neutral
Terminal
Block
Side View of Power Disconnect Switch

Side View of Power Disconnect Switch Facing PDU Cabinet Door
Facing Left Side of PDU Cabinet (Neutral Terminal Block Cannot
Be Seen in this View)
2.5.1 Additional Cable Installation Information
WARNING
The customer is responsible for selecting proper circuit protection,
cabling, and lock-out features for power input to the cabinet. These
must follow local regulations.
Nameplate
Important system information is located on the system nameplate label, typically located inside
the cabinet or on the rear of the unit.
External Protective Equipment
External protective equipment, including short-circuit protection and overcurrent protection, is

required on the power input to the equipment. For guidance concerning external protective
equipment, refer to local building codes.
For information necessary to determine requirements for external protective equipment, refer to
the device's nameplate label, such as the one shown previously. On the nameplate, key
parameters under “Input Power” may include Voltage, Current, and/or Short Circuit Current.
Minimum Conductor Sizing
For guidance concerning minimum conductor sizing of power and ground conductors, refer to
Table 2-1, per EN/UL 60950-1.
For information necessary to determine requirements for minimum conductor sizing, refer to the
device's nameplate label, such as the one shown previously. On the nameplate, key parameters
under “Input Power” may include Voltage and Current.
NOTE
Use the information in Table 2-1 for reference only, in accordance with
local building codes.
Table 2-1: Minimum Conductor Sizing, per EN 60950-1
Minimum Conductor Sizes

Rated Current of Equipment
(A) Nominal Cross-Sectional Area AWG or kcmil
2 2
(mm ) [cross-sectional area in mm ]
Up to and including 6 0.75 18 [0.8]
Over 6 up to and including 10 1 16 [1.3]

Over 10 up to and including 13 1.25 16 [1.3]
Over 13 up to and including 16 1.5 14 [2]
Over 16 up to and including 25 2.5 12 [3]

Over 25 up to and including 32 4 10 [5]


Section 2 - Install the System : Configuring the PDU for Optional Equipment
2.6 Configuring the PDU for Optional Equipment
The PDU supports the following optional equipment. Depending on the equipment used at your
site, be sure to configure the PDU as described in the table. For example, your system may not
have optional motor overtemp switches. If not, these switches need to be bypassed in the PDU.
NOTE
Failure to configure the PDU as described in this section will cause
fault messages that can prevent the system from operating properly.
 Motor Handcrank Switches – Typically push-button switches that are pressed closed
when the motor junction box door is closed. When the motor junction box door opens,
the switch is no longer pressed.
 Motor Thermal Switches – Temperature sensors that break contact in case of

excessive temperature.
 Final Limit and/or Prelimit Switches – Hardware switches that prevent the antenna
from moving beyond the coordinates specified by the position of the switches. This
applies to the AZ and EL axes only. Typically, POL has only a single set of limit
switches.
NOTE
 A single set of limit switches per axis has two switches: one
switch to limit axis movement in one direction and the other
switch to limit movement in the opposite direction, such as an
AZ CW switch and an AZ CCW switch. For systems with only a
single set of switches per axis, you can configure them as
either a final limit or a prelimit.
 Two sets of limit switches per axis has four switches: two
switches for one axis direction and two more switches for the
same axis in the opposite direction. For systems with two sets
of switches per axis, configure one set as a final limit and the
other set as a prelimit.
 Final limit switches should be closer in proximity to the limits of

the antenna's mechanical travel range. The prelimit switches
should be inside the final limit switches.
Table 2-2: PDU Configuration for Optional Equipment
Question If Yes: If No:
Does the AZ or EL motor have a Wire the handcrank switch For AZ, apply a bypass jumper
handcrank switch? terminals to the PDU per from TB1B11 to TB1C11.
8200-02-0002.
For EL, apply a bypass jumper
from TB1B12 to TB1C12.
Section 2 - Install the System : Configuring the PDU for Optional Equipment
Question If Yes: If No:
Does the AZ or EL motor have Wire the thermal switch terminals Apply a bypass jumper from
thermal switches? to the PDU per 8200-02-0002. TB1B7 to TB1C7.
This jumper bypasses both the
AZ and EL switches.
Does the antenna have two sets 1. Wire the switches that are to Proceed to next question.
of limit switches per axis, which be dedicated as AZ final
allows both final limits and limits to TB1B1, TB1C1, and
prelimits? TB1D1 per 8200-02-0002.
2. Wire the switches that are
dedicated as EL final limits to
TB1B2, TB1C2, and TB1D2
per 8200-02-0002.
AZ prelimits to TB1B5,
TB1C5, and TB1D5 per
8200-02-0002.
EL prelimits to TB1B6,
TB1C6, and TB1D6 per
8200-02-0002.
For antennas with only a single In this case, the PDU shuts down In this case, the PDU remains
set of limit switches per axis, power to avoid further antenna powered and the PMU can be
you can set them as either final movement. The antenna must be used to drive the antenna out of
limits or prelimits. Should the driven out of the limit manually. the limit.
system shut down power to the
Wire the limit switch to the final Wire the limit switch to the
drives if the antenna contacts a
limit inputs: prelimit inputs:
limit switch?
1. Wire the AZ switch to 1. Wire the AZ switch to
TB1B1, TB1C1, and TB1D1 TB1B5, TB1C5, and TB1D5.
per 8200-02-0002.
2. Wire the EL switch to
2. Wire the EL switch to TB1B6, TB1C6, and TB1D6.
TB1B2, TB1C2, and TB1D2
3. Apply jumpers from TB1B1
per 8200-02-0002.
to TB1C1 and from TB1B1
3. Apply jumpers from TB1B5 to TB1D1 to bypass the AZ
to TB1C5 and TB1B5 to final limits.
TB1D5 to bypass the AZ
4. Apply jumpers from TB1B2
prelimit.
to TB1C2 and from TB1B2
4. Apply jumpers from TB1B6 to TB1D2 to bypass the EL
to TB1C6 and from TB1B6 to final limits.
TB1D6 to bypass the EL
prelimit.
Information about physically setting up the limit switches on the antenna is given in
Section 2.13, Set the AZ and EL Hardware Limits.
Section 2 - Install the System : Power Up the PDU
2.7 Power Up the PDU
The components of the Antenna Control System should be powered and tested individually until
all are deemed operational and ready for a system test.
WARNING
Dangerous voltages are exposed when the PDU door is open. Wear
appropriate PPE and follow site protocol for high voltage safety when
working inside the PDU. Failure to comply may result in severe
personal injury or death and/or equipment damage.
1. Visually inspect all wiring to and from the PDU to verify it has been completed per the
System Schematic and Cable Diagram.
2. Inspect all system and cabinet wiring to verify all connections are tight. Tighten any that
are loose.
3. Turn OFF all circuit breakers inside the PDU.
4. Before applying power to any unit, view the label inside the PDU and verify that the
proper voltages are supplied.
5. As required, turn ON the main breakers supplying power to the PDU.
6. At the input of the PDU’s disconnect, verify that the voltages agree with the labels.
7. After verifying the correct single-phase and three-phase voltages at the PDU's
disconnect, check that the three-phase supply agrees with the voltage range of the
motor controllers. A label on the top of the controller states the voltage range as 200 V
or 400 V. For a 200 V drive, the acceptable input voltage range is 200 – 240 VAC
50/60 Hz. The 400 V drives can take voltages from 380 – 480 VAC 50/60 Hz.
CAUTION
Do NOT apply any voltage that is out of the input range of the drives. If
necessary, install a step-up or step-down three-phase transformer
between the supply and PDU.
8. Turn on the main power disconnect switch (S1) on the side of the PDU.
9. Be sure the E-Stop switch on the side of the PDU is pulled out.
10. Turn on CB1 and CB12 (logic power), and measure the voltage at the following terminals
to verify the power supplies are correct.
 TB1-1 = 24 VDC
 TB1-9 = 12 VDC
 TB1-17 = -12 VDC
 TB1-13 = 5 VDC
Section 2 - Install the System : Power Up the Antenna Control Unit (ACU)
11. Bring up each motor controller separately by turning on the appropriate circuit breaker in
the PDU. Turn on CB6 for the AZ motor and then CB5 for the EL motor.
12. Plug the PMU into the connector on the side of the PDU.
13. Verify the communications link is established between the PDU and PMU, which
typically takes 1 to 2 minutes. On the PMU screen, check for any related LINK DOWN
status or fault messages and then correct any linkage problems.
14. Clear any other faults that prevent motion, as needed.

 Faults related to tracking, such as LOW SIGNAL, are normal at this time and do not
need to be corrected now.
 Faults such as HANDCRANK, PRELIMIT, FINAL LIMIT, and OVERTEMP are
typically caused because the PDU has not been configured properly for optional
equipment as described in Section 2.6.
2.8 Power Up the Antenna Control Unit (ACU)
1. Be sure the ACU's power cord is plugged into the back of the unit, and then apply power
to the unit. After the ACU boots up, the main ACU screen is displayed and a login
window appears.
NOTE
The ACU typically boots up before the ACB. A splash screen displays
the message Connecting to ACB while the ACB completes its bootup,
at which time the ACU-ACB connection is made automatically. If a
connection is not made after approximately 2 minutes, refer to
Section 4.1.1.
2. Log into the ACU using the default Login and Password (Admin, for both).
3. In the Faults window on the right side of the main ACU screen, press ACK-ALL to
acknowledge any faults and silence the audible alarm.
4. Check for any switch-related status and fault messages, and correct any problems.
Section 2 - Install the System : Disable the Motion Detect Faults Temporarily
2.9 Disable the Motion Detect Faults Temporarily
Because various antenna parameters are not yet set properly, operating the antenna using the
PMU will cause "motion detect" faults that disable the system. Therefore, you need to disable
these faults temporarily to continue the installation. For detailed descriptions of the Motion
Detect Faults window, refer to Section 4.16.1.
1. On the button bar along

the bottom of the ACU
screen, press Setup.
2. On the Setup menu, press

Position > Motion Detect
Faults.
3. For each field, press

Disable.
4. Execute the new NOTE

configuration. Later, after the antenna parameters are set
up, you can turn these faults back ON.
2.10 Verify Emergency Stop Operation
Emergency Stop (E-Stop) switches are mounted at various locations on or around the antenna.
Confirm that when any of these switches are activated, the drive power is removed through the
main contactor in the PDU.
For each Emergency Stop switch:
1. Depress the switch to activate it.
2. Verify that the AZ and EL axes are disabled, and verify that they cannot be re-enabled
while the Emergency Stop switch is activated.
3. Depress the switch again to deactivate it after the test.
NOTE
In addition to disabling the drives, activating the switch displays a
message in the ACU's fault window and on the bottom line of the PMU
and MCU display.
Section 2 - Install the System : Set Up the Motor Controllers
2.11 Set Up the Motor Controllers
On both the AZ and EL motor controllers, customize the configuration parameters as needed to
operate with the particular motors for your site.
2.11.1 Program the Parameter Values for Each Controller
When the PDU is powered ON:
1. Be sure the inverter drives are powered ON and no error messages are shown on the
controller's front panel.
Figure 2-1: Motor Controller Front Panel
2. Push the Down (V) arrow on the front panel until PAr appears on the display, and then
press Enter to show the parameters.
3. For parameters E1-01, E2-01, and E2-11, set each one to the proper value
for -01 (AZ drive) or -02 (EL drive) as listed in Table 2-3. For all other parameters, verify
that they match the values in the table.
NOTE
Set or verify only those parameters in the table; leave all other
parameters at their default setting.
a. Press the Up () or Down (V) arrow to change the flashing digit of the parameter.
Press the Right (>) arrow to select a new digit to edit.
b. When the parameter you want to change is shown, press Enter.
c. Use the Right (>) arrow to select the digit you want to modify, and then press  or V
to modify the digit.
d. Press Enter to save the parameter.
4. After saving all parameter changes, press Esc until the main screen appears.
Table 2-3: Motor Controller Configuration Parameters
Parameter -01 User Setting -02 User Setting

Description/Function Name Units
Number (Azimuth) (Elevation)
A1-02 Control Method 2 2
B1-01 Reference Selection 2 2
C1-01 Acceleration Time 0.8 0.8 Seconds
C1-02 Deceleration Time 0.8 0.8 Seconds
C6-01 Duty Selection 0 0
E1-01 Input Voltage See Note 1 See Note 1
E2-01 Motor Rated Current See Note 2 See Note 2 Amps
E2-11 Motor Rated Power See Note 3 See Note 3 kW
F6-50 MAC Address 64 64
F6-51 Baud Rate 4 4
F6-52 PCA Setting 21 21
F6-53 PPA Setting 71 71
F7-14 Duplex Mode Setting 1 1
F7-15 Speed Mode Setting 10 10
H1-03 Terminal S3 Function Selection 0F 0F
H2-02 P1 Terminal Selection 6 6
H5-01 Station Address 2 4
H5-04 Stop Method after Comms Error 0 0
L1-01 Motor Overload 2 2
Note 1: Set the input voltage to match the 3-phase voltage to the drive.
Note 2: Set the rated current to the value from the motor nameplate.
Note 3: Set the rated power to the value from the motor nameplate. This must be entered in kilowatts (kW).
Use kW = 4 x HP/3 to convert from horsepower (HP) to kW.
NOTE
If it is necessary to revert all configuration parameters to their default
values, set the A1-03 parameter to 2220.
2.11.2 Verify the DIP Switches
The DIP switches should be set properly at the factory, but you should verify the settings.
Remove the cover below the controller's front panel, and check the S2 and S3 DIP switches for
each controller according to the following table.
NOTE
These are the only switches you may need to change. Leave all other
switches at their default setting.
Table 2-4: S2 and S3 DIP Switch Settings
-01 User Setting -02 User Setting

Switch Description
(Azimuth) (Elevation)
S2 MEMOBUS/Modbus Terminal ON * OFF *

Resistance
S3 Sinking/Sourcing Mode SOURCE ** SOURCE **
* ON sets the controller's internal resistance to ON, used for the last controller in a series of slave
controllers; OFF sets no terminal resistance for all other controllers.
** SOURCE sets +24 V common.
Figure 2-2: DIP Switch S2
Figure 2-3: DIP Switch S3
For more information about the S2 and S3 switches and their settings, refer to the
manufacturer's manual included in the Vendor Data section of this O&M manual.
2.11.3 Autotune the Motor Controllers
After programming the motor controllers, autotune each controller to mate it to the connected
motor. The controllers must be autotuned while connected to the motor and cable. For more
information, refer to the Yaskawa AC Drive-V1000 Technical Manual.
1. Uncouple the motor from the antenna.
2. Turn ON power to the controller.
3. On the controller's front panel, press the Down (V) arrow until the display shows A.TUn.
4. Press Enter to begin setting parameters.
5. Press Enter again to display the value of T1-01.
6. Press the Right (>) arrow to select the one’s digit.
7. Set parameter T1-01 to 0 (rotating autotuning for open loop vector control). Use the Up
( ) or Down (V) arrow to change the value.
8. Save the setting by pressing Enter. The display should show T1-01.
9. Press the Up () arrow to access the motor output power parameter T1-02.
10. Press Enter to view the default value.
11. Press the Right (>) arrow to select the digit to edit.
12. Use the Up () or Down (V) arrow to enter the motor power nameplate data in kW.
Section 2 - Install the System : Phase the Motors
NOTE
Enter the power in kilowatts (kW). Use kW = 4 x HP/3 to convert from
horsepower (HP) to kW.
13. Press Enter to save the new setting.
14. Repeat steps 9 through 13 to set the remaining motor nameplate parameters.
 T1-03 = motor rated voltage (V)

 T1-04 = motor rated current (A)
 T1-05 = motor base frequency (Hz)
 T1-06 = number of motor poles
 T1-07 = motor rated speed (RPM)
15. After saving the last parameter, press the Up () arrow and confirm the display shows
TUn10 or TUn12.
WARNING
The next step causes the motor to start running.
16. Press the Run button to start autotuning. The DRV light on the drive flashes.
The autotune process typically takes one to two minutes. After a successful autotune,
the display shows End.
17. Put the motor controllers into Remote mode by pressing the LO/RE button.
18. Couple the motor back to the antenna.
2.12 Phase the Motors
Phase the motors to ensure they rotate in the correct direction. Two persons are required for
this task: one person to operate the controls and one person to observe antenna movement and
listen for unusual sounds from the antenna. If you hear loud, grinding, or unexpected fast motion
sounds, power off the system immediately and investigate the problem.
Before You Start
1. Check the area around the antenna for obstructions or objects left in the antenna that
may fall during movement.
2. Verify that all gear boxes, jacks, and other moving equipment have been lubricated.
3. Check for personnel safety.
Section 2 - Install the System : Set the AZ and EL Hardware Limits
Phasing Procedure
CAUTION
Use caution when moving any axis; the antenna may be near a
hardware limit. If possible, move the antenna out of the hardware limit
by a few degrees before starting the motor-phasing procedure.
1. If the PMU is not in control of the antenna (and the ACU is in control):
a. On the ACU, press Control > Control Change Allowed.
b. On the PMU, press the Active button. (The green light on the button turns on to
indicate the PMU has control.)
2. With the PMU in low-speed (LOSP) mode, enable the AZ axis.
3. Rotate the PMU knob slightly CW until antenna movement is observed.

 If the antenna moves in the opposite (CCW) direction, power OFF the PDU and
swap any two motor power wires at the PDU connection.
 If the antenna moves in the correct direction but the resolver readout on the PMU
moves in the opposite direction, change the resolver rotation from the ACU’s
Encoder Offset window [Setup > Position > Encoder Offset].
4. Rotate the PMU knob slightly CCW until antenna movement is observed.
5. After verifying the resolver readout, command (LOSP) back and forth several times. If no
unusual movement or noise is detected, disable the axis and select high speed (HISP) at
the PMU and slowly increase the rate up to full speed in each direction.
6. Repeat Step 1 through Step 4 for the EL axis to verify up and down antenna movement.
2.13 Set the AZ and EL Hardware Limits
Limit switches are mounted on each axis to prevent the motors from driving beyond the
mechanical range of travel. Depending your system configuration (refer to Section 2.6,
Configuring the PDU for Optional Equipment), each axis may have:
 A final limit switch only

 When a final limit switch is activated, the motor is disabled and cannot be overridden
by a PMU or MCU. You must back the axis out of the limit manually by using a motor
handcrank or similar method.
 A prelimit switch only

 A prelimit switch prevents the antenna from encountering a final limit switch. When a
prelimit switch is activated, the motor is disabled until an override command is given
by a PMU or MCU. For information about backing out of a prelimit or limit condition,
refer to Section 5.1.4, Operating the PMU. The Manual Rate point mode (refer to
Section 4.11.1.6) can also be used to back out of a prelimit.
 Both a prelimit and final limit switch (highly recommended)
Section 2 - Install the System : Set the AZ and EL Hardware Limits
CAUTION
Setting limits requires full motion travel of the antenna. Closely monitor
mechanical points, cable wraps, and other critical areas for problems
during antenna motion. Failure to comply may result in equipment
damage.
As an additional safety margin, the ACU uses software travel limits that can prevent the ACU
from issuing any commands that would activate either limit (as discussed later in this manual).
2.13.1 Setting a Final Switch
1. Using the PMU, set the final limit switch for Azimuth CW travel.
a. Temporarily remove or bypass any prelimit switches.
b. Slowly travel CW in Azimuth to the final CW travel limit. The antenna should never
travel beyond this limit. Otherwise, the drive mechanisms could be damaged.
Typically, you should then back off a few degrees.
c. Set the final limit switch to activate at that point.
d. With the limit switch activated, verify that the PMU CANNOT drive the axis.
e. Use a motor handcrank to back the antenna away from the limit switch manually.
(The PMU cannot override a final limit condition, even to back away from the limit
switch.)
f. Once the antenna is clear of the limit, drive back in and verify limit operation.
g. Clear all limits and remove any bypass jumpers.
NOTE
If also using prelimit switches, install the prelimit for this axis direction
before continuing to the next final limit switch.
2. Repeat Step 1 for the AZ CCW final limit.
3. Repeat Step 1 for the EL Up and Down final limits.
2.13.2 Setting a Prelimit Switch
1. Using the PMU, set the prelimit switch for Azimuth CW travel.
a. Slowly travel CW in Azimuth to the prelimit CW travel limit.
 If also using a final limit switch, set the prelimit approximately 1 degree within the
final limit.
 If using only a prelimit switch, set it within 1 degree of the mechanical travel limit.
b. Set the prelimit switch to activate at that point.
Section 2 - Install the System : Set Up the Encoder
c. Press and hold down the ENABLE button for the AZ axis on the PMU for
approximately 3 seconds to send an override command. Then, while continuing to
hold down the ENABLE button, verify the PMU will not drive further into the limit.
Then drive the antenna CCW until the switch is cleared.
d. Drive slowly back into the limit to verify that the antenna stops at the prelimit. Then
drive back away from the limit.
2. Repeat Step 1 for the AZ CCW limit.
3. Repeat Step 1 for the EL Up and Down limits.
2.14 Set Up the Encoder
NOTE
The encoders must be aligned physically to the axis of rotation to meet
the manufacturer’s mechanical alignment specifications.
2.14.1 Phase Position Feedback
1. Using the PMU, command CW antenna movement while monitoring the AZ angle
readouts at the PMU or ACU.
2. Verify that the angle count increases as the antenna moves.
3. If the angle count does NOT increase:

a. On the ACU, press Setup > Position > Encoder Offset.
b. In the Encoder Offset window, change the AZ Rotation parameter to reverse the
angle count.
4. Command CCW movement, and verify that the angle count decreases.
5. Repeat Step 1 through Step 4 for the EL axis.
Section 2 - Install the System : Set Up the Encoder
2.14.2 Calibrate Position Feedback
The calibration procedure depends on whether the encoder is mounted on the axis such that 1°
of antenna rotation equals 1° of encoder rotation.
NOTE
It is recommended to perform this calibration procedure at EL position
angles of less than 85°.
If the Encoder and Antenna Have a 1:1 Rotation
In this case, you only need to set the encoder offset values for each affected axis.
1. On the ACU, press Setup > Position > Encoder Offset and verify the AZ and EL Scale
fields are set to a factor of 1.
2. Using a compass for AZ and a level or inclinometer for EL, move the antenna to a
roughly known position. On the Encoder Offset window, set the AZ and EL Offset fields
so the position feedback is approximately correct.
3. Drive the antenna and peak on a known reference position, which can be obtained with
a theodolite or a satellite. Adjust the Offset values from step 2 to achieve the correct
pointing accuracy.
If the Encoder and Antenna Do Not Have a 1:1 Rotation
In this case, you may need to set the encoder scale factor for each affected axis.
NOTE
 This procedure is not usually required for this class of Antenna
Control System.
 If a POL potentiometer is used for the POL feedback device, it

is important to align the center of the potentiometer’s travel
range to the center of the feed’s rotation. Only the middle 50%
of the potentiometer’s travel range should be used. For
example, turn 3 through turn 6 would be the maximum range to
be used on an 8-turn potentiometer.
1. On the ACU, press Setup > Position > Encoder Offset and set the AZ and EL Scale
fields to a factor of 1.
2. Using two known reference positions (which may be obtained with a theodolite or a
satellite), drive the antenna to the first point. Using the AZ and EL Offset fields, make the
Azimuth and Elevation angles agree with the known pointing position.
3. From this known position, drive from one point to the other and record the travel range
as indicated on the ACU display.
Section 2 - Install the System : Set Up the Antenna Control Unit (ACU) Parameters
4. Adjust the scale factor as:
Scale Factor = Display Change / Actual Antenna Movement
5. With the scale factor set and the antenna pointing at a known angle, adjust the AZ and
EL Offset values on the Encoder Offset window to make the display agree with the
current known look angles.
6. Drive to the other known location and verify that the display agrees with the calculated
position. Check for basic antenna motion and confirm that no stall, runaway, reverse, or
oscillation situation occurs.
2.15 Set Up the Antenna Control Unit (ACU) Parameters
On the ACU, several parameters must be set up so the ACU software is configured properly for
your site. The following subsections give a brief overview of the ACU windows used to set these
parameters. For windows that require additional, detailed information about its parameters, refer
to the appropriate section later in the manual.
NOTE
An automatic screen-lock feature locks the ACU if it is inactive for a
specified time (5 minutes is the default). To enter a different time
period, press Setup > Other > Screen Control. To disable the lock,
check the Disable Lock Screen box.
2.15.1 Set Up the System Options
The System Options window contains parameters that directly affect many other system
settings. It is important to set these options as accurately as possible during installation. For
detailed descriptions of each option, refer to Section 4.16.14.
1. On menu bar
along the
bottom of the
ACU screen,
press Setup >
System
Options.
2. For each field, specify the applicable information for your site.
3. After executing any changes, cycle power to the PDU to activate the new settings.
2.15.2 Set Up Information About the Site
1. Press Setup > Other > Site Setup.
2. On the Site Setup window, enter the:

 Latitude, longitude, and altitude
 Dish aperture size of the antenna
 Name for the site
2.15.3 Set Up the Date and Time
The date and time appear on the title bar of the ACU screen, as well as in various recorded log
files. You can display the time in either UTC or local time.
NOTE
Some systems use time sources such as NTP to set the date and UTC
time automatically. With these systems, you can still specify a UTC
offset to display the local time. Also, verify the automatic date and time
are loaded properly into the ACU.
1. Press Setup > Other > Date Time.
2. Enter the current date and UTC time,

if needed.
3. To display local time, select Local and

specify the UTC Offset.
Note: UTC Offset is the difference
between the local time zone and UTC
time.
2.15.4 Set Up for Latched Faults
When a fault message appears on the ACU, the message either will clear automatically when
the fault is cleared or it will continue to be displayed until the operator or a supervisory computer
acknowledges the fault. The Latched Faults parameter selects between these conditions.
NOTE
Latched faults help the operator locate and troubleshoot any rare or
fast transient faults that might disappear before they are noticed.
1. Press Setup > Hardware >

Latched Faults.
2. Press either:
 DISABLE – Clears fault
messages automatically.
 ENABLE – Displays fault
messages until they are
acknowledged.
2.15.5 Set the Software Travel Limits
Software travel limits define an allowable travel region for the ACU software. The ACU cannot
move the antenna if a command would move the antenna outside these limits, which prevents
the antenna from encountering a hardware limit.
1. Press Setup > Position >

Travel Limit.
2. Enter the travel limits for all

axes, in both directions.
Set the limits inside the
hardware limit by
approximately 1 degree.
NOTE
At this time during installation, software travel limits may be estimates
because the AZ/EL/POL bias corrections are not yet determined. After
performing the Site Acceptance Test, use this window to set the travel
limits more accurately.
2.15.6 Set the Axis Loop Parameters for the Motors
These loop parameters determine the position control-loop performance for each axis.
Before You Start
If the system uses variable-speed drives, use the PMU to manually run each axis at full speed
for 30 seconds. Measure the axis velocity as described in the Site Acceptance Test Procedure.
That value is needed for the Axis Loop parameters. Refer to Section 4.16.5 for details about all
the parameters.
Procedure
1. Press Setup >

Position >
Axis >
AZ Parameters.
2. Enter values for

all parameters.
Notes:
 Maximum Velocity (for variable-speed drives only) – Velocity measured previously.
 Track Velocity – Slow speed used to make small, accurate position movements
needed for tracking. Refer to the procedure for calculating the Track Velocity given in
Section 4.16.5.1, AZ Parameters, which also covers troubleshooting.
 DeadBand is ideally set to 0.01° or 2% of the beamwidth, whichever is smaller.
3. Repeat this procedure to enter the values for each axis.
Verifying the Entered Values
Check for large angle motion, typically several degrees or more. Use a Point mode such as
Position Designate (refer to Section 4.11.1.10) to enter a position command, and confirm the
following antenna motion:
1. The system accelerates to full (slew) velocity.
2. The system approaches the commanded position.
3. The system decelerates to the track velocity starting at the slew decision point.
4. The system continues toward the commanded position at the track velocity.
5. As the system enters the deadband, the motors are turned off and the system stops with
a position error less than the deadband.
6. The system will not re-enable until the position error exceeds (deadband x hysteresis).
NOTE
While the system will not re-enable until this value including hysteresis
is reached, the goal is for the system to stop within the deadband.
Check small angle motions (less than the slew decision point):
1. The system accelerates to the track velocity.
2. Steps 4 through 6 above occur.
When properly configured, the system should:
 Move as described above.

 Stop within the deadband.
 Preferably not overshoot the commanded position for either small or large motions.
One overshoot and corrective motor motion back to the commanded position is acceptable but
not recommended. If this is not achieved, reduce the track velocity by small steps (such as 9%
of max, then 8%, etc.) until the desired operation is achieved. If you have to enter less than 5%,
contact GDST for support.
2.15.7 Re-Enable the Motion Detect Faults
Now that antenna parameters are set properly, re-enable the motion detect faults you
temporarily disabled in Section 2.9.
1. On the ACU, press Setup > Position > Motion Detect Faults.
2. For each field, select Enable.
3. Execute the new configuration.
2.15.8 Set Up the Band Table
The Band Table defines up to six frequency bands, one for each BDC/LNB. Later, the true RF
receive frequency of the beacon or tracking source is entered. The Band Table maps the RF
frequency into the IF frequency so the system can automatically locate the receive signal. For
details about this window, refer to Section 4.16.10. For a list of band table settings for standard
TRU configurations, refer to Drawing 8200-02-5106.
1. Press Setup >

Hardware >
Band Table.
2. For each available BDC/LNB, select a row in the table on the left and enter the
appropriate band values on the right
 Start frequency
 Stop frequency
 Local oscillator frequency of the BDC
 Relay bits for that frequency band
2.15.9 Set Up the TCP/IP Address for the ACB
If an external host or supervisory computer will be used to control the antenna, configure the
Ethernet port for communication between the ACB and external computer.
1. Press Setup >

Hardware >
ACB TCP/IP.
2. Enter the appropriate

values.
Refer to the Hardware Specification 8200-02-0007 for connection information.
For information about transferring control from the ACU to a supervisory computer, refer to the
Control button described in Section 4.14.
Section 2 - Install the System : Set Up the Monopulse Parameters (Monopulse only)
NOTE ABOUT NETWORK SECURITY

 Network security and access control is a customer responsibility. If system
access is available via TCP/IP and is not limited to a physical Ethernet
connection, we strongly recommend a customer firewall or other authentication.
 The recommended and warranted system uses an isolated network for

ACU/PDU/Receiver communications. This ensures that messages are
timely, no other network traffic interferes with the system, and no
internal system communications are output directly to the outside world.
2.16 Set Up the Monopulse Parameters (Monopulse only)
The following procedure adjusts the Modulation Index, determines/verifies the correct elevation
(EL) and cross-elevation (XEL) phase angles, and calculates the monopulse error slopes
required for monopulse tracking. The Modulation Index and phase angles must be set during
initial antenna commissioning, as well as after any component modification or replacement in
the RF signal path between the RF feed assembly and the Tracking Receiver Unit (TRU). These
components include the feed, waveguides, RF switches, cables, LNAs, and the monopulse RF
plate or any of its components. The ACU provides a Monopulse Parameters area in the RF
window to assist in setting the Modulation Index and proper phase angles.
 During initial commissioning, perform all sub-paragraphs to this paragraph.
 When changing to a different beacon frequency (>1 MHz), perform the following sub-
paragraphs:
 Setting Initial Values
 Adjusting the Phase Angles
 Testing the Phase Shift Values
 Setting the Error Slope (Scale Factor)
 Setting Up and Verifying the Table Phasing Data
Replacing or servicing the TRU will not require any adjustment. Ground station maintenance
personnel must familiarize themselves with this procedure.
It is assumed that the satellite is nearly stationary during the phasing adjustment. If target
velocity is high, the Manual Offsets mode combined with a pointing mode (such as Intelsat
Track, NORAD Track, Table Track, etc.) makes phasing practical on rapidly moving satellites.
A calculator is helpful in making several averaging computations. You are assumed to be

familiar with the ACU operation as well as such concepts as locating a satellite and manually
peaking the signal. Multiple measurements are strongly recommended for determining
tracking slope scale factors.
2.16.1 Setting Initial Values
The following procedures involve setting monopulse values on the RF window, but different
tracking situations use their own unique RF window. For example, Direct Mode uses one RF
window but each profile uses its own separate RF window. Setting the monopulse values on a
particular RF window does not automatically set them on all RF windows.
NOTE
This section assumes you are setting the RF window for Direct Mode.
If using a profile, be sure to set the RF window for that particular
profile. As necessary, write down the monopulse values for the current
RF window and then re-enter them in other RF windows.
1. Press Direct Mode > RF to open the RF window and then enter:
 Center Frequency: beacon frequency
 IF Bandwidth: 4 or 6 kHz (available IF bandwidths depend on your TRU)
 Sweep Width: 120.0 kHz
2. Locate the satellite, getting as close to boresight as possible.
3. Peak the Sum signal using the PMU. Verify the signal has been peaked with a spectrum
analyzer. Alternately, run Steptrack five times and calculate the average of the five
parked positions.
4. In the RF window:
a. Adjust the Offset to

obtain a 0 dB Sum
signal strength reading
at the ACU while on
the peak of the beacon
signal.
b. Open the Monitor >
System > Tracking
Receiver window, and
monitor the Input Level
field for the TRU
signal.
5. Verify the level is less than 0 dBm and greater than -95 dBm with signal offsets of 0 dB.
 If the signal is greater than 0 dBm, external attenuation is needed.
 If the signal is below -95 dBm, use a spectrum analyzer or other RF equipment to
find the level at the feed and through the RF path to determine why the amplitude is
low. Adding line amplifiers or repairing path components may be required to correct
the low signal levels.
6. In the Monopulse Parameters area of the RF window:
a. Set XEL Slope and

EL Slope to 1 V/deg.
b. Set XEL Phase Shift
to 180 degrees and
EL Phase Shift to
270 degrees.
c. Set Phase Shift
Select to Manual.
2.16.2 Adjusting the Modulation Index
1. Calculate the side-to-side 3 dB beamwidth (BW) using the EL axis to avoid the secant
effect of the AZ axis. Use the following 3 dB BW equation, where F = beacon frequency
in GHz and D = antenna diameter in meters. For example, if F=3.7 GHz and D=12 M:
21 21
3 dB BW  𝐹 × 𝐷 degrees = 3.7 × 12 degrees = 0.473 degrees
2. Drive the antenna off peak in EL by half of the calculated 3 dB BW, and verify that the
signal strength is (-3.0±0.1) dB. Measure the XEL and EL error signals at the TRU
auxiliary tracking output connector, J2, with a digital voltmeter.
 XEL at J2-2 with respect to J2-9
 EL at J2-3 with respect to J2-10
NOTE
Alternatively, the voltage can be measured by observing the XEL
and/or Error values from the TRU or ACU screen if the scale factor
(slope) is set to 1 V/deg.
3. For the active RF path, adjust the RF monopulse plate variable attenuator such that the
XEL/EL monopulse errors yield a Modulation Index of 20%. This corresponds to
0.5 VDC for the Root Sum of the Squares (RSS) of the XEL and EL monopulse error
signals as follows:
√𝑋𝐸𝐿2 + 𝐸𝐿2 = (0.5, +0.2, -0.05) VDC
4. After RSS adjustment, verify the TRU input signal level on the TRU front panel.
5. For systems with dual monopulse plates, perform steps 2 through 4 for the other RF
path.
2.16.3 Adjusting the Phase Angles
Phasing determines the optimal XEL and EL phase shift angles for proper monopulse operation.
 In most cases, use Autophase to determine the phase shift angles automatically.
 If Autophase is not supported by the ACU software or if Autophase does not yield
acceptable values, use manual phasing instead.
NOTE
Determining phase angles with Autophase does not automatically
apply them to the system. You must enter them manually into the
current RF parameter preset or any other RF presets that use this RF
path or tracking beacon. Likewise, you must also enter phase angles
determined with manual phasing into the appropriate RF presets.
2.16.3.1 Autophasing
NOTE
Before executing Autophase, you can use Setup > Hardware >
Monopulse > Autophase Algorithm described in Section 4.16.13.3 to
select the “maximum” or “minimum” algorithm. In most cases, Max is
recommended but Min can improve Autophase results in some
situations such as when using non-ideal feeds with cross-coupling.
1. Open the Autophase window

(Direct Mode > Track >
Autophase).
2. Set Peaking = Enable, and

execute the command.
The system automatically peaks the

antenna first using Steptrack and then
starts the Autophase process. This
ensures the process starts at the satellite’s
boresight (peak of the beacon signal).
NOTE
If the antenna is already pointed at the satellite’s boresight, set
Peaking = Disable.
2.16.3.2 Manual Phasing
1. Set up the graphical display buttons at the top-center of the main ACU screen to show
the XEL/EL monopulse error.
a. Press the hot spot on either of the top two graph buttons to open the configuration
window.
b. In the AZ/EL To Display drop-down list, select Monopulse Error XEL & EL.
c. To set the range for ±3 dB BW, use the equation under “Adjusting the Modulation
Index” on page 2-21 to convert 3 dB BW to degrees. Divide that number by 2. Then
enter that result as a negative value in both Min Range fields, and as a positive
value in both Max Range fields.
d. Press Execute.
2. Execute the Manual

Position mode (Direct
Mode > Point > Manual
Position).
3. Peak the Sum signal.
For information about
entering offsets, refer to
Section 4.12.
NOTE
On the main ACU screen, signal strength is shown in the third
graphical display button labeled Tracking RF. If necessary, press the
button and select Signal Strength in dB (not dBm).
4. Verify that the XEL and EL errors have negative signs as described below.
a. Step CW until the Sum signal strength is (-3.0±0.2) dB. Verify the XEL error is
negative. If not, go to the Monopulse Parameters area of the RF window and change
the XEL Phase Shift value by 180 degrees.
b. Use Manual Position to return to the peak of the Sum signal.
c. Step UP until the Sum signal strength is (-3.0±0.2) dB. Verify the EL error is
negative. If not, go to the Monopulse Parameters area of the RF window and change
the EL Phase Shift value by 180 degrees.
5. Find the optimal XEL phase shift angle as described below. For best results, use the
average of two values (one stepping UP and one DOWN).
a. Use Manual Position to peak the Sum signal.
b. Step UP until the Sum signal strength is (-3.0±0.2) dB. In the Monopulse Parameters
area of the RF window, adjust the EL and XEL phase shift values in decreasing
amounts to minimize the XEL error voltage according to the digital voltmeter. The
absolute value of this error should be less than 50 mV; the smaller the better.
Maintain 90 degrees of phase shift between the EL and XEL phase shift values. After
the XEL phase shift value is adjusted, record the resultant XEL phase shift angle.
c. Peak the Sum signal again, and then step DOWN and perform the same procedure
used for stepping UP.
d. Calculate the average of the two XEL phase shift values. Enter that average in the
Monopulse Parameter area of the RF window.
6. Find the optimal EL phase shift angle as described below. For best results, use the
average of two values (one stepping CW and one CCW).
a. Use Manual Position to peak the Sum signal.
b. Step CW until the Sum signal strength is (-3.0±0.2) dB. If the EL error is greater than
50 mV, adjust only the EL phase shift value to minimize the EL error voltage
according to the digital voltmeter. This error should be less than 50 mV; the smaller
the better.
c. Peak the Sum signal again, and then step CCW using the same procedure used for
stepping CW.
d. Calculate the average of the two EL phase shift values. Enter that average in the
Monopulse Parameter area of the RF window.
7. If the EL (XEL) voltage is less than 0.45 VDC when stepping off (-3.0±0.1) dB after the
XEL (EL) error voltage is minimized, repeat the Modulation Index Adjustment and then
repeat the Phasing Adjustment procedure.
2.16.4 Testing the Phase Shift Values
1. In the RF window,
set Low Signal
Threshold
= -15.0 dB and
Acquire Threshold
= -10.0 dB.
2. Execute the Manual

Position mode
(Direct Mode >
Point > Manual
Position).
3. Step CW to
obtain -3 dB Sum
signal strength and
verify that the
reported XEL error
is negative and the
EL error remains at
approximately
0 degrees.
5. Using Manual Position, step UP to obtain -3 dB Sum signal strength and verify that the
reported EL error is negative and the XEL error remains at approximately 0 degrees.
7. Using Manual Position, step CW (or CCW) until the Sum signal strength is less
than -5 dB. Step UP (or DOWN) until the Sum signal strength is less than -10 dB but
greater than -15 dB.
8. Execute Monopulse (Direct Mode > Track > Monopulse), and verify that the antenna is
returned to the signal peak.
NOTE
If the monopulse error signal is excessively noisy or if there is
excessive axis movement, you may need to use Setup > Hardware >
Monopulse > Mono Filter to enable the low-pass monopulse filter.
If the antenna drives away from the satellite, check the phase angle values by repeating the
Phasing Adjustment procedure.
2.16.5 Setting the Error Slope (Scale Factor)
1. Execute Monopulse (Direct Mode > Track > Monopulse) to peak the Sum signal.
2. Calculate EL slope.
a. Execute Manual Position (Direct Mode > Point > Manual Position) and step UP
until the Sum signal strength is (-3.0±0.2) dB. Record the change in EL error channel
voltage and the change in EL position.
NOTES
 Measure the EL and XEL error channel voltages at the TRU
auxiliary tracking output connector J2:
- XEL at J2-2 with respect to J2-9
- EL at J2-3 with respect to J2-10
 Alternatively, measure the voltage by observing the XEL and/or

Error values from the TRU or ACU screen if the scale factor
(slope) is set to 1 V/deg.
 On the ACU screen, signal strength is shown in the third

graphical display button, labeled Tracking RF, at the top-center
of the ACU screen. If necessary, press the button and select
Signal Strength in dB (not dBm).
b. Execute Monopulse to return to the Sum signal peak.

c. Execute Manual Position and step DOWN until the Sum signal strength is
(-3.0±0.2) dB. Record the change in EL error channel voltage and the change in
EL position.
d. Execute Monopulse to return to the Sum signal peak.
e. Determine the mean EL -3 dB position change by averaging the UP and DOWN
position changes.
f. Determine the mean EL error voltage by averaging the absolute values of the UP
and DOWN voltage changes.
g. Divide the average voltage change by the average position change, and store this
value as the EL Slope (Volts/deg) in the Monopulse Parameters area in the RF
window.
3. Execute Monopulse to return to the Sum signal peak.
4. Calculate the XEL slope as described below.

a. Execute Manual Position and step CW until the Sum signal strength is (-3.0±0.2) dB.
Record the change in XEL error channel voltage and the change in XEL position.
NOTE
You cannot read the XEL position directly from the ACU. Instead, read
the change in AZ position, as well as the EL angle, and calculate the
change in XEL position using:
ΔXEL position = (ΔAZ position) x [cosine (EL angle)]
b. Execute Monopulse to return to the Sum signal peak.

c. Execute Manual Position and step azimuth CCW until the Sum signal strength is
(-3.0±0.2) dB. Record the change in XEL error channel voltage and the change in
XEL position.
NOTE
Use the previous equation to calculate the change in XEL position.
d. Determine the mean XEL -3 dB position change by averaging the CW and CCW
position changes.
e. Determine the mean XEL error voltage by averaging the absolute values of the CW
and CCW XEL voltage changes.
f. Divide the average voltage change by the average position change, and store this as
the XEL Slope (Volts/deg) in the Monopulse area in the RF window.
NOTE
The monopulse error slopes (scale factors) are different between CP
(circular) and LP (linear) targets. Therefore, if the tracking system is
used to track both CP and LP targets, verify that the error slopes are
set up properly to ensure satisfactory monopulse operation.
2.16.6 Setting Up and Verifying the Table Phasing Data
This procedure applies to only those systems that have redundancy in the RF path (such as
redundant LNAs, etc.).
1. Set up the Phase Shift

Table (Setup >
Hardware >
Monopulse > Phase
Shift Table) to include
all valid RF
configurations.
Each RF configuration
has a unique bit
pattern.
NOTE
If an invalid bit pattern is detected while in monopulse operation, a
monopulse phasing fault inhibits monopulse operation.
2. In RF window:
a. In the Monopulse
Parameters area, set
the Phase Shift
Select field to Table.
b. In the Phase Shift
Table area, save the
XEL and EL phase
shift values
corresponding to
each RF
configuration/bit
pattern for which the
phase shift values
were determined
using either
Autophase or manual
phasing.
Section 2 - Install the System : Set Up and Execute a Tracking Profile for a Satellite
3. Execute Monopulse (Track > Monopulse). For each RF configuration/bit pattern, verify
that the phase angles from the ACU are loaded into the active TRU and that Monopulse
tracking continues.
NOTE
During the RF configuration transitions, a RCVR TRACK fault appears
briefly.
2.17 Set Up and Execute a Tracking Profile for a Satellite
To confirm the system's performance while tracking a satellite, set up and execute a tracking
profile. This is the preferred method of tracking a satellite. A profile combines all of the
necessary parameters and modes, and automatically switches between Pointing and Track
modes when needed.
1. Refer to Section 3 - Satellite Tracking Quick Start Guide for the general sequence of
procedures used to set up and execute a tracking profile.
NOTE
 For this confirmation procedure, set up a profile for a satellite that
will typically be tracked at this site.
 Many of the modes let you set up more than one "preset", where
each preset can define parameters for a different satellite or
situation.
2. After executing the profile and verifying that the antenna is tracking properly (as
described in the Satellite Tracking Quick Start Guide), return to Section 2.18 to complete
the installation procedure.
2.18 Verify Performance Using the SAT Procedure
For the final installation step, perform the Site Acceptance Test (SAT) Procedure 8200-02-0045
to verify the system's performance.
 If using Optrack, wait until Optrack collects enough data to ensure the most accurate
tracking before performing the SAT.
 If you have problems performing the procedure, refer to Section 8 - Troubleshooting and
Maintenance in this manual or contact General Dynamics SATCOM Technologies.
 If you add new components to an existing installation, perform the SAT again and
compare the new results to the previous results.
Section 2 - Install the System : Verify Performance Using the SAT Procedure
Section 3 - Satellite Tracking Quick Start Guide : Verify Performance Using the SAT Procedure
SECTION 3 - SATELLITE TRACKING QUICK START GUIDE
To begin, press the Profile button

on the button bar:
Set up a Profile for this A satellite profile combines all the

satellite parameters and modes necessary to
track a satellite.
Set up a Point mode to Before the system can begin tracking, a Then press the appropriate
button on the Profile window.
move the antenna to an Point mode moves the antenna to the
initial position expected satellite position.
 Geo Designate or Geo Preset
 Intelsat Track
 NORAD Track
 Optrack
 Position Designate or Position Preset
 Table Track
Set up an Acquire mode An Acquire mode specifies a scanning

to search for the signal pattern the antenna uses to home in on
the satellite signal during both pointing
and tracking.
 Box Scan
 Geo Scan
Set up a Track mode When the system detects a signal

to track the acquired above the specified threshold, it
signal switches from Point mode to Track
mode and begins tracking the satellite
based on signal strength.
 Steptrack
 Optrack
 Monopulse
Set up RF parameters RF parameters specify the satellite's

center frequency, IF bandwidth,
polarization type, threshold values for
signal levels, etc. This allows the system
to find and use the tracking signal.
Set up POL parameters POL parameters specify how the

system positions the optional POL axis.
Execute the Profile to You can track the satellite at any later
begin tracking time by selecting its Profile and
executing it, without re-entering the
parameters and modes.
Section 3 - Satellite Tracking Quick Start Guide : Set Up a Tracking Profile for the Satellite
3.1 Set Up a Tracking Profile for the Satellite
You can track a satellite manually by using Direct Mode. However, a profile combines all the
parameters and modes necessary to track a satellite so they can all be executed as a single set.
The profile automatically switches from mode to mode as needed.
1. Press the Profile button in the button bar along the bottom of the ACU screen.
NOTE
You also set up a profile by pressing the “hot spot” on the Profile
button in the upper-right part of the main ACU screen.
The Profile window opens to its Summary tab.
2. In the drop-down box, select which of the 20 available profiles you want to set up.
3. Enter values for:

 Name - Identify this profile, which typically includes the satellite name and any
particular information. (When the profile is running, this name appears in the Title bar
of the main ACU screen and the Profile button on the Dashboard.)
 User Notes - Other information that may help identify this profile, such as when or
why it should be used.
4. Press Save.
3.2 Set Up a Point Mode for the Satellite's Initial Position
Before a system can track a satellite using a Track mode, a Point mode is used to point the
antenna at an initial position where the system can begin searching for the satellite. Preferred
Point modes depend on the data available.
 Preset Position requires minimal data.
 Intelsat Track, NORAD Track, and Table Track are useful for inclined-orbit satellites
when such data is available. (Date, time, and site location must be accurate.)
 Optrack is a better choice for geosynchronous satellites. It uses Steptrack to collect

enough data to calculate an ephemeris pointing model that results in the most accurate
tracking.
Section 3 - Satellite Tracking Quick Start Guide : Set Up a Point Mode for the Satellite's Initial Position
NOTES ABOUT OPTRACK

 Optrack is typically not an initial Point mode for a new satellite
because it has not collected tracking data for an ephemeris
model. So no initial pointing data is available unless used
previously.
 You can precharge Optrack using current Intelsat or NORAD

data to calculate the model and provide the initial pointing data.
This shortens the process of “learning” the orbit. Refer to
Section 4.11.1.9.
 Optrack is also a valid Track mode. Refer to Section 3.4.
SOME POINT MODES NOT AVAILABLE IN A PROFILE

Point modes such as Position Designate and Geo Designate are for
Direct Mode only. (In a profile, use Position Preset and Geo Preset
instead.) To see which Point modes are valid, open the Profile window
and check the Point Mode drop-down box on the Point tab.
1. On the Profile window, press the Point tab.
2. From the Point Mode drop-down box, select a Point mode (NORAD Track for this
example).
3. From the Object drop-down box, select the object to use.
4. As necessary, update any information that describes where the system will start
searching for the satellite.
5. Press Save, not Execute. (The Profile will execute the Point mode later.) Then press
Save in the confirmation window.
Section 3 - Satellite Tracking Quick Start Guide : Set Up an Acquire Mode
3.3 Set Up an Acquire Mode
When a tracking signal is not being received, the Acquire mode specifies a scanning pattern
used to locate the signal. For details about the Acquire modes, refer to Section 4.11.2.1, Box
Scan and Section 4.11.2.2, Geo Scan.
1. On the Profile window, press the Acquire tab.
2. From the Acquire Mode drop-down box, select an Acquire mode (Box Scan for this
example).
3. Enter values to define the scan pattern.
4. Press Save, not Execute. (The Profile will execute the Acquire mode later.) Then press
Section 3 - Satellite Tracking Quick Start Guide : Set Up a Track Mode
3.4 Set Up a Track Mode
After the system uses the Point mode and/or Acquire mode to locate the satellite's signal (above
the given threshold value), the profile automatically switches to the selected Track mode.
Although Optrack is also a Point mode, it is a valid Track mode in a profile and is
recommended. For details about Steptrack, Optrack, and Monopulse, refer to Section 4.11.3.1,
Section 4.11.3.2, and Section 4.11.3.4, respectively.
1. On the Profile window, press the Track tab.
2. From the Track Mode drop-down box, select a Track mode (Optrack for this example).
NOTE
Typically, Optrack does not contain enough data to begin tracking the
satellite. Therefore, the system initially uses Steptrack (even though it
is not selected) to collect sufficient tracking data. Then the system
switches automatically to Optrack for improved performance.
NOTE
To use Monopulse, be sure to set up the phase angles and scale factor
for the given frequency. Refer to Section 2.16, Set Up the Monopulse
Parameters (Monopulse only).
3. Enter values to set up the Optrack data.
4. Press Save, not Execute. (The Profile will execute the Track mode later.) Then press
Section 3 - Satellite Tracking Quick Start Guide : Set Up the RF Parameters for the Satellite
3.5 Set Up the RF Parameters for the Satellite
These parameters define the RF parameters of the satellite and set threshold levels that affect
how and when the system will track the satellite. For details about the RF parameters, refer to
Section 4.9.1.
1. On the Profile window, press the RF tab.
(Scroll to see all fields.)
2. Enter the appropriate values. Critical values are:

 Center Frequency
IMPORTANT
Center Frequency is the satellite beacon frequency, not the down-
converted L-band frequency. The down-conversion is performed
automatically using the Band Table (refer to Section 4.16.10).
 IF Bandwidth
 Low Signal Threshold
 Acquire Threshold
IMPORTANT
During initial configuration, expected RF power levels may not be
known. In that case, use low power levels. Continue the set up,
execute the profile selected, and locate the satellite. When the system
is on the main beam, the maximum expected power is known. Then
return to the RF window and set Low Signal Threshold and Acquire
Threshold relative to the peak value.
Section 3 - Satellite Tracking Quick Start Guide : Set Up the POL Mode (Optional)
 Offset – Used to offset the signal to any level preferred, typically 0 dB = highest
signal level expected. Alternately, this is used to match the actual power level
received.
 POL Mode and POL Select (optional) – Select Circular or Linear and LHCP/RHCP or
HORZ/VERT polarization.
 POL Offset (optional) – Correction applied for satellites with non-standard POL
orientations. Select Circular or Linear and LHCP/RHCP or HORZ/VERT polarization.
 Limit Configuration – During initial installation, select None. Afterward, select Box or
Slot, as needed.
NOTE ABOUT MONOPULSE

Also, when using Monopulse, enter appropriate data in the Monopulse
Parameters area and Phase Shift Table area in the RF window. Refer
to Section 2.16, Set Up the Monopulse Parameters (Monopulse only).
3. Press Save, not Execute. (The Profile will execute the RF settings later.) Then press
3.6 Set Up the POL Mode (Optional)
The POL mode determines which POL angles are used for this profile.
1. On the Profile window, press the POL tab.
2. From the POL Mode drop-down box, select a POL mode (Auto for this example).
 Stop – POL axis angle is not changed.
 Auto – Uses POL angles calculated by the POL Auto mode. The specified site
location must be correct.
 Preset Position – Uses POL values entered in a specified preset in the Preset
Position mode.
 Table Track – Uses POL values entered in a specified table in the Table Track
mode.
3. Press Save, not Execute. (The Profile will execute the POL settings later when it begins
tracking the satellite.) Then press Save in the confirmation window.
3.7 Execute the Profile to Begin Tracking
To track the satellite:
Section 3 - Satellite Tracking Quick Start Guide : Execute the Profile to Begin Tracking
1. Confirm that all motors are enabled, and no faults will prevent the antenna from moving.
2. Press the Profile button in the lower-left corner of the button bar.
3. In the drop-down box, select the profile you want to run.
4. Press Execute, and then press Execute in the confirmation window.

 If the antenna is already pointed at the target, tracking should begin. The exact
sequence of operations depends on the configured selections.
 If the antenna is not pointed at the target and the selected Point mode is valid, the
antenna should move rapidly to the target location, locate the RF signal, and begin
tracking.
NOTE
The profile name appears in the Title bar at the top of the main ACU
screen and in the Profile button on the ACU Dashboard screen.
5. Verify that the antenna is moving and tracking the satellite properly as described. If not,
use the status/fault messages and troubleshooting sections of this manual to determine
the issue and correct the configuration.
Section 4 - Antenna Control Unit : Execute the Profile to Begin Tracking
SECTION 4 - ANTENNA CONTROL UNIT
The ACU is the primary control and monitor interface for the Antenna Control System. A touch-
screen interface lets you command antenna modes, set parameters, and monitor fault and
status messages. The ACU communicates to the system via a standard Ethernet connection to
the Antenna Control Board in the PDU chassis.
Status
Dashboard Title Bar List
Area for Optional Monitor

Display Meters
Faults
Button Bar USB Port
List
The USB port is used to back up system parameters and perform system upgrades. It can also
be used as a keyboard or mouse port, if needed.
Section 4 - Antenna Control Unit : Powering Up and Shutting Down the ACU
4.1 Powering Up and Shutting Down the ACU
4.1.1 Startup Procedure
At a minimum, the system requires AC power at the PDU and ACU for normal operation. ACU
power is provided through an AC-to-24-VDC power brick. For information about powering up the
PDU and ACU, refer to Sections 2.6 and 2.8.
During a normal startup, the ACU typically boots up before the ACB. A splash screen displays
the message Connecting to ACB while the ACB completes its bootup, at which time the ACU-
ACB connection is made automatically and the startup sequence continues.
NOTE
 If a connection is not made after approximately 2 minutes, you
are prompted to check the cabling between the ACU and PDU
and to verify the ACB is powered on. Then press Retry ACB
Connection on the splash screen.
 In systems with two or more ACUs, you may need to press the
Configure ACU Options link to toggle the default address of
the ACU so multiple ACUs can be used on the same system.
4.1.2 Normal Operation and System Control
The ACU communicates with the ACB to determine if another unit is already in control. If not,
the ACU receives system control.
The following units can provide control and system monitoring to varying levels, but, at any
given time, only one may have system control.
 ACU (primary)
 Portable Maintenance Unit (PMU)
 Manual Control Unit (MCU) – optional
 Supervisory Computer – optional
If the ACU is in control and a power loss occurs in the ACU or in the position loop closure
electronics in the PDU, the system automatically offers control to the PMU or MCU. However,
the PMU or MCU does not actually receive control until that unit accepts it.
Additionally, at any time when the ACU is in control, you can use Control (see Section 4.14) on
the button bar at the bottom of the ACU screen to "allow a control change". This lets any other
unit accept control. After a particular unit accepts control, no other unit can take control until that
particular unit allows another control change. You can also use the Control button to return
control to the ACU.
Section 4 - Antenna Control Unit : Powering Up and Shutting Down the ACU
4.1.3 Logging In and Logging Out
At system startup, you must log in before you can use the system. By default, you remain
logged in until you log out manually. For example, you may want to log out to prevent
unauthorized access when you leave the area.
NOTE
The user database may have Auto Logout enabled for some users,
which logs them off automatically after a specified time.
Logging In
1. Press in the bottom-right corner of the ACU screen.
2. In the Login window, enter your user name and password and then press Login.
(An on-screen keyboard opens automatically.)
The factory-default User Name

and Password are both:
Admin
Note: Be sure to enter an

uppercase A; the User Name and
Password are case-sensitive.
The Login button changes to Logout.
NOTE
You can also press the user name (which is followed by ) in the
upper-right corner of the main ACU screen to select Login and Logout
from a menu. However, it’s more straightforward to use the buttons.
Logging Out Manually
1. Press in the bottom-right corner of the ACU screen.
2. Press Logout in the confirmation window.
The Logout button changes to Login.
4.1.4 Power Shutdown Procedure
To power off the ACU, unplug the unit from the power supply or turn off the power supply.
Section 4 - Antenna Control Unit : Overview of the ACU Screen
4.2 Overview of the ACU Screen
The main ACU screen consists of the following areas.
Dashboard
NOTE
The buttons in the Dashboard have a “hot spot” (the in the button’s
upper-right corner) that you can press. For example, the Point button
displays information about the current Point mode, but you can also
press its hot spot to open a command window that lets you edit the
mode parameters or select a different mode.
AZ/EL Tracking RF
Graphical Graphical
Display Display Profile
Buttons Button Button
Hot
Spot
Point
Mode
Button
Axis
Status/ Acquire
Position Mode
Button
On POL systems, press the RF Track

and/or buttons in the upper-left Button Mode
corner of the 3rd box to toggle Button
between POL and LAT/LON.
Systems without POL show only
LAT/LON.
The Dashboard provides:
 Axis status and position in AZ/EL. Depending on the system configuration, POL and/or
Latitude/Longitude are also shown.
 User-configurable graphical display for other axis information and signal strength.
 Currently selected profile, mode(s), and state(s).
You can change the various modes, access the user controls, and enter offsets. Each area and
button in the Dashboard is described in detail later in this section.
Section 4 - Antenna Control Unit : Overview of the ACU Screen
Title Bar
Date and Time set on Setup >

Name of Profile currently Other > Date Time (or time Stop
in use tracking a satellite source such as IRIG-B or NTP) button
Site name set on Unit in control of the system Name of user currently logged
Setup > Other > such as ACU #1, PMU, MCU on (followed by arrow); used
Site Setup to set user and screen options
Pressing initiates the Stop mode, which brings the antenna to a stop, disables all axes,
and sets all axis brakes.
Button Bar
The buttons along the bottom of the screen provide access to various setup and configuration
windows for the system. Each button is described later in this section.
Status List
The Status list shows all current system status messages, as well as the status of system
submodes.
(statuses shown are representative)
For a description of possible messages, refer to Section 7 - Status Messages.
Section 4 - Antenna Control Unit : Important Operational Features
Faults List
This Faults list shows all current system faults. When a new fault occurs, the associated fault
message appears in the list and an audible alarm sounds until you acknowledge the new faults.
Any faults that have not By default, an acknowledged

been acknowledged are fault is still active and remains
highlighted with a red in the Faults list until that fault
background. is cleared. Then it is removed
automatically.
Acknowledging a fault
indicates that you know To specify whether a fault
the fault exists. It does not remains in the list until it is
clear the fault. acknowledged even if it has
already been cleared, refer to
Section 4.16.12, Latched
Faults.
(faults shown are representative)
 Press ACK ALL to acknowledge all faults, which removes the red background. The System
Fault button stops flashing and the alarm turns off.
For a description of possible faults and corrective actions, refer to Section 8.1, Fault Messages.
4.3 Important Operational Features
4.3.1 Direct Mode vs. Profile
The system’s two overall operational modes are:
 Direct Mode - Lets you control the system manually. To track a satellite or other target
in Direct Mode, set up the necessary RF parameters, Point mode, Acquire mode, and
Track mode, and manually execute each mode in sequence.
 Profile - Lets you set up all the parameters necessary to track a satellite (Point mode,
Acquire mode, Track mode, and RF settings) and save them all as a single, self-
contained profile. You can save up to 20 profiles, where each profile represents a
particular satellite or target. In some cases, you may use several profiles for the same
satellite, where each profile specifies a different beacon frequency or signal polarization.
You can easily switch between profiles as needed.
4.3.1.1 Advantages and Disadvantages of Direct Mode
You may want to use direct mode when:
 You want to do “on the fly” tests by modifying various RF and mode parameters.
Because this only for testing, you do not want to overwrite any existing profiles with test
settings that may not be used again. (If the test is successful in Direct Mode, you can
modify a profile to use the new settings.)
 You mostly track a single target over long periods (months or years) at a time, and
seldom if ever switch from one target to another.
 You want to use a Direct Mode-only Point mode that is not available in a profile: Geo
Designate, Manual Position, Manual Rate, Moon Track, Position Designate, Stow, or
Sun Track.
Disadvantages of Direct Mode are:
 If you switch from one target to another – even between the same small set of targets
over and over – you have to enter the RF and mode parameters for the new target and
then repeat the manual tracking process each time.
 If you do not execute the various modes in the proper sequence, the system may not be
able to locate and track the target.
4.3.1.2 Advantages and Disadvantages of Profiles
You may want to use profiles when:
 You track multiple satellites and need to switch between them on a frequent or semi-
frequent basis. You can set up a profile for each and then switch between profiles as
needed … as opposed to using Direct Mode to manually change the parameters for
each different satellite and then manually executing each mode separately. Profiles
handle mode switching from Point, to Acquire, to Track as needed without operator
expertise or intervention.
 You want a standard operating sequence and procedure. Configuring profiles in the
same settings provides a repeatable operational process.
 Generally, each profile has its own separate, independent database that contains the
settings for that profile only.
Disadvantages of profiles are:
 You cannot change a setting for “on the fly” testing unless you save the changes in the
profile.
4.3.1.3 Determining if the System is in Direct Mode or Running a Profile
Both the Title bar on the main ACU screen and the Profile button show “NONE” if in Direct Mode
or the name of the profile that is running.
If the Title bar has changed to a Status bar (see Section 4.4.1), either the name of the profile or
“DIRECT MODE” is shown in the right side of the Status bar.
If you press the Point, Acquire, Track, or RF button when a profile is running, the Profile window
opens. If in Direct Mode, the title bar of the mode window shows “DIRECT MODE”.
4.3.1.4 How Direct Mode and Profiles Share Data Presets
In most cases, each profile has its own independent database. For example, if several profiles
all use Optrack as the Point mode, each profile has its own Optrack database. Changing the
Optrack parameters for one profile does not affect the Optrack parameters in the other profiles.
However, for Point modes that use multiple presets (Geo Preset, Intelsat Track, NORAD Track,
Preset Position, and Star Track), those data presets are shared between Direct Mode and all
profiles.
For example, suppose you have a profile that uses preset #1 in Intelsat Track. If you use that
same preset in Direct Mode and change any of the values, those changes will also affect the
profile that uses that preset.
4.3.1.5 Does a Dashboard Button Affect a Profile or the Direct Mode?

When you press the hot spot on the Point, Acquire, Track, RF, or POL button, the system
automatically opens the corresponding window in Direct Mode or in a profile according to which
is in effect at that time.
4.3.2 AZ/EL and POL Angles Are Entered in Separate Windows
On previous versions of the Model 950A, the Preset Position, Position Designate, and Table
Track point modes let you enter AZ/EL as well as optional linear POL angles on the same
window, but that is no longer the case. On this current Model 950A system:
 All Point modes now enter AZ/EL angles only (and other pointing parameters as
needed).
 All POL angles must be entered in a separate POL mode window. For example, the POL
mode has separate windows for entering POL angles for Preset Position, Position
Designate, and Table Track.
 You can also select POL modes for Stop (do not use a POL angle) and Auto
(calculate a POL angle automatically).
 You can “mix and match” Point modes and POL modes. For example, you can use
the Preset Position point mode with the POL angle specified in the Position
Designate POL mode.
Section 4 - Antenna Control Unit : Working with the User Interface
4.4 Working with the User Interface
4.4.1 When a Command Window is Open
The command window replaces the Dashboard. To provide an overview of the information from
the Dashboard, the Title bar changes to a Status bar that summarizes the information.
Status Bar
NOTE
The Faults list is no longer visible, but a or button

appears on the left end of the Status bar.
 indicates no faults are active.
 indicates the system has one or more faults.
 indicates the number of unacknowledged faults.

To open the Faults list in a separate window, press the System Fault
button. To close the list, press in the upper-right corner of the
window or press anywhere outside the window.
4.4.2 Closing a Command Window
Press in the upper-right corner of the window. Most windows do not have separate Close
buttons.
4.4.3 Expanding the Status Bar
You can expand the standard Status bar to show the position graphs for each axis.
 Press any of the two-headed arrows to switch between the two views.
With the expanded view, the command window slides down accordingly, so you may need to
scroll the command window to see all its fields and buttons.
4.4.4 Number of Command Windows That Can Be Open at a Time
When only one command window is open, it replaces the Dashboard area from the main
screen. If you open another command window with the previous one still open, the area
changes to a tri-pane view, with the next command window opening in the next available pane.
As necessary, the system may reformat command windows to fit in the smaller tri-pane view.
You may need to scroll to see all the fields and buttons. Also, you can still edit the contents of a
window in the tri-pane view.
A maximum of three command windows can be open in the tri-pane view. If you attempt to open
a fourth, you are prompted to close one of the windows. For example:
 Press the button for the window you want to close. The new window replaces it.
NOTE
Some windows require a full screen and cannot be shown in the tri-
pane view. No other window can be open at the same time.
For example, the Monitor > Display > Edge Meter window requires the full screen. If you
attempt to open this window when the tri-pane view shows any open windows, the following
prompt appears.
 Press Close All to close all the windows and open the new full-screen window.
NOTE
As necessary, save any changes before closing a window.
If an open window already uses the full screen, you are prompted to close it. For example:
4.4.5 Expanding a Command Window in the Tri-Pane View
In the tri-pane view, to expand any window to cover all three panes, press the two-headed
arrow in the appropriate pane.
To return to the tri-pane view, press the arrow again.
4.4.6 Redisplaying the Dashboard on the Main ACU Screen
The Dashboard reappears when all command windows are closed. Also, the Status bar returns
to the normal Title bar.
4.4.7 Entering Data Using the On-Screen Keyboards
When you press a field that allows alphanumeric input, the following keyboard opens.
Name of
the field
Current
value
To enter the typed value into the field and close the keyboard, press Accept.
When you press a field that allows numeric-only input, the following keyboard opens.
Name of the field

Valid input range
Current
value
NOTE
Although the keyboard shows the valid input range, it does not prevent
you from entering an out-of-range value. If you do, an error message
appears. For example:
A red border identifies the field

containing the invalid entry.
When you press OK to dismiss the message, the system prompts you to correct the entry.
Fix – Reopens the keyboard so you can enter a valid entry.
Ignore – Temporarily ignores the invalid entry, but leaves the red border around the field. When
you execute the command, the original error message reappears. The system will not execute
the command until you correct the entry.
4.4.8 Locking or Unlocking the Screen
By default, the screen locks automatically if it is not used for a specified time. This prevents
accidental or unwanted changes to the system.
NOTE
To set this time period, press Setup > Other > Screen Control. On
that window, you can also check the Disable Lock Screen box.
Locking the Screen Manually
 In the upper-right corner of the main ACU screen, press the current user name (which is
followed by the arrow), and then press Lock Screen.
NOTE
If the main screen is not displayed, close any open command windows.
Unlocking the Screen
 Press anywhere on the screen to open the following window, and press Unlock. Then press
Confirm on the next window.
Section 4 - Antenna Control Unit : Axis Status and Position Boxes
4.5 Axis Status and Position Boxes
The Axis Status and Position boxes show the AZ, EL, and optional POL positions of the
antenna. The Enabled/Disabled buttons let you enable or disable each axis individually. Also, a
LAT/LON box shows the Latitude and Longitude that correspond to the AZ/EL pointing angle;
this is not the Latitude and Longitude of the antenna site.
NOTE
For POL systems, the AZ, EL, and POL boxes are shown by default.
To view LAT/LON, press the or arrows in the upper-left corner of
the POL box. For systems without POL, LAT/LON is always shown.
Current Status
icon
position
Commanded
position
Press the button to

Disable or Enable
the axis.
Press or to toggle between

POL and LAT/LON.
The state of each axis is indicated by the appearance of its Enabled/Disabled button and status icon.
Enabled/Disabled Icon Description
Axis is NOT currently active, but will enable if commanded.
Axis is active.
Axis DISABLED button is pressed. Software modes cannot enable the axis,
but the axis can still be driven by the PMU or MCU.
An axis-disabling fault prevents the axis from being enabled by any method
until the fault is cleared. Then the axis will enable automatically.
While an axis-disabling fault was already in effect, the DISABLED button was
pressed. This prevents the axis from enabling automatically when the fault
clears and waits until you manually press the DISABLED button again.
Section 4 - Antenna Control Unit : Axis Status and Position Boxes
4.5.1 POL Box
If your system is set up to use linear POL, the POL box shows the current POL angle, as well as
the commanded POL angle and POL mode.
Press or to toggle between

POL and LAT/LON.
Press this hot spot to

Current POL angle open POL mode
window.
Commanded POL angle

Current POLmode
You can always use the Profile and Direct Mode buttons at the bottom of the screen to access
the POL mode settings, but the hot spot on the button provides a direct shortcut.
 Press the POL box’s hot spot to open the POL window, which lets you edit the POL mode
setting.
If a profile is running, the current profile opens to its POL tab (refer to Section 4.10). If the
system is in Direct Mode, the POL window opens in Direct Mode (refer to Section 4.11.4).
Section 4 - Antenna Control Unit : AZ/EL Graphical Displays
4.6 AZ/EL Graphical Displays
You can customize the AZ/EL graphical displays to specify what and how AZ and EL
information is shown, such as a Strip Chart or Meter.
Press either
hot spot to
customize
both displays.
Strip Chart Meter
 Press the hot spot on either the AZ or EL graphical display, and then use the Configuration
window to customize both displays. For details, refer to Section A.1 in Appendix A.
4.7 Tracking RF Graphical Display
You can customize the Tracking RF graphical display to show signal strength in dB or dBm. You
can also show the information as a Strip Chart or Meter.
Press this
hot spot to
customize the
display.
Strip Chart Meter
 Press the hot spot on the Tracking RF graphical display, and then use the Configuration
window to customize the display. For details, refer to Section A.2 in Appendix A.
Section 4 - Antenna Control Unit : Profile Button
4.8 Profile Button
If a profile is currently running, this button shows the name of the profile. Otherwise, “NONE” is
shown.
Current Profile name

being executed
open Profile window.
You can always use the Profile button (refer to Section 4.10) at the bottom of the screen to
access the Profile window, but the hot spot on the button provides a direct shortcut, which lets
you execute a profile, edit any profile parameters, or select a different profile.
 Press the Profile button’s hot spot to open the Profile window.
4.9 Point, Acquire, and Track Buttons
These buttons show information about the currently selected Point, Acquire (Scan), and Track
modes. For example:
Point button
Current Point mode

open Point mode
Status submode of
window.
current Point mode
Acquire button
Current Acquire mode

open Acquire mode
Status submode of
window.
current Acquire mode
Section 4 - Antenna Control Unit : Point, Acquire, and Track Buttons
Track button
Current Track mode

open Track mode
Status submode of
window.
current Track mode
To access these mode settings, you can always use the Profile and Direct Mode buttons at the
bottom of the screen. However, the hot spot on each button provides a direct shortcut to that
mode, which lets you edit any mode parameters or select a different mode.
 Press the button’s hot spot to open the corresponding mode window.
If a profile is running, the current profile opens to the appropriate tab (refer to Section 4.10). If
the system is in Direct Mode, the appropriate mode window opens in Direct Mode (refer to
Section 4.11.1).
4.9.1 RF Button
This button shows information about the current RF settings.
Current signal
strength Press this hot spot to
open RF Setup
window.
You can always use the Profile and Direct Mode buttons at the bottom of the screen to access
the RF Setup window, but the hot spot on the button provides a direct shortcut.
 Press the RF button’s hot spot to open the RF Setup window, which lets you edit any RF
parameters.
If a profile is running, the current profile opens to its RF tab (refer to Section 4.10). If the system
is in Direct Mode, the RF Setup window opens in Direct Mode (refer to Section 4.11.4).
Section 4 - Antenna Control Unit : Button Bar 1 - Profile
4.10 Button Bar 1 - Profile
You can store up to 20 user-defined profiles, where each profile lets you customize a group of
parameters for a Point mode, Acquire mode, Track mode, optional POL mode, and RF setup.
By setting up customized profiles for multiple targets, you can quickly switch between those
targets without having to re-enter any parameters.
NOTE
Although you can execute these modes and parameters separately by
using their individual commands and windows in Direct Mode, a profile
is the preferred method of tracking a satellite. It executes all the modes
as a single operation, switching modes automatically to locate and
track the satellite. For an overview of how profiles are used, refer to
Section 3 - Satellite Tracking Quick Start Guide.
1. Press the Profile button.

The Profile window opens to its Summary tab.
2. In the Profile drop-down box, select the profile you want to execute or edit.
Executing the Selected Profile
 Press Execute, and then press Execute in the confirmation window.
Editing the Profile Parameters
1. On the Summary tab, specify the appropriate values:

Name - Up to 20 alphanumeric characters that will help you identify this particular profile.
Typically, you should include the name of the target.
User Notes - Enter useful information about this profile, such as when and why it should
be used.
2. On the Point tab:
a. From the Point Mode drop-down, select the Point mode to use with this profile.
 Some Point modes available in Direct Mode (Geo Designate, Manual Position,
Manual Rate, Moon Track, Position Designate, Stow, and Sun Track) cannot be
selected for a profile.
 For a description of each Point mode, refer to Section 4.11.1.
 For information about how data presets are shared between Direct Mode and a
profile, refer to Section 4.3.1.4.
b. Enter the appropriate parameters for the selected Point mode.
c. Press Save, and then press Save in the confirmation window.
3. On the Acquire tab:
a. From the Acquire Mode drop-down, select the Acquire mode to use with this profile.
For a description of each Acquire mode, refer to Section 4.11.2.
b. Enter the appropriate parameters for the selected Acquire mode.
4. On the Track tab:
a. From the Track Mode drop-down, select the Track mode to use with this profile.
 For a description of Steptrack, refer to Section 4.11.3.1.
 For a description of Optrack, refer to Section 4.11.3.2.
 For a description of Autophase, refer to Section 4.11.3.3.
 For a description of Monopulse, refer to Section 4.11.3.4.
b. Enter the appropriate parameters for the selected Acquire mode.
NOTE ABOUT OPTRACK AS THE TRACK MODE

When Optrack is used as the Track mode, it automatically switches
modes as necessary to maintain optimal tracking. For example, in
certain situations (described in Section 4.11.3.2), Optrack may switch
the Point, Acquire, and Track modes as shown below.
Example of Initial Modes: Optrack Switches Automatically To:
Point mode = Intelsat Track Point mode = Optrack

Acquire mode = Box Acquire mode = None
Track mode = Optrack Track mode = Steptrack
Optrack performs this mode switching when used in a profile or in

Direct Mode. In a profile, however, the mode switches affect the active
modes only; they do not change the Point, Acquire, and Track modes
stored in the profile. The stored modes are retained so you can
re-execute the profile at a later time without first having to reset the
profile to its initial modes.
5. On the RF tab:
a. Enter the appropriate RF parameters for this profile.

For a description of RF Setup parameters, refer to Section 4.11.4.
b. Press Save, and then press Save in the confirmation window.
6. On the POL tab:
a. From the POL Mode drop-down, select the POL mode to use with this profile.
For a description of each POL mode, refer to Section 4.11.5.
b. Enter any necessary parameters for the selected POL mode.
Section 4 - Antenna Control Unit : Button Bar 2 - Direct Mode
4.11 Button Bar 2 - Direct Mode
The Direct Mode button on the button bar at the bottom of the screen gives you direct access to
the Point, Acquire, Track, and RF Setup windows. When any command windows are open in
Direct Mode, the mode buttons on the main ACU screen are covered up and are not visible. If
you need to access any of the mode buttons, you can use the Direct Mode button without
having to close any command windows to return to the main screen.
 Press Direct Mode and then select the appropriate item from the menu.
The mode window opens for the selected item. For information about using the mode windows,
refer to the appropriate topic in this manual.
Direct Mode
 Point - opens Point Mode window
 Acquire - opens Acquire Mode window
 Track - opens Track Mode window
 RF - opens RF Setup window

 POL - opens POL Mode window
NOTE
These windows always open in Direct Mode and are not involved in
setting up a profile.
4.11.1 Point Modes
The Point mode points the antenna at a specified location or target. For satellite tracking, the
Point mode moves the antenna to an initial position where the system can begin searching for
the tracking signal. On the ACU’s main screen, the Point button shows information about the
current Point mode; when the Status bar is displayed, it also shows the current Point mode and
submode.
 Press Direct Mode and then press Point from the menu.
The window opens for the currently selected Point mode. You can now edit any mode
parameters or select a different Point mode.
Scroll to
view the
entire list of
Point
modes.
To select a different Point mode, select a mode from the drop-down box. For information about
each mode, refer to the appropriate topic in this section.
Point Modes
 Stop  Manual Position  Optrack  Stow

 Geo Designate  Manual Rate  Position Designate  Sun Track
 Geo Preset  Moon Track  Preset Position  Table Track
 Intelsat Track  NORAD Track  Star Track
4.11.1.1 Stop
The Stop point mode removes all axis enables to the motor controllers. This mode is the
preferred method for normally disabling the drive system because it is a “soft stop,” which helps
extend the life of the overall mechanical system.
1. Press Direct Mode > Point, and then select Stop from the Point Mode menu.
2. Press Execute at the bottom of the window, and then press Execute in the confirmation
window.
The Stop point mode issues a 0°/second rate command, and the antenna quickly decelerates
using the regenerative capabilities of the motor controllers. When the antenna decelerates to a
velocity of 10% full speed, the brakes are applied (if the system has brakes). Thus, the inertial
energy of the structure is greatly reduced before the brakes apply a hard stop.
NOTE
For safety, if any emergency stop or travel limit interlock is opened, the
soft stop process is omitted and an immediate hard stop is issued.
4.11.1.2 Geo Designate
The Geo Designate point mode lets you point the antenna at a specified set of Latitude and
Longitude coordinates. When you execute the mode, the system performs a range check to
verify the coordinates are within the antenna’s travel range. If so, the system drives the antenna
at full slew velocity in both axes simultaneously to those coordinates.
NOTE
 LAT/LON coordinates assume a geostationary altitude and orbit.
 To enter AZ/EL coordinates instead of LAT/LON, use

Pos Designate mode instead.
 To store multiple sets of LAT/LON coordinates for use in different

situations, use Geo Preset mode instead. Then you can quickly
execute any preset and move the antenna to the stored positions.
1. Press Direct Mode > Point, and then select Geo Designate from the Point Mode menu.
2. Specify the appropriate values:

Latitude, Longitude - Latitude in °N (-90° to +90°), and Longitude in °E (-359.999° to
359.999°).
4.11.1.3 Geo Preset
The Geo Preset point mode lets you store up to 10 user-defined sets of Latitude and Longitude
coordinates. Then, at any later time, you can quickly select and execute one of these presets
without having to re-enter the coordinates. When you execute a preset, the system drives the
antenna to the stored coordinates and holds that position.
NOTE
 LAT/LON coordinates assume a geostationary altitude and orbit.
 To specify coordinates in AZ/EL instead of LAT/LON, use Preset

Position mode instead.
1. Press Direct Mode > Point, and then select Geo Preset from the Point Mode menu.
2. In the second drop-down box, select the preset you want to execute or edit.
Executing the Selected Preset
Editing the Preset Parameters

Name - Up to 20 alphanumeric characters that identify this particular preset.
Latitude, Longitude - Latitude in °N (-90° to +90°), and Longitude in °E (-359.999° to

359.999°).
2. Press Save, and then press Save in the confirmation window.

3. If you want to move the antenna to these coordinates now, press Execute and then
press Execute in the confirmation window.
4.11.1.4 Intelsat Track
The Intelsat Track point mode lets you store sets (called presets) of Intelsat ephemeris
parameters (IESS 412) for up to 20 satellites. When you execute one of these parameter
presets, the system calculates the trajectory and moves the antenna along that path. If the
target is not within the antenna’s travel range, the system displays a fault message and holds
the current position until the target is within the travel range.
Intelsat Track may be used as a standalone mode or as a backup to Steptrack. The data in an
Intelsat Track preset can also be used to charge (or preload) Optrack.
1. Press Direct Mode > Point, and then select Intelsat Track from the Point Mode menu.
2. In the second drop-down box, select the Intelsat preset you want to execute or edit.
Scroll down to see all parameters.
Editing the Intelsat Preset Parameters

Axis - Fixed at AZ/EL for this system, so both the AZ and EL axes will be driven to the
positions specified in this preset.
Lm0, Lm1, Lm2, Lonc, Lonc1, Lons, Lons1, Latc, Latc1, Lats, Lats1 - Orbital
ephemeris values provided by Intelsat.
NOTE
For Intelsat Track to work properly, the ACU time must be set
accurately.
Date, Time - Starting date and time for trajectory calculations based on the entered
ephemeris values. The date and time are also provided by Intelsat.
NOTE
Entering ephemeris data is prone to errors. To verify the accuracy of
the data, you need to specify a set of predicted values that should be
calculated from the data if it is entered correctly. When you attempt to
save or execute the data, the system will perform a self-check using
the following Predict values.
2. Under Predict, specify the predicted location of the target satellite after a given time.
These values are also provided by Intelsat.
Latitude, Longitude - Predicted latitude and longitude of the target at the time entered
in Hours After Epoch.
Hours After Epoch - Number of hours elapsed since the starting Date and Time.
3. Press Save. If prompted, press Save in the confirmation window.

The system automatically performs the data self-check.
NOTE
The system uses the entered ephemeris values to calculate the target
location at the specified Hours After Epoch. That calculated location is
then compared to the predicted Latitude and Longitude.
If the calculated and predicted locations:
 Match – The entered data is saved.

 Do not match – The following message appears. Typically, one or more ephemeris
values are entered incorrectly. Press OK, and then examine the values and correct
any errors.
NOTE
The calculated and predicted locations must match before the preset
can be saved or executed.
4. If you want to calculate the trajectory and execute the preset now, press Execute and
then press Execute in the confirmation window.
Previewing the Saved Data
To preview the Intelsat Track data in any preset:
 Press Monitor > System > Preview.

For information, refer to Section 4.13.14, Preview.
4.11.1.5 Manual Position
The Manual Position point mode executes a hold at the antenna’s current position. You can
then enter manual offsets from that position. Even though offsets are typically used as an
enhanced mode superimposed on a fundamental mode, Manual Position is a stand-alone
fundamental mode.
NOTE
If you press the Offsets button on the button bar along the bottom of
the ACU screen, the antenna continues moving in its current trajectory.
Any offsets you enter are applied to that trajectory. The Manual
Position point mode, however, halts any antenna movement and
applies offsets to that position.
1. Press Direct Mode > Point, and then select Manual Position from the Point Mode
menu.
2. If prompted for confirmation, press Execute.

The Manual Position window opens.
3. Use the controls to enter offsets as described in Section 4.12, Button Bar 3 - Offsets.
4.11.1.6 Manual Rate
The Manual Rate point mode gives you direct control of the AZ, EL, and optional POL motors.
You can drive each motor in either direction (CCW/CW or Up/Down) at a specified percentage
of the motor's maximum velocity. This is similar to the control provided by the PMU or MCU.
As with the PMU or MCU, you can also use Manual Rate to back out of a prelimit condition.
1. Press Direct Mode > Point, and then select Manual Rate from the Point Mode menu.
2. Press Execute in the confirmation window.
Red warning
banner shown
only when Stick
is selected
POL Motor
Speed is:
 Fixed at 100%
for AC POL
motors
 Variable for
DC POL
motors
3. Set the motor speed for each axis as a percentage of its maximum velocity, which is
specified in the Setup > Position > Axis parameters.
4. Select Stick or Non-Stick.

 Stick – After you press a Jog button, the motor continues running until you press the
button again to stop the motor. You do not need to hold down the button. While the
button is activated, it looks "stuck down", such as:
Stuck Down
 Non-Stick – The motor runs as long as you hold down the button, and stops when
you release the button.
WARNING
With Stick, the motor continues running until you stop it or close the
Manual Rate window. Monitor the antenna position carefully when using
this setting; do NOT leave the system unattended.
5. Press the appropriate Jog buttons.
4.11.1.7 Moon Track
Moon Track point mode generates position commands that follow the trajectory of the Moon. If
the lower EL travel limit is reached while the Moon is still above the horizon (approximately 0°),
Moon Track continues tracking the Moon in AZ. When the Moon is below the horizon, Target
Below Horizon is displayed on the Status window. Ten minutes after moon set, Moon Track
commands the antenna to the specified Storage position. Twenty minutes before moon rise,
Moon Track commands the antenna to leave the Storage position and begin tracking the Moon.
1. Press Direct Mode > Point, and then select Moon Track from the Point Mode menu.
NOTE
If Moon Track is the active Point mode, you cannot edit its parameters.
First, press the Stop button. Then make your changes and re-execute.

AZ Storage, EL Storage - Azimuth and Elevation angles for the Storage position.
Initial Cable Wrap - Fixed at Shortest for this system, so the antenna takes the shortest
path when it leaves its Storage position to begin tracking.
Moon Set Cable Wrap - Fixed at Shortest for this system, so the antenna takes the
shortest path when it moves to its Storage position.
4. If you want to execute the mode now, press Execute and then press Execute in the
confirmation window.
Entering Moon Track Offsets
After you execute the mode, the Current Offsets area appears on the right side of the window.
The AZ, EL, and Time display-only fields show the current offsets.
To change the offsets:
1. Press Manual Offsets to open the Moon Track Manual Offsets window.
This window is very similar to the standard Manual Offsets window described in
Section 4.12, Button Bar 3 - Offsets.
2. Use the controls to enter AZ, EL, and/or Time offsets.
3. When finished, press Close and then press Save in the confirmation window.
Any changes are reflected in the Current Offsets area on the Moon Track window.
To preview the Moon Track data:

4.11.1.8 NORAD Track
The NORAD Track point mode generates position commands that follow the trajectory of a
NORAD object as calculated by a NORAD two-line element set, the site location, and the time.
You can specify up to 120 user-defined objects. The mode may be used as a stand-alone mode
or as a backup to Steptrack.
The NORAD Track mode activates and deactivates at specified times. When the mode
activates, the antenna is slewed to the calculated trajectory. If the trajectory is not visible, the
antenna slews to the horizon and waits. Manual offsets can be applied to the position
(±20° max, 0.001° resolution) and Time (60 sec max, 0.1 sec resolution).
NOTE
For NORAD Track to work properly, the ACU time must be set
accurately.
1. Press Direct Mode > Point, and then select NORAD Track from the Point Mode menu.
2. In the Object drop-down box, select the object you want to execute or edit. The window
shows the current settings for that object.
Scroll for additional fields.
NOTE
You can also create a new object. In the Object drop-down box, select
Create New. The line 1 and 2 fields in the lower portion of the window
show the general format of the required data. Enter the appropriate
information for each field, and then press Save.
Executing the Selected Object
Editing the Object Parameters

Object Name - Name of the NORAD object.
Object Number - Object number from line 1 or 2, columns 03-07 in the NORAD two-line
element set format.
Cable Wrap - Fixed at Shortest for this system, so the antenna takes the shortest path
to the specified position in either the clockwise or counterclockwise direction.
Offsets Operation - Selects whether any offsets added to the NORAD pointing angles
by the Steptrack or Manual Offsets mode are cleared or saved when the Stop mode is
executed.
 Clear on Exit - When this NORAD object is executed again, any previous offsets
will not be used.
 Save on Exit - When this NORAD object is executed again, any previous offsets
will be added to the angles predicted by the NORAD element set. This is useful if
the NORAD two-line element set is not accurate, because it lets you peak the
signal manually while on target, enter the Stop mode to save offsets, and then
execute the NORAD object again to resume tracking with the accurate offsets.
NOTE
When Save on Exit is used, each time an updated NORAD element
set is loaded, the AZ, EL, and time offsets need to be reset to zero.
Otherwise, the saved offsets will be applied when the new element set
is executed.
Start Date, Start Time - Start date and time. Press to select a date and to select
a time, or enter a value directly in the fields.
Stop Date, Stop Time - Stop date and time. Press to select a date and to select a
time, or enter a value directly in the fields.
Message - Not used.
2. In the lower portion of the window, use the Line 1 and 2 columns to enter the
parameters from the appropriate NORAD two-line element set, such as:
GOES 3
1 10953U 78062A 14346.45857686 -.00000093 00000-0 00000+0 0 8731
2 10953 14.2810 341.1759 0004391 161.5663 355.6896 1.00266781 86761
NOTE
Before entering these parameters manually, you should be familiar
with the format of a NORAD two-line element set. If the element set is
available as a file on a USB drive, you can load the data directly from
the file. Press Utility > Database Utility > Load NORAD Objects
From USB. Refer to Section 4.15.4, Database Utility.
NOTE
Each line in a two-line element set includes a CheckSum value that
you must enter in the CheckSum field. The Calculated CheckSum field
is display-only and is calculated by the system to check that you
entered the line parameters correctly.
3. Perform a quick check on the entered parameters. For both Line 1 and Line 2:
a. Be sure to enter the Checksum value from the NORAD data.
b. Press the Check button.
The system calculates a Checksum based on the entered values for that line and
then displays that value in the Calculated Checksum field.
If the entered Checksum and the Calculated Checksum:

 Match - The line parameters were entered correctly.
 Do not match - Review the entered values for any mistakes and then recheck the
Checksums.
NOTE
When you attempt to save, the system automatically recalculates the
checksums. If the entered Checksum and Calculated Checksum still
do not match, a Checksum Fail error appears. Press OK, review the
entered values for any mistakes, and then save again. (You cannot
save the data until the Checksums match.)
5. If you want to execute this NORAD object now, press Execute and then press Execute
in the confirmation window.
Entering NORAD Track Offsets
After you execute the mode, the Object Offsets area appears on the right side of the window.
The AZ, EL, and Time display-only fields show the offsets for this object.
1. Press Manual Offsets to open the NORAD Track Manual Offsets window.
3. When finished, press Close.

Any changes are reflected in the Object Offsets area on the NORAD Track window.
Checking the Status of NORAD Track
When you execute an object, the Point button on the main ACU screen shows the current
submode of the NORAD Track process. For example:
Submode Object Number
NORAD Track activates and deactivates at specified times and conditions. The following
submodes reflect these situations:
 Off Target – The antenna is not currently pointing at the location specified by the
NORAD data, within an established threshold.
 Pending or Wait To Start - The start time has not yet arrived. The antenna moves to the
starting position and waits there until activation.
 Finished - The stop time has passed. The antenna holds at the final position.
To preview the NORAD Track dataset:

4.11.1.9 Optrack
Optrack is a more effective method of tracking geosynchronous targets than Steptrack. During
active tracking with Steptrack, the system continuously makes minor adjustments to keep the
antenna positioned for maximum signal strength. This results in an antenna trajectory containing
a certain amount of jitter. When you execute Optrack, it collects the tracking data from
Steptrack, analyzes the tracking error, and calculates an ephemeris model that gives the
smoothest trajectory while maintaining maximum signal strength.
When you execute Optrack, it checks to see if sufficient data has already been stored for
calculating an ephemeris model.
 If so, Optrack takes over the system from Steptrack and uses the ephemeris model to
move the antenna. It then attempts to track the satellite. Sufficient RF signal is required
for tracking to begin.
 If insufficient data is stored, Optrack must continue to collect additional Steptrack data.
Optrack attempts to track at the current location. Sufficient RF signal is required for
tracking to begin.
 Alternatively, if data is already stored in an existing Intelsat Track, NORAD Track, or
Table Track dataset, you can load (called preloading or charging) that data into Optrack.
To use Optrack:
1. Press Direct Mode > Point, and then select Optrack from the Point Mode menu.
2. Specify appropriate values:

Degraded Threshold - Determines the maximum signal degradation allowed during
Optrack acquisition (the first 4 hours). The recommended value is 0.5 dB or less. Too
small a value results in unnecessary motion for up to the first 4 hours (a rather minor
penalty). Too large a value results in poor tracking data and may result in the inability of
the algorithm to acquire the target.
Track Type – Fixed to use Steptrack as the method of gathering tracking data.
Cycle Time - Selects the interval (10, 20, or 30 minutes) between tracking data
gathering. This is relevant only after 24 hours of tracking data has been acquired. The
default is 10 minutes, the recommended value. Higher values result in (very slightly)
lower signal modulation and slightly lower sensitivity to scintillation but worse ability to
react to mean wind disturbances. Lower values provide better wind rejection at the
expense of minimally higher modulation and scintillation sensitivity. The choice is not
critical, but depends more on typical site weather conditions or preferred operating
philosophy.
4. If you want to start the mode now, press Execute and then press Execute in the
Charging (Preloading) the Optrack Data Table
If an existing Intelsat Track, NORAD Track, or Table Track dataset already contains the
trajectory data you want to use, you can load that data into the Optrack data table.
1. Press Clear, and then press Execute in the confirmation window.
NOTE
Clear ensures that any old data points in the table are erased. Mixing
data from different satellites can cause faults to appear much later.
You should clear the Optrack data table every time the mode is
stopped and restarted on a new target. Do not mix tracking data from
different satellites within the same Optrack preset.
2. Specify the source of the data.

Type - Selects the mode (Intelsat, Table Track, NORAD) that contains the data.
From Source - Selects the specific dataset that contains the data.
3. Press Charge, and then press Execute in the confirmation window.
NOTE
The Charge function requires at least 12 hours of data in order to be
accepted. This applies for Table Track charging only. 24 to 72 hours of
data is recommended.
 If sufficient data points are loaded, the status message Optrack Coeffs Available
appears and Optrack can be executed.
 If sufficient data points are not loaded, Optrack cannot be executed until additional
data points are collected by the automatic data collection process.
4. If sufficient data points are available and you want to execute Optrack now, press
Execute and then press Execute in the confirmation window.
Clearing All Optrack Parameters from the Data Table
To clear all tracking data currently stored in Optrack:
 Press Clear, and then press Execute in the confirmation window.
NOTE
Clearing previous data is strongly recommended to avoid mixed data
and potential errors. You should clear Optrack every time it is stopped
and restarted, or when editing the data for a new target.
4.11.1.9.1 Examples of Optrack Operations
Example 1
Optrack is charged (preloaded) with Intelsat data and commanded to track. Tracking is
interrupted by a power outage. Commanding Optrack returns to the predicted satellite position
and tracking resumes.
Result: OK - Only one satellite is tracked, and the orbit was fully known so the antenna moved
to the correct satellite location.
Example 2
Profile 1 uses Optrack preloaded with Intelsat data. Profile 2 uses Optrack preloaded with
different Intelsat data for a different satellite. You execute Profile 1 and then Profile 2.
Result: OK - Each profile has its own independent Optrack data table. Executing any profile will
not affect the Optrack data table in any other profile. (Executing Optrack in Direct Mode uses its
own independent data table.)
Example 3
In Direct Mode, you manually locate a satellite and then command Optrack. After tracking
briefly, operation is interrupted. You move the antenna to a different satellite and resume
tracking.
Result: ERROR - The Optrack data set contains mixed data from different satellites, which
typically results in an OPTRACK AZEL DATA ERROR about 20 hours later. To correct the
problem, press Clear on the Optrack window to erase all existing data and then restart Optrack.
4.11.1.9.2 Optrack Details
Standard Optrack/Steptrack Sequence
Optrack begins (step) tracking on a new satellite. Continuous tracking occurs for approximately
10 minutes. Steptrack then continues tracking at periodic intervals of no greater than 10 minutes
for the first 4 hours. The frequency of tracking during this period is primarily determined by the
satellite dynamics, with higher dynamics requiring greater tracking. After this period, Optrack
has sufficient information to begin dynamically estimating the satellite position and tracking
stability and accuracy improves greatly. Loss of signal at this time causes Optrack to continue to
estimate the trajectory for 30 minutes. As data gathering continues the accuracy and longevity
of the predictions increase with significant improvements occurring at 12 and 24 hours. After
24 hours of data, ephemeris extrapolation is valid for 72 hours without further data.
Optrack General Specifications
 Achieves (Intelsat) 0.5 dB transmit stability after 4 hours.

 Achieves a 24-hour pointing backup capability after 12 hours.
 Achieves a one-week pointing backup capability after 72 hours.
 Tracks geosynchronous targets with inclinations up to 15 degrees.
 Rejects mean wind disturbances.
 Continues active tracking algorithm in any signal conditions up to signal fault level;
seamless transition to ephemeris predictions then automatically occurs.
Optrack Tracking Outline
 Tracking chronology
 After 24 hours, full performance tracking begins, including excellent ephemeris

backup accuracy.
 After 24 hours, linear polarization aspect angle correction begins.
 Algorithm description
 Uses Steptrack for data gathering.

 Uses optimal filtering techniques for ephemeris predictions.
 Includes an integral backup mode in case of signal loss.
 Is self-adapting to changing signal conditions.
 Is capable of using “a priori” information (Intelsat sets or program track tables),
but does not require such information.
 Automatically determines tracking parameters.
4.11.1.10 Position Designate
The Position Designate point mode lets you point the antenna at a specified set of AZ/EL or
LAT/LON coordinates. When you execute the mode, the system performs a range check to
verify the coordinates are within the antenna’s travel range. If so, the system drives the antenna
at full slew velocity to those coordinates.
NOTE
 To store multiple sets of AZ/EL coordinates for use in different
situations, use Preset Position mode instead. Then you can quickly
execute any presets and move the antenna to the stored positions.
 You can also use Geo Designate mode to enter LAT/LON

coordinates.
1. Press Direct Mode > Point, and then select Pos Designate from the Point Mode menu.

Axis - Selects whether AZ/EL or LAT/LON coordinates will be entered.
Cable Wrap - Fixed at Shortest for this system.
AZ Angle, EL Angle (if Axis = AZ/EL) - Azimuth angle (0° to 359.999°) and Elevation
angle (-5° to 95°).
Latitude, Longitude (if Axis = LAT/LON) - Latitude and longitude.
4.11.1.11 Preset Position

The Preset Position point mode lets you store up to 40 user-defined sets (or presets) of
AZ/EL coordinates. At any later time, you can quickly select and execute one of these
presets without having to re-enter the coordinates. When you execute a preset, the
system performs a range check of the data set to verify it is within the antenna’s travel
range. If so, the system drives the antenna at full slew velocity in all axes simultaneously
to the stored coordinates and holds that position.
NOTE
To specify coordinates in Latitude/Longitude instead of AZ/EL, use the
Geo Preset mode instead.
1. Press Direct Mode > Point, and then select Preset Position from the Point Mode menu.

AZ Angle, EL Angle - Azimuth angle (0° to 359.999°) and Elevation angle (-5° to 95°).
4.11.1.12 Star Track
Star Track point mode generates position commands that follow the trajectory of a star as
defined by its right ascension and declination. You can store up to 10 user-defined sets
(or presets) of star data. Then, at any later time, you can quickly select and execute one of
these presets without having to re-enter the data.
1. Press Direct Mode > Point, and then select Star Track from the Point Mode menu.
By default, the following common radio-source stars are stored in the presets, but you
can redefine them as needed.
Preset Star Preset Star

1 Cas XR-1 6 3C123
2 Tau XR-1 7 3C273
3 Cyg X-3 (2U1957+40) 8 3C348
4 UMi Alpha 9 Virgo Alpha
5 Beta Centauri 10 Virgo Radio Source

Epoch Type - Selects either J - Julian or B - Besselian as the epoch format type.
Epoch - Epoch time in the selected Julian or Besselian format.
Right Ascension - Right ascension (0, 359.9999).
Declination - Declination (-90, 90).
Cable Wrap - Fixed at Shortest for this system, so the antenna takes the shortest path
to the specified position in either the clockwise or counterclockwise direction.
Entering Star Track Offsets
The AZ, EL, and Time display-only fields show the offsets for this preset.
1. Press Manual Offsets to open the Star Track Manual Offsets window.

Any changes are reflected in the Current Offsets area on the Star Track window.
To preview the Star Track data in any preset:

4.11.1.13 Stow
The Stow point mode lets you specify two user-defined stow positions (or presets). A stow
position is typically a “safe” location where the antenna is protected during high winds or other
weather conditions. You may also define a preset for a common maintenance position. When
you execute one of these presets, the system drives the antenna to that stow position and locks
the antenna there.
NOTE
Both Stow presets use the “Position and Brake” stow sequence for the
AZ and EL axes. With this sequence, after the stow location is
reached, the axis enable is removed and the brakes are set.
1. Press Direct Mode > Point, and then select Stow from the Point Mode menu.

Name - Up to 20 alphanumeric characters that identify this particular stow position.
AZ Angle, EL Angle - Azimuth angle (0° to 359.999°), and Elevation angle (-5° to 95°).
4.11.1.14 Sun Track
Sun Track point mode generates position commands that follow the trajectory of the Sun. If the
lower EL travel limit is reached while the Sun is still above the horizon (approximately 0°), Sun
Track continues tracking the Sun in AZ. When the Sun is below the horizon, Target Below
Horizon is displayed in the Status window. Ten minutes after sunset, Sun Track commands the
antenna to the specified overnight Storage position. Twenty minutes before sunrise, Sun Track
commands the antenna to leave the Storage position and begin tracking the Sun.
WARNING
Ensure your antenna is capable of surviving the concentrated solar
load before executing Sun Track.
1. Press Direct Mode > Point, and then select Sun Track from the Point Mode menu.
NOTE
If Sun Track is the active Point mode, you cannot edit its parameters.
First, press the Stop button. Then make your changes and re-execute.

AZ Storage, EL Storage - Azimuth and Elevation angles for the Storage position.
Initial Cable Wrap - Fixed at Shortest for this system, so the antenna takes the shortest
path when it leaves its Storage position to begin tracking.
Sun Set Cable Wrap - Fixed at Shortest for this system, so the antenna takes the
shortest path when it moves to its Storage position.
4. If you want to execute the mode now, press Execute and then press Execute in the
Entering Sun Track Offsets
The AZ, EL, and Time display-only fields show the current offsets.
1. Press Manual Offsets to open the Sun Track Manual Offsets window.

Any changes are reflected in the Current Offsets area on the Sun Track window.
To preview the Sun Track data:

4.11.1.15 Table Track
The Table Track point mode lets you manually enter time-tagged AZ/EL and optional POL
position angle data points. You can enter a data table with up to 144 rows of data. When you
execute the table, the system moves the antenna according to the data points. Table Track can
be used as a standalone mode or as a backup to Steptrack.
While the table is being executed, you can fine tune the trajectory by entering position offsets
from the ACU. You can also superimpose an acquisition mode (such as Box Scan) on any
Table Track trajectory to form a hybrid mode for rapid target interception.
 Press Direct Mode > Point, and then select Table Track from the Point Mode menu.
Executing the Table
 Press Execute at the bottom of the window, and then press Execute in the confirmation
window.
Editing the Table
NOTE
 You cannot edit the table if it is currently being executed.
 Before entering a new set of table data (as opposed to editing an

existing one), you should press Clear Table to clear the contents
of the AZ/EL table.

Name - Up to 20 alphanumeric characters that identify this particular preset table.
Interpolate - Turns the interpolate function on or off.
 On - Interpolates intermediate data points between successive rows in the table.

These intermediate points are calculated 64 times a second, resulting in a
smooth, continuous movement between the time-tagged data points.
 Off - Holds the position of the last time-tagged data point until the next time-
tagged data point is reached. Then the system jumps to that position.
2. Enter the appropriate data in the displayed AZ/EL table. Each row in the table represents
a single time-tagged data point. For each row, enter the AZ/EL parameters for that data
point.
 Date - UTC date (MM/DD/YY). Enter a date directly in the field, or press to
select a date.
 Time - UTC time (HH:MM:SS). Enter a time directly in the field, or press to
select a time.
 AZ - AZ angle (0° to 359.999°).
 Cable Wrap - Fixed at Short for this system.
 EL - EL angle (-5° to 95°).
3. Press Save Table and then press Save in the confirmation window.
4. If you want to execute the AZ/EL table now, press Execute and then press Execute in
the confirmation window.
Entering Optional POL Table Data
NOTE
If you press POL on the button, the optional POL table appears. It shows any
POL values previously entered for the corresponding table number. However, all the
POL fields are grayed out. You cannot enter POL values or execute the POL table from
here. Instead, you must use the separate POL Mode window accessed from Direct
Mode > POL > Table Track.
To switch directly to the POL table:
1. Press Direct Mode > POL.
2. Press Direct Mode - Point to close the AZ/EL Table Track window and open the POL
Mode window. Then select Table Track from the POL Mode drop-down.
3. For details about entering the data, refer to Section 4.11.5.5, Table Track, on page 4-87.
4.11.2 Acquire Modes
The Acquire mode is used when the antenna is pointed at the approximate position of an RF
target. The scan searches the area around the current position to locate the tracking signal. For
targets that do not use RF tracking, you can select None as the Acquire mode. On the ACU’s
main screen, the Acquire button shows information about the current Acquire mode; when the
Status bar is displayed, it also shows the current Acquire mode and submode.
 Press Direct Mode and then press Acquire from the menu.
The window opens for the currently selected Acquire mode. You can now edit any mode
parameters or select a different Acquire mode.
To select a different Acquire mode, select a mode from the drop-down box. For information
about each mode, refer to the appropriate topic in this section.
Acquire Modes
 None
 Box Scan
 Geo Scan
4.11.2.1 Box Scan
Box Scan mode searches for a tracking signal by issuing AZ/EL offsets
that move the antenna in a box pattern around the base position of the
fundamental mode. You can perform a scan where you specify all
settings manually, or you can perform an automatic scan that limits the
number of user-defined settings and automatically calculates the other
settings to work for most systems under most situations.
1. Press Direct Mode > Acquire, and then select Box Scan from the Acquire Mode menu.

Acquisition – Selects Manual or Automatic settings.
Scan Choice - Selects one of the following:
 Find First - Scanning stops when signal strength is detected above the Acquire
Threshold specified in the current RF settings. This is the most rapid method of
finding the target and works best if the receive signal level is known. The signal
level parameters then prevent sidelobe acquisition.
 Find Highest - The antenna returns to the coordinates of the highest signal
strength after one complete scan. This helps avoid pointing to a sidelobe. As long
as the search box covers the peak of the beam, a sidelobe will not be selected.
Scan Type - Selects one of the following:
 Once - Scanning stops after one successful signal strength is acquired based on
the Acquire Threshold in the current RF preset. If that signal strength is lost, the
antenna holds its position.
 Always - Scanning restarts every time the signal strength falls below the Low
Signal Threshold in the current RF preset.
Separation (Manual scan only) - Separation (0.01 - 10 dB) between successive scans.
Lock Time (Manual scan only) - Lock time of the tracking receiver, which corrects the
scan velocity to prevent a scan that is too fast for the receiver to detect the signal.
NOTE
When you set Acquisition = Automatic, the Separation and Lock Time
are selected automatically based on site/antenna-specific parameters
defined previously.
Scan Separation (display-only) - Shows the calculated separation in degrees between

successive scans. The value depends on the specified Separation, the current RF center
frequency, and the dish aperture.
Scan Velocity (display-only) - Shows the calculated velocity in degrees/second at

which the antenna travels during the scan cycle. The value depends on the specified
Separation and Lock Time.
Length (AZ) - Maximum scan length in AZ (XEL).
Width (EL) - Maximum scan width in EL.
4. If you want to start the scan now, press Execute. Then press Execute in the
Canceling a Scan
To stop a scan and return to the current fundamental mode:
 Select None from the Acquire Mode menu, and then execute the mode.
Checking the Scan Status Submode
When you execute the scan, the Acquire button on the ACU main screen shows the type of
scan and its current status submode. For example:
Submode
Scan submodes are:
 Start - Scan mode is about to begin active scanning.

 Scan Active - Scan mode is actively scanning the box pattern.
 Reset - The scan is being initialized again.
 Pending – When using a profile to combine an Acquire mode with an active Track mode,
the scan is waiting for a Low Signal condition, at which time scanning will start.
 Located - When an Acquire mode is used without an active Track mode, the scan has located
a tracking signal. The scan process has suspended operation and is maintaining a
constant position offset.
4.11.2.1.1 Box Scan Process
Box Scan mode issues offsets to the fundamental mode position command, which causes the
antenna to move about that position in a box pattern. The separation distance between
successive passes of the scan boxes is automatically based on a specified beamwidth and
separation. When the maximum length and width are reached, the box collapses to the offset
and begins a new pattern.
When Box Scan finds the tracking signal, it suspends operation. If the beacon signal level falls,
the scan process may or may not begin again depending on the Scan Type setting. Alternately,
depending on the Scan Choice setting, the whole scan area may be covered and, when the
scan is complete, the antenna returns to the location of the highest observed signal strength.
The Scan Velocity parameter is determined automatically based on the current dB separation
and receiver lock time entered in the preset. The defaults are 1 dB and 1 second.
Box Scan operation does not allow active scanning above 85° elevation (RF axis).
 If the scan pattern expands across the 85° angle, the scan process collapses to the
pattern center and restarts the active scan process.
 If the box pattern center is above 85°, the scan process is suspended.
 If the fundamental mode moves the command below 85°, a new active scan commences
at that point.
Box Scan operation does not allow scanning outside the defined software travel limits.
Commands outside the travel limits are handled in a manner analogous to going above an
elevation angle of 85°.
The maximum size of the scan pattern is defined in both length and width, so the scan “box” can
be a “rectangle”. Length is defined in the XEL direction (at 0° rotation). Width is defined in the
EL direction (at 0° rotation). The scan box is allowed to rotate as determined by the Track
Alignment and Rotation parameters. The box (or rectangle) is secant corrected. The offset
command profile accelerates up from and decelerates down to the box corners.
Box Scan is interlocked with the tracking frequency autosearch process so that an active
“beacon autosearch” and an active scan cycle never occur simultaneously. If the antenna is
actively scanning, autosearching is inhibited. If the system is searching through the tracking
frequencies, the Box Scan logic delays any active scan until the system has searched through
the available frequencies.
When the Box Scan process finds an adequate tracking signal, it stores this offset location and
uses it as the center for any subsequent active scans. This offset is lost when you exit Box Scan
mode.
If you change the scan parameters being used by the active scan, the scan re-initiates.
4.11.2.2 Geo Scan
Geo Scan mode searches for a tracking signal by issuing LAT/LON

offsets that move the antenna in a rectangular pattern around the base
position of the fundamental mode. The pattern starts at the selected
longitude and searches east-to-west with a north/south amplitude defined
by the latitude selection. You can perform a scan where you specify all
settings manually, or you can perform an automatic scan that limits the
number of user-defined settings and automatically calculates the other
settings to work for most systems under most situations.
1. Press Direct Mode > Acquire, and then select Geo Scan from the Acquire Mode menu.

Acquisition - Selects Manual or Automatic settings.
Scan Choice - Selects one of the following:
 Find First - Scanning stops when signal strength is detected above the Acquire
Threshold specified in the current RF settings.
 Find Highest - The antenna returns to the coordinates of the highest signal
strength after one complete scan.
Length (LAT) - Maximum scan length in Latitude.
Width (LON) - Maximum scan width in Longitude.
Separation (Manual scan only) - Separation (0.01 - 10 dB) between successive scans.
Lock Time (Manual scan only) - Lock time of the tracking receiver, which corrects the
scan velocity to prevent a scan that is too fast for the receiver to detect the signal.
NOTE
When you set Acquisition = Automatic, the Separation and Lock Time
are selected automatically based on site/antenna-specific parameters
defined previously.
Scan Separation (display-only) - Shows the calculated separation in degrees between

successive scans.
Scan Velocity (display-only) - Shows the calculated velocity in degrees/sec at which

the antenna travels during the scan cycle.
Canceling a Scan
To stop a scan and return to the current fundamental mode:
 Select None from the Acquire Mode menu, and then execute the mode.
Checking the Scan Status Submode
When you execute the scan, the Acquire button on the ACU main screen shows the type of
scan and its current status submode. For example:
Submode
Scan submodes are:
 Start - Scan mode is about to begin active scanning.

 Scan Active - Scan mode is actively scanning the box pattern.
 Reset - The scan is being initialized again.
 Pending - When using a profile to combine an Acquire mode with an active Track mode,
the scan is waiting for a Low Signal condition, at which time scanning will start.
 Located - When an Acquire mode is used without an active Track mode, the scan has located
a tracking signal. The scan process has suspended operation and is maintaining a
constant position offset.
4.11.2.2.1 Geo Scan Process
Geo Scan mode issues offsets to the fundamental mode position command, which causes the
antenna to move about that position in a box pattern, but uses LAT/LON coordinates. The
separation distance between successive passes of the scan boxes is based on a specified
beamwidth and dB separation. When the maximum length and width are reached, the box
collapses to the offset and begins a new pattern.
When Geo Scan mode finds the tracking signal, it suspends operation. Depending on the Scan
Choice setting, the whole scan area may be covered and, when the scan is complete, the
antenna returns to the location of the highest observed signal strength.
4.11.3 Track Modes
The Track mode is used to track an RF target so the antenna remains pointed at the target as it
moves. A Track mode may also be used for geosynchronous satellites to maintain accurate
pointing. For targets that do not use RF tracking, you can select None as the Track mode. On
the ACU’s main screen, the Track button shows information about the current Track mode;
when the Status bar is displayed, it also shows the current Track mode and submode.
 Press Direct Mode and then press Track from the menu.
The window opens for the currently selected Track mode. You can now edit any mode
parameters or select a different Track mode.
To select a different Track mode, select a mode from the drop-down box. For information about
Track Modes
 None
 Steptrack
 Optrack
 Autophase
 Monopulse
4.11.3.1 Steptrack
Steptrack is an automatic satellite-tracking mode. Steptrack is typically used to track 0°

inclination geosynchronous satellites, but it can also track geosynchronous satellites with an
inclination up to 10° with the appropriate system conditions. (For superior geosynchronous
satellite tracking, Optrack is preferred.) When appended to a program track or NORAD,
Steptrack can also track low earth orbit satellites when coupled to a suitable antenna.
You can perform a manual track where you specify the tracking parameters, or you can perform
an automatic track that has a limited number of user-defined parameters with other parameters
calculated automatically to work for most systems under most situations.
1. Press Direct Mode > Track, and then select Steptrack from the Track Mode menu.
Some fields may or may not be displayed, depending on

whether Steptrack = Manual or Automatic.

Steptrack - Selects Manual or Automatic.
Degraded Signal - Value from -50 to 0 dB. When the normalized signal level falls below
this parameter, an active Steptrack cycle is initiated. Setting this parameter too low (close
to -50 dB) causes the algorithm to track on timer expiration only. Setting it too high
causes unnecessary tracking motion.
Inclination (Automatic scan only) - Inclination in degrees of the satellite to be tracked.
Integration Time (Manual scan only) - Selects the number of seconds the Steptrack
algorithm integrates signal strength at a box corner. A nominal value is 2 seconds.
Shorter times allow faster acquisition and park times with a potential reduction in
accuracy.
Box Step Size (Manual scan only) - Percentage of beamwidth of the receiver signal
being tracked. A nominal value is 10. Smaller numbers provide less deliberate signal
modulation and park times with better accuracy. Larger values provide more deliberate
signal modulation but can improve overall performance in atmospheric conditions with
larger signal strength fluctuations. As this parameter increases, the ability to reject noise
disturbance is improved. Larger step sizes also help if there are mechanical
performance limitations, such as larger backlash.
Scan Cycle Time (Manual scan only) - Time interval in minutes (0, 240) at which the
Steptrack process is initiated. The nominal value is 10. Smaller values cause
unnecessary Steptrack cycles, and larger values could cause a loss of signal greater
than desired between Steptrack cycles. As target dynamics increase, the scan cycle
time should decrease.
Data Point Rejection (Manual scan only) – Select either ON or OFF. The nominal
setting is OFF. When ON, signal strength samples are rejected if they are deemed not
acceptable. When tracking targets at low look angles (high scintillation), this parameter
can help Steptracking by improving noise rejection. If target dynamics are large, data
point rejection is not recommended without a fundamental mode that assists Steptrack.
Peak Center Corrections (Manual scan only) - Percentage (%) beamwidth. This
parameter limits the size of a corrective step. A nominal value is 5. Smaller numbers
provide less signal strength fluctuations during active Steptracking but increase the time
to find the peak signal. Larger numbers provide the converse.
Park Threshold (Manual scan only) - Percentage (%) of beamwidth of the receive
signal being tracked. A nominal value is 5. Smaller numbers provide better accuracy but
require more time to park. Larger numbers provide faster time to park but less accuracy.
Too small values may prevent tracking of dynamic targets.
Steptrack Gain (Manual scan only) - Gain (0 to 1) applied to a corrective step. A

nominal value is 0.5. Lower numbers sacrifice signal peak accuracy but provide park
capability in noisy conditions. Large numbers may correct large errors faster but may not
park in nominal signal conditions.
4. If you want to execute Steptrack now, press Execute. Then press Execute in the
Forcing a Steptrack Search Sequence
To force the automatically controlled algorithm to perform a Steptrack search sequence:
 Press Initiate New Cycle.
4.11.3.1.1 Steptrack Design Goal
Steptrack mode is an automatic satellite-tracking mode that is an alternative to a full monopulse

tracking system. The initial design goal for Steptrack was to track 0° inclination geosynchronous
satellites. Steptrack, therefore, was applicable for systems that do not track satellites with high
orbital dynamics. Due to advances in the Steptrack process, Steptrack has been used to
provide limited tracking of geosynchronous satellites with inclination up to 10° with the
appropriate system conditions. When appended to a program track, Steptrack can also be used
to track some low earth orbit satellites but it is not generally recommended for this system.
The following graph shows a typical tracking signal beam pattern near the look angle to a
specific satellite. (Boresight is the vector pointing directly at the satellite.) Any radial cut through
the beam should look like this. The 3 dB beamwidth, which is the angular distance about the
boresight where the signal is 3 dB less than at boresight, is an important concept in
Steptracking and is shown in the following graph. The beamwidth is a function of the RF
frequency of the tracking signal and the diameter of the receiver antenna.
Figure 4-1: Typical Tracking Signal Beam Pattern
The idea behind Steptrack is to point at the satellite by locating the highest point on the beam
pattern of the tracking signal. This is why Steptrack is often referred to as a “hill climbing”
routine. The previous graph shows the target “hill”. This seems simple, but is complicated by
three factors. First, the satellite is moving, so the “hill” is never horizontally static. Next,
atmospheric signal disturbance affects the tracking signal. Therefore, the hill is never vertically
static. Finally, Steptrack must always stay very close to the satellite position.
Tracking signals are generally signals of a particular frequency (called beacon frequencies). The
tracking signals are called beacons and are generated on a transponder at the satellite.
Individual satellite agencies allocate different beacon frequencies. Multiple beacons exist per
satellite. The equipment that converts the RF beacons to a DC signal that indicates the signal
strength of the beacon-tracking signal is called the beacon receiver. This DC signal is provided
to the ACB and is what Steptrack uses to follow the satellite. The Steptrack routine normally has
the ability to control the beacon receiver in order to select among the available tracking
beacons.
The Steptrack process monitors the target satellite received signal strength while the antenna is
scanned in a spatial box pattern, shown in the following figure.
A correlation is made between the direction of antenna movement and the increase or decrease
in received signal strength in order to determine the position of the satellite. The antenna is then
moved, a “corrective step” amount, in the direction of the satellite and the spatial box scan
pattern is repeated. This “scan-step-scan” cycle is continued until the "corrective step” value of
four successive steps is less than an operator-specified value (the PARK THRESHOLD). The
antenna is returned to the center of the box pattern and is held there (PARKED) until a signal
threshold is tripped or the scan cycle timer expires, indicating the need for another peaking
routine.
Figure 4-2: Steptrack Process
The maximum achievable Steptrack target velocity is highly dependent on the Steptrack
parameters stored in the ACU and other factors such as signal quality and the antenna
beamwidth. It is therefore difficult to specify with much significance a signal value for the
maximum achievable Steptrack target velocity. Target velocities below 0.0001° per second are
generally considered as appropriate for Steptracking. Special attention is required when setting
Steptrack parameters for target velocities which exceed 0.0001° per second. The actual
acceptable velocity value is dependent on the steptrack parameters stored in the ACU, signal
quality and the antenna beamwidth. Some general guidelines which may be useful for
determining the maximum Steptrack target velocity as a function of Steptrack parameters are
provided in the following paragraph. However, attempting to track satellites with velocities
exceeding those stated above will result in decreased tracking performance.
The maximum Steptrack target velocity is limited primarily by the ratio of the park accuracy
required to the time required to park on a target:
Target Velocity = Park Accuracy/Park Time
The trackable target velocity increases as the park accuracy requirement is relaxed or as the
park time decreases. The required park accuracy is specified by the PARK THRESHOLD. The
time required to park on a target is primarily determined by the INTEGRATION TIME. Park Time
is also dependent on the time required to travel between sample points, and any conditions that
would slow down or interrupt the data collection process.
4.11.3.2 Optrack
Optrack is a more effective method for tracking geosynchronous targets than Steptrack. During
active tracking with Steptrack, the system continuously makes minor adjustments to position the
antenna for maximum signal strength. This results in an antenna trajectory containing a certain
amount of jitter. When you execute Optrack, it collects the tracking data from Steptrack,
analyzes the tracking error, and calculates an ephemeris model that gives the smoothest
trajectory while maintaining maximum signal strength.
NOTE
Optrack can be used as both a Track mode and Point mode (described
in Section 4.11.1.9). In both cases, Optrack uses the same
optimization algorithm. As a Track mode, Optrack lets the user specify
a Point and Acquire mode to locate the target initially, rather than
finding the signal manually before executing Optrack as a Point mode.
(This can be particularly useful when running a profile because it
provides an easy, repeatable way to remove any manual setup.)
To use Optrack:
1. Press Direct Mode > Track, and then select Steptrack from the Track Mode menu.
2. Specify the appropriate values as described in Section 4.11.1.9.
4. If you want to start the mode now, press Execute and then press Execute in the
How Optrack Switches Modes Automatically
To maintain optimal tracking, the Optrack track mode automatically switches the existing Point,
Acquire, and Track modes as necessary.
If: Description:
24 hours of “good” tracking The system automatically switches modes from:

data is already in the Optrack
Point mode = current mode Point mode = Optrack
table (indicated by the status
Acquire mode = current mode to: Acquire mode = None
message OPTRACK 24HOURS
GOOD)
The current Point mode is The system initially retains the current modes. Optrack, however,
Intelsat Track, NORAD Track, temporarily uses Steptrack as a submode to ensure that sufficient
or Table Track (these modes tracking data is collected and the tracking signal is peaked.
“charge” the Optrack table)
Then the system automatically switches modes, for example, from:
Point mode = Intelsat Track Point mode = Optrack
Acquire mode = Box to: Acquire mode = None
Another (“non-charging”) The system automatically clears the Optrack table so a new “clean” set
Point mode is currently active of tracking data can be collected.
Then, after the tracking signal is detected and peaked, the system
automatically switches modes, for example, from:
Point mode = Position Designate Point mode = Optrack
Acquire mode = Box to: Acquire mode = None
Notice that after the tracking signal is peaked and Optrack becomes the Point mode:
 The Acquire mode is no longer necessary and is set to None.
 The Track mode is set to Steptrack so new tracking data will continue to be collected
and used to update the Optrack data table.
When to Clear the Optrack Data Table Manually
On the Optrack window, press the Clear button when either:
 You want to track a different target. Retaining the old data can cause tracking problems.
 The OPTRACK DATA OLD status message appears and you want to collect new data.
Stop the antenna, and press Clear on the Optrack window. Leave Optrack as the Track
mode, but set the Point and Acquire modes as necessary to detect and peak the
tracking signal.
4.11.3.3 Autophase (only for Monopulse systems)
Autophasing is the process of altering the digital phase shifter, located on the Monopulse
Scanner Plate, to values that translate the error channel signals to the correct polarity and
magnitude. The Autophase command is listed on the Track Mode menu, but it is not a
standalone tracking mode. Instead, use it only to help configure the Monopulse parameters.
NOTE
 Before running Autophase, execute the Stop mode. Autophase
cannot run if a Point or Acquire mode is active. Attempting to
do so causes an error. (To use Autophase in a profile, set the
Point mode to Stop and the Acquire mode to None.)
 To determine Autophase values accurately, the signal must be

peaked. If the signal is not already peaked, set Peaking = Enable
to peak the signal automatically before starting Autophase.
 Rerun Autophase every time any component in the RF path is

switched or the beacon frequency is changed.
 If needed to improve Autophase results, use Setup >

Hardware > Monopulse > Autophase Algorithm described in
Section 4.16.13.3 to select the “maximum” or “minimum”
algorithm. Max is recommended.
1. Press the Direct Mode > Track, and then select Autophase from the Track Mode menu.
2. For Peaking, press either:

Enable - Peaks the Sum Channel signal through Steptrack first, and then starts the
Autophase process.
Disable - Starts the Autophase process without peaking the Sum Channel signal. Use
this if the axis is already peaked.
Autophase may take a while to complete, particularly if it peaks the signal first.
5. When Autophase is complete, note the resulting values shown in the display-only fields.
XEL Phase Angle - Calculated XEL angle.
EL Phase Angle - Calculated EL angle.
TRU RF Switch - 16 status bits representing the current RF path configuration.
NOTE
Calculating these phase angles does not automatically apply them to
the system. You need to enter them manually into the current RF
parameter preset.
6. Press the RF button to edit the current RF parameter preset, and enter the resulting
values as appropriate in the Monopulse Parameters or Phase Shift Table area of the
window. (Refer to Section 4.11.4 for more information.)
NOTE
You should also enter these values in any other RF presets that use
this RF path or tracking beacon.
Checking the Autophase Status Submode
When you execute Autophase, the Track button on the main ACU screen shows the current
status submode. For example:
Submode
Autophase submodes are:
 AZ Stepoff / EL Stepoff – Antenna has driven off in the indicated axis prior to phasing.
 AZ Phasing / EL Phasing – Antenna at proper location and phasing error channel.
 Autophase Finished – Autophase process is complete.
Autophase Process
When Autophase is initiated:
1. The antenna drives off peak by 3 dB in EL to give a known monopulse error signal value.
2. The tracking receiver adjusts the phase of the XEL Error signal at the scanner plate to
minimize EL Error cross-coupling. This phase value is stored in the tracking receiver.
3. Autophase repeats the process by driving the antenna off in AZ and minimizes for the EL
Error signal.
4. The antenna then drives back to the location where Autophase was initiated.
4.11.3.4 Monopulse (only for Monopulse systems)

The system can track using either the position error loop or monopulse error loop. The
monopulse error in volts from the Tracking Down-Converter/Receiver is conditioned with slope
and offset adjusts in the monopulse RF parameters to give an error in degrees used to null the
RF boresight with respect to the target. The position loop parameters are then applied to the
signal as they would if the encoder position error loop was being used. The Monopulse mode
may also be combined with applicable positioning modes (Preset and Position Designate) and
the scan acquisition mode. In this case, the sequence is similar except no active trajectory is
involved.
NOTE
If needed, use Setup > Hardware > Monopulse > Mono Filter
described in Section 4.16.13.2 to help smooth the Monopulse error
signal or eliminate excessive axis movement.
1. Press the Direct Mode > Track, and then select Monopulse from the Track Mode
menu.

Est Sat Inclination (display-only) - Shows the estimated satellite inclination based on
the specified Peak AZ/EL Velocity. The system does not normally have range-to-target
information; this estimate is based on the range for a geosynchronous target.
Peak AZ/EL Velocity - Peak velocity of the target in degrees/second, used to define
AZ/EL autotrack runaway detection. Set this value so Est Sat Inclination is approximately
25% greater than the predicted target inclination.
Velocity Limit Factor - Limits the motor rate output while in Monopulse. The value is
multiplied by the Peak AZ/EL Velocity to determine the maximum velocity while in
Monopulse.
Error Threshold - Press Enabled or Disabled to specify whether error threshold

detection is used. When Enabled, the system stops tracking if the AZ and/or EL errors
are greater than the threshold values specified below.
AZ Error Threshold, EL Error Threshold - AZ and EL error thresholds in degrees.
Error Deadband - Press Enabled or Disabled to specify whether error deadband is

used. Error deadband disables the AZ and EL motors when the parameters below are
satisfied. When it is enabled and the system is actively tracking using Monopulse, the
motors are enabled to drive the antenna to null the error signals. When the error signals
are below the value entered in the deadbands for each axis, the motors are disabled
until the error signals are greater than the deadband and hysteresis values. For
example, if deadband is 0.0050° and hysteresis is 1.5, the motor will remain disabled
until the error signal is greater than 0.0075° (0.0050° x 1.5).
Deadband Delay - Number of seconds the error signals can remain below the
deadband parameters before the axis is disabled.
NOTE
If the AZ axis uses gears instead of a jackscrew, set the AZ
Deadband to zero.
AZ Deadband, EL Deadband - Deadband value in degrees as described previously.
AZ Hysteresis, EL Hysteresis - Amount of hysteresis applied to the deadband value.

For example, entering 1.5 disables the axis motors at the deadband error value, where
they remain disabled until the error value is greater than 1.5 x the deadband.
4. If you want to execute Monopulse now, press Execute and then press Execute in the
Checking the Monopulse Status Submode
When you execute Monopulse, the Track button on the main ACU screen shows the current
status submode. For example:
Submode
Monopulse submodes are:
 Active – Monopulse is actively tracking.
 Halted – Monopulse tracking has stopped.
 Locate – Monopulse is waiting to locate the target. The signal is below the Low Signal
Threshold specified in the RF parameters.
 Reset – Monopulse tracking is being initialized again.
 Start – Monopulse is about to begin active tracking.
4.11.4 RF Setup
The RF Setup specifies the customized RF settings for a particular tracking signal.
1. Press Direct Mode > RF to open the RF Setup window.
Scroll to see additional fields. Additional fields appear in this area

depending on the Limit Configuration and
Box Center Mode settings.

Center Frequency - Frequency of the received signal used for tracking. This is the
beacon frequency before any BDCs or LNBs.
Low Signal Threshold - After an enhanced mode acquires a signal, it continues

tracking that signal until the received signal strength falls below this parameter. At that
time, the system issues a Low Signal fault and the enhanced mode ceases tracking and
reverts to the fundamental mode.
IF Bandwidth - Selects the bandwidth of the received signal used for tracking. Choices
depend on the tracking receiver.
 For the digital TRU, the 1 kHz filter yields the “truest” representation of the Sum
signal, but it is susceptible to beacon frequency jitter and, therefore, yields a Sum
signal that is harder to track. The 250 kHz filter is broadband, but it disables the
phase-lock loop that compensates for beacon frequency drift and/or Doppler
shift. For most systems, 4 kHz is preferred. (For Monopulse operation, do not use
the 1 kHz filter.)
 For the analog TRU, the 2.5 kHz filter yields the “truest” representation of the
Sum signal, but it is susceptible to beacon frequency jitter and, therefore, yields a
Sum signal that is harder to track. The 280 kHz filter is broadband, but it disables
the phase-lock loop that compensates for beacon frequency drift and/or Doppler
shift. For most systems, 6 kHz is preferred. (For Monopulse operation, do not use
the 2.5 kHz filter.)
Tracking Slope (only if RF path is set for Analog Input) - The tracking signal that
feeds the ACU is a DC voltage from the TRU that is proportional to signal strength. This
sets the specific slope of the DC voltage in dB per volt.
Acquire Threshold - Threshold value for Steptrack. Active tracking will not start until the
received signal strength is at or above this value.
Sweep Width (for analog receivers only) - Sweep width of the receiver VCO during
acquisition. This value is typically 120 kHz. The range is 40 to 145 kHz.
Offset - Offset value used to calibrate the nominal peak value of the receive signal
strength. Adjust this parameter until the nominal peak signal strength is 0 dB.
POL Select - Depending on whether the system is set for Circular or Linear polarization:
 For Circular, selects between LHCP or RHCP.

 For Linear, selects between Horizontal or Vertical polarization.
POL Mode - For systems that allow either Circular or Linear polarization, selects which
mode to use.
NOTE
If the POL Mode field is not selectable, the system is fixed for Circular
or Linear and cannot be changed with this field. To see which POL
mode is used, look at the RF button in the upper-right corner of the
main ACU screen. (The mode shown in the grayed-out POL Mode field
may not be accurate.)
POL Offset - In standard Linear POL, Vertical is aligned along the Earth’s axis and
Horizontal is aligned at 90°. Depending on your site location, a corrective offset may
need to be applied.
Path - If separate ACU tracking signal input paths are available, select the path for this
RF preset. If only one input is used, it is connected automatically to Path 1.
NOTE
The following configuration information should be set by Systems
Engineers after operational scenarios are well understood. Otherwise,
use Box Center Mode = Automatic.
Limit Configuration - Helps prevent target loss for geosynchronous target applications.
Selects either:
 None
 Box - Keeps the antenna boresight from moving off the desired satellite pointing
angles in the AZ/EL coordinate system. You specify the size of the box.
 Slot - Keeps the antenna boresight from moving off the desired satellite pointing
angles in the LAT/LON coordinate system. You specify the size of the slot. Slot
limits are more precise than box limits because the shape of the limits is tailored
to the geosynchronous orbit shape.
NOTE
For truly stationary satellites, tight limits can provide another level of
protection against signal loss, preventing motion away from the
satellite location. However, narrow box or slot limits are generally
incompatible with Acquire modes, which are designed to move away
from a satellite's nominal location in order to scan for the satellite in a
larger area.
Box Center Mode - Selects either:
 Automatic - Uses the fundamental mode command as the coordinates of the

box center. This provides a "moving" center location around the expected
satellite coordinates.
 Specified - Lets you specify the coordinates of the box center.
AZ Box Center, EL Box Center (if Box Center Mode = Specified) - AZ and EL
coordinates of the center of the box.
NOTE
If Box Center Mode = Automatic, the Box Center fields are inactive.
Box Width, Box Height (Box and Slot Limits) - Width and height of the box in
degrees.
Latitude Box Center, Longitude Box Center (Slot Limits only) - Latitude and
longitude of the center of the box.
3. For monopulse systems, scroll down and enter values in the Monopulse Parameters and
Phase Shift Table areas as described later in this section.
5. If you want to execute these RF settings now, press Execute and then press Execute
again for confirmation.
4.11.4.1 Monopulse Parameters (only for Monopulse systems)
In the RF window, scroll down to view the Monopulse Parameters area, which contains
parameters that supplement the RF settings for a monopulse tracking system.
XEL Slope, EL Slope - Slope of the Cross-Elevation and Elevation error signals in volts
per degree.
XEL Offset, EL Offset - Null offset of the Cross-Elevation and Elevation error signals in
degrees.
XEL Phase Shift, EL Phase Shift (used when Phase Shift Select = Manual) - Cross-
Elevation and Elevation phase shift angles in degrees.
Phase Shift Select - Selects either:

 Manual - The system uses the values entered in the XEL Phase Shift and EL
Phase Shift fields in the Monopulse Parameters area.
 Table - The system reads the bit pattern shown in TRU RF Switch, locates that
bit pattern in the Phase Shift Table, and then uses the XEL Phase and EL Phase
values entered in that row of the table.
POL Error Rotation (used for Linear POL) - Selects either:

 Enabled - Corrects the monopulse error signals as the polarizer is rotated away
from the POL Ref Angle to match rotation of the satellite’s POL Angle caused by
satellite movement across the sky. This correction factor does not compensate
for an incorrectly set POL Angle. The POL axis should be peaked on the satellite.
The factor corrects only for changes in phase angle as the axis moves away from
the POL Ref Angle where phasing values were set.
 Disabled - No error rotation correction is used.
POL Ref Angle (used for Linear POL) - POL angle at which RF signal strength for
linear POL targets has been peaked and Monopulse Phasing has been accomplished.
EL and XEL error signals are corrected in software to compensate for this angle. For
circular POL targets, set this to 0.000°.
TRU RF Switch (display-only) - Status bits that represent the bit pattern of the current
RF path configuration. If you use the Phase Shift Table, be sure this bit pattern is
entered into the table along with its corresponding XEL and EL phase values.
Phase Shift Mode - Controls the timing of the scan generator that produces Monopulse
error signals in the tracking receiver. Selects either:
 Off
 Constant - Generates regularly timed signals. This is the normal setting.
4.11.4.2 Phase Shift Table Parameters (only for Monopulse systems)
If you set Phase Shift Select = Table in the Monopulse Parameters area, continue to scroll
down in the RF window and set up the Phase Shift Table. You can set up to 10 rows in the table
to represent possible RF paths that can be used to route the RF signal to the Monopulse
Scanner Plate for processing. For example, one path may use the primary LNA while another
path uses a secondary LNA.
Each path has a unique bit pattern that indicates switch settings used to create the path. To
maximize the signal arriving at the scanner plate, XEL and EL phase angles adjust for the
different path lengths.
BEFORE YOU CAN SET UP THE TABLE

You can only use bit patterns already defined in the Setup >
Hardware > Monopulse Phase Shift Table. You cannot create a new
bit pattern on the fly in the RF window. For information about defining
bit patterns, refer to Section 4.16.13.
Phase angles must be determined by the Autophase command. First,

configure the RF path for the appropriate bit pattern. Then, execute
Direct Mode > Track > Autophase to calculate the phase angles for
that bit pattern.
Scroll to view all rows.
For each RF path you want to set up, use a separate row in the table:
Bit Pattern - Press the Bit Pattern box

to open the Phase Shift Select window,
which lists the bit patterns defined in
Setup > Hardware > Monopulse >
Phase Shift Table. Press the
appropriate bit pattern to highlight it,
and then press Select.
XEL Phase, EL Phase - Enter the XEL and EL phase angles for the bit pattern.
Description (display-only) - Description entered for this bit pattern in Setup >
Hardware > Monopulse > Phase Shift Table.
During monopulse operation, the system compares the status bits in the TRU RF Switch field,
which represents the current RF path, against the bit patterns in this Phase Shift Table. When a
match is found, the system uses the corresponding XEL and EL phase angles.
4.11.5 POL Modes (Optional)
For systems that use linear polarization, the POL modes specify the values used to drive the
POL axis. You can maintain the current POL angle, let the system calculate a POL angle
automatically, specify a single POL value or a set of preset angles, or set up tables containing
time-tagged POL angles. On the ACU’s main screen, the optional POL button shows
information about the current POL mode; when the Status bar is displayed, it also shows the
current POL mode setting.
NOTE
In previous Model 950A software versions, AZ/EL and POL angles
were set on the same window. In this new software, AZ/EL and POL
are set separately — AZ/EL from the Point mode and POL from the
POL mode. This lets you combine AZ/EL and POL angles from
different sources to provide additional system flexibility.
 Press Direct Mode and then press POL from the menu.
The window opens for the currently selected POL mode. You can now edit any mode
parameters or select a different POL mode.
To select a different POL mode, select a mode from the drop-down box. For information about
POL Modes
 Stop
 Auto
 Preset Position
 Position Designate
 Table Track
4.11.5.1 Stop - POL
The Stop POL mode maintains the current POL angle as the antenna moves, whatever that
angle happens to be.
1. Press Direct Mode > POL, and then select Stop from the POL Mode menu.
4.11.5.2 Auto - POL
The Auto POL mode is useful when the Linear polarization angle is not known. Auto calculates
an angle automatically based on the:
 Calculated satellite position

 Commanded AZ and EL pointing angles
 Selection of Vertical or Horizontal linear polarization in the RF window
NOTE
Auto is not required for most site locations and true geostationary
satellites where polarization remains fixed. Other modes such as Table
Track also support dynamic polarization requirements.
NOTE
The commanded POL angles are not based on signal strength but
rather on predictions only.
1. Press Direct Mode > POL, and then select Auto from the POL Mode menu.
4.11.5.3 Preset Position - POL
The Preset Position POL mode lets you store up to 40 user-defined POL angles (or presets). At
any later time, you can quickly select and execute one of these presets without having to
re-enter the angles.
1. Press Direct Mode > POL, and then select Preset Position from the POL Mode menu.
2. In the second drop-down box, select the preset you want to use.
 Press Execute, and then press Execute again for confirmation.

POL Angle - Linear POL angle.
3. If you want to apply this POL angle now, press Execute and then press Execute in the
4.11.5.4 Position Designate - POL
The Position Designate POL mode lets you specify a particular setting for the POL angle.
NOTE
To store multiple sets of POL angles for use in different situations, use
Preset Position POL mode instead. Then you can quickly execute any
preset to apply the stored POL angle.
1. Press Direct Mode > POL, and then select Position Designate from the POL Mode
menu.
2. Specify the POL angle.
3. If you want to apply this POL angle now, press Execute and then press Execute in the
4.11.5.5 Table Track - POL
The Table Track POL mode lets you manually enter time-tagged POL angle data points. You
can enter a POL data table with up to 144 rows of data points.
 Press Direct Mode > POL, and then select Table Track from the POL Mode menu.
Executing the Table
 Press Execute at the bottom of the window, and then press Execute in the confirmation
window.
Editing the Table
NOTE
 You cannot edit the table if it is currently being executed.
 Before entering a new set of table data (as opposed to editing an

existing one), you should press Clear Table to clear the contents
of the POL table.

Name - Up to 20 alphanumeric characters that identify the data used in this table.
Interpolate - Turns the interpolate function on or off.
 On - Interpolates intermediate data points between successive rows in the table.

These intermediate points are calculated 64 times a second, resulting in a
smooth, continuous movement between the time-tagged data points.
 Off - Holds the position of the last time-tagged data point until the next time-
tagged data point is reached. Then the system jumps to that position.
2. Enter the appropriate data in the displayed POL table. Each row represents a single
time-tagged data point. For each row, enter the POL parameters for that data point.
 Date - UTC date (MM/DD/YY). Enter a date directly in the field, or press to select
a date.
 Time - UTC time (HH:MM:SS). Enter a time directly in the field, or press to select
a time.
 POL - POL angle (0° to 359.9°).
USING AN AZ/EL TABLE
If you press AZ/EL on the button, the corresponding AZ/EL

table appears. It shows any AZ/EL values previously entered for the
corresponding table number. However, all the AZ/EL fields are grayed
out. You cannot enter AZ/EL values or execute the AZ/EL table from
here. Instead, you must use the separate Point Mode window
accessed from Direct Mode > Point > Table Track.
3. On the POL table, press Save Table and then press Save in the confirmation window.
4. If you want to execute the POL table now, press Execute and then press Execute in the
Section 4 - Antenna Control Unit : Button Bar 3 - Offsets
4.12 Button Bar 3 - Offsets
The Offsets button on the button bar at the bottom of the screen lets you incrementally control
the AZ/EL and optional POL axes. By superimposing these command offsets on the “zero”
position of a base tracking, pointing, or positioning mode, you can fine tune the base mode.
 Press Offsets to open the Manual Offsets window.
You can increment or decrement the current AZ/EL and optional POL angles by a user-defined
step size amount. Use a large step size (such as 1.0) for coarse adjustments and a smaller step
size (such as 0.1 or 0.001) for finer adjustments.
Changing the Step Size Amount
In the list of default step sizes, press one of the Step Size boxes to use that increment. To use a
step size not shown in a box, you can change the value of any box.
1. Press Edit. (The button changes to Save.)
2. Press the Step Size box you want to change and enter the new amount (0.001° to
20.00°).
3. Press Save.
Entering Offsets Using the Arrow Buttons
1. Press the appropriate Step Size box. The selected box is highlighted.
Section 4 - Antenna Control Unit : Button Bar 3 - Offsets
2. Press the appropriate arrow buttons to change the current offsets.

 AZ CW / AZ CCW - Increments or decrements the AZ offset angle.
 EL UP / EL DOWN - Increments or decrements the EL offset angle.
 POL CW / POL CCW - Increments or decrements the POL offset angle.
NOTE
An axis cannot be incremented more than ±20°; otherwise, an error
message appears.
The Total Offset fields are updated to show the current offset for each axis.
Storing and Recalling Offsets
To store the current offsets for all axes (shown in the Total Offset fields) so you can reuse them
later:
 Press Store Offsets, and then press Confirm in the confirmation window.
The stored offsets are shown in the Stored Offset fields.
NOTE
Only one set of offsets at a time can be stored. When you store a new
set, the previously stored set is overwritten.
To recall the most recent set of stored offsets (shown in the Stored Offset fields):
 Press Recall Offsets.
Clearing the Current Offsets for an Individual Axis
To the right of the Total Offset field for the appropriate axis:
 Press Zero.
The Total Offset field for that axis is set to 0, and the antenna moves to the “zero” position of
the base mode for that axis.
Section 4 - Antenna Control Unit : Button Bar 4 - Monitor
4.13 Button Bar 4 - Monitor
The Monitor button on the button bar at the bottom of the screen opens a menu that lets you
access a variety of system-related information.
 Press Monitor and then select the appropriate item from the menu.
Spectrum Display is shown for

digital TRUs only.
Tracking Receiver is shown

only if a TRU is connected.
For information about each menu item, refer to the appropriate topic in this manual.
Data Submenu Display Submenu System Submenu

 Data Log Functions  Edge Meter  NTP
 Record Data Log  Round Meter  Tracking Receiver
 X/Y Plot  Encoder Feedback
 Strip Chart  Commands/Offsets (AZ/EL & Geo)
 Spectrum Display  Power Supplies
 Software Version
 Preview
4.13.1 Data Log Functions
The Data Log window displays the history of fault/status messages, mode changes, and
periodic position updates. The system writes its log data to three internal files (dlog.1, dlog.2,
dlog.3) in rotation. As the current dlog file size reaches 14 MB, the system switches to the next
file. It also clears the next file in the sequence in preparation for the next switch. As a result, a
maximum of two data files are available at any time. You can save the log to a USB drive and
then view the log’s contents on a separate PC.
NOTE
To turn the Data Log off/on and specify how frequently it is updated,
press Setup > Other > Data Log Options.
1. Press Monitor > Data > Data Log Functions.
The process could

take up to 15
minutes, depending
on the size of the
data log files.
2. Press Confirm to start collecting data from the internal dlog files. When the process is
complete:
 If the log is not too large, the entire Data Log is displayed.
Scroll to view additional log entries, as necessary.
 If the log contains more entries than can be displayed, a message appears. Press
OK.
When viewing the saved

file on a separate PC,
use WordPad to show
the data’s column
structure.
As many entries as possible are displayed.
3. To save the dlog files to a USB drive:

a. Connect the USB drive to a USB port on the ACU.
b. Press Save.
c. In the File – Save As dialog box, specify a file name using the pop-up keyboard. (The
default name is today’s date and time followed by dlog.1.) Then press Save.
The file is saved in the root folder of the USB drive.

NOTE
If a USB drive is not connected, the system may show a standard
Windows Save As dialog box that is set to save the file to the ACU’s
internal folder structure. If this dialog box appears, press Cancel. Then
connect the USB drive and save the file again. (Do not save the log
files to the ACU’s internal folders.)
d. If the log consists of multiple files, a File - Save As dialog box appears for each file.
4.13.2 Record Data Log
The Record Data Log window lets you record and manage a customized data log. You select
which data points to record, and the system periodically samples those data points and records
their values in one or more log files on the ACB. You can download the log to a USB drive and
then view the log’s contents on a separate PC.
NOTE
This customized, recorded data log is completely separate from the
automatic data log created by the system, as described in
Section 4.13.1, Data Log.
 Press Monitor > Data > Record Data Log.
Note: POL data points are

available for POL systems only.
Scroll to view additional Record Log Settings.
Initially, the data log is disabled and empty because nothing is being recorded. So you need to:
1. Select which data points to record.
2. Enable the data recorder.
3. Wait for the system to collect data.
Selecting Which Data Points to Record
The Record Log Settings area lists the available data points along with the rate at which they are
sampled and recorded.
1. Check the box to the left of each data point you want to record, and clear the check box
for any data point you do not want to record.
2. Press Save.
3. In the confirmation window:

 Press Save to append the new data to the end of the existing data log.
 Press Save and Clear Log to clear the existing data log and start a new one.
Enabling or Disabling the Data Recorder
 Press Enabled or Disabled.
Clearing All Data Recorded in the Data Log
1. Press Clear.
2. When prompted for confirmation, press Clear.
Downloading the Data Log to a USB Drive
1. Connect a USB drive to a USB port on the ACU.
2. Press Download.
3. In the File - Save As dialog box, specify a file name using the pop-up keyboard. (The
default name is today’s date and time followed by RecData1.txt.) Then press Save.
NOTE
connect the USB drive and download the file again. (Do not save the
file to the ACU’s internal folders.)
4. If the data log consists of multiple files, a File - Save As dialog box appears for each file.
4.13.3 Edge Meter
The Edge Meter Configuration window lets you select from 20 user-definable edge meter
configurations to display on the screen. For each configuration, you can display up to four edge
meters and you can customize each meter to monitor a particular signal.
1. Press Monitor > Display > Edge Meter.
2. In the Configuration Preset drop-down box, select the configuration you want to display
or edit.
Displaying the Selected Configuration
Editing the Configuration Parameters
1. In the Name field, enter a name that identifies this particular configuration.
2. Under Number of Meters, select the number of meters for this configuration.
The Examples of Layout area shows how the meters will be arranged on the screen.
3. For each meter in this configuration:

a. On the right side of the window, press the tab for the meter to customize. For
example, if you selected 2 under Number of Meters, you can select the Meter 1 and
Meter 2 tabs.
b. Specify the meter parameters.
Signal to Monitor - Selects which signal to monitor, including AZ Pos Cmd, EL Pos
Cmd, AZ Pos Error, EL Pos Error, AZ Position FB, EL Position FB, Signal Strength,
etc.
Min Range, Max Range - Minimum and maximum values for the meter.
Critical Lower Limit, Critical Upper Limit - Lower and upper values of the critical
range.
Warning Lower Limit, Warning Upper Limit - Lower and upper values of the
warning range.
NOTE
In a meter, colored bars represent various ranges. Be sure to enter
values that define each range in ascending numerical order.
5. If you want to display this configuration now, press Execute and then press Execute in
Editing or Deleting a Displayed Edge Meter
When executed, the edge meter is displayed at the bottom of the main ACU screen. An
example of a configuration with four edge meters is:
Press to display the

Edit, Delete menu.
4.13.4 Round Meter
The Round Meter Configuration window lets you select from 20 user-definable round meter
configurations to display on the screen. For each configuration, you can display up to four
meters and you can customize each meter to monitor a particular signal.
1. Press Monitor > Display > Round Meter.
or edit.
2. Under Number of Meters, select the number of meters for this configuration.
The Examples of Layout area shows how the meters will be arranged on the screen.
3. For each meter in this configuration:

a. On the right side of the window, press the tab for the meter to customize. For
example, if you selected 2 under Number of Meters, you can select the Meter 1 and
Meter 2 tabs.
b. Specify the meter parameters.
etc.
Critical Lower Limit, Critical Upper Limit - Lower and upper values of the critical
range.
Warning Lower Limit, Warning Upper Limit - Lower and upper values of the
warning range.
NOTE
In a meter, colored segments represent various ranges. Be sure to
enter values that define each range in ascending numerical order.
Editing or Deleting a Displayed Round Meter
When executed, the round meter is displayed at the bottom of the main ACU screen. An
example of a configuration with two round meters is:

Edit, Delete menu.
4.13.5 X-Y Plot
The X-Y Plot Configuration window lets you select from 20 user-definable plot configurations.
For each configuration, one specified signal is plotted against another specified signal.
1. Press Monitor > Display > X-Y.
2. In the Configuration drop-down box, select the configuration you want to display or edit.
2. In the Time Period For Plot field, specify the time period for the plot. This is a
continuous reading, so the newest data point replaces the oldest data point at the end of
the time period. For example, if you use 10 Sec, the plot continuously shows the most
recent 10 seconds of data points.
3. For both the X-axis and Y-axis, specify the appropriate values:
Signal To Monitor - Selects which signal is plotted on the axis, such as AZ Pos Cmd, EL
Pos Cmd, AZ Pos Error, EL Pos Error, AZ Position FB, EL Position FB, Signal Strength,
etc.
Scaling - Selects how the axis is scaled:
 Manual - You must enter the Min Range and Max Range values.
 Auto - The ACU scales the axis automatically. (The Min Range and Max Range
fields are disabled.)
Min Range, Max Range - Enabled only if Scaling is set to Manual. These set the range
for the axis.
When a plot is displayed, information about the plot is shown on the right side of the window.
You can change the Time Period For Plot or switch between a scatter plot or line plot.
4.13.6 Strip Chart
The Strip Chart Configuration window lets you select from 20 user-definable strip chart
configurations to display on the screen. For each configuration, you can display up to four strip
charts and you can customize each chart to monitor a particular signal.
1. Press Monitor > Display > Strip Chart.
or edit.
2. Under Number of Charts, select the number of charts for this configuration.
The Examples of Layout area shows how the charts will be arranged on the screen.
3. For each chart in this configuration:

a. On the right side of the window, press the tab for the chart to customize. For
example, if you selected 2 under Number of Charts, you can select the Chart 1 and
Chart 2 tabs.
b. Specify the chart parameters.
etc.
Window Size (X-Axis) - Sets the chart’s X-axis from a minimum of 30 seconds to a
maximum of 18 hours. This is a continuous reading, so the newest data set is on the
right side of the chart; the oldest data set is on the left side.
Scaling - Selects how the chart’s Y-axis is scaled:

 Manual - You enter the Min Range and Max Range values.
 Auto - The ACU scales the Y-axis automatically.
Min Range, Max Range - Enabled only if Scaling is set to Manual. These set the
Y-axis range.
Lower Limit Lines, Upper Limit Lines – Press Enabled or Disabled to show or
hide the lower and upper limit lines individually. When enabled, a limit line appears in
red on the chart. These visual guides show whether the signal being monitored is
within a specified range. Depending on the use, these may be best used when
Scaling is set to Manual.
Lower Limit, Upper Limit - Enabled only if the corresponding upper and/or lower
limit lines are enabled. When enabled, set an appropriate value for the signal being
monitored.
Editing or Deleting a Displayed Strip Chart
When executed, the strip chart is displayed at the bottom of the main ACU screen. An example
of a configuration with four strip charts is:

Edit, Delete menu.
4.13.7 Spectrum Display (Digital TRU Only)
For a digital TRU, the Spectrum Display shows the power spectrum in the neighborhood of the
center frequency set on the RF window. You can configure the display as needed.
 Press Monitor > Display > Spectrum Display.
Shows amplitude at marker Sets the frequency for

M1 & M2 positions marker M1 & M2 positions
Setting Up Markers M1 and/or M2
Use the M1 (red) and/or M2 (yellow) markers to show the signal's real-time amplitude at
specified frequencies, typically at secondary peaks.
 For M1 and/or M2:

Enter the Frequency value, and select ON.
NOTE
Specify a frequency within the displayed range. Out-of-range markers
are not visible.
The marker appears at the current amplitude of that frequency. With two markers, the display-
only Delta fields show the difference between the markers' amplitudes and frequencies.
Setting the Amplitude Scale of the Grid
To let the system set the scale automatically:
 For Auto Scale, press ON.
To set the scale manually:
1. For Auto Scale, press OFF.
2. Set the following:

Ref Level – Enter the amplitude in dB for the reference amplitude level.
Top/Middle – Places the reference level at the top or middle of the spectrum grid.
Scale – Selects the value in dBs between each horizontal amplitude line on the grid.
Setting the Frequency Width of the Grid
 For Span, select a width spacing value.
The left-to-right width of the grid runs from (Center Freq – ½ Span) to (Center Freq + ½ Span).
The following display-only values adjust automatically according to the selected span.
RBW – Resolution bandwidth
VBW – Video bandwidth
Sweep – Time required to sweep across the displayed span
4.13.8 NTP Monitor
This monitor-only window shows the current status of the ACB’s connection to the NTP server.
 Press Monitor > System > NTP.
Time Offset - Calculated time offset between the ACB’s time and the server’s time.
Dispersion - Variation in the time offset and network delay data.
Net Delay - Round-trip network delay from the ACB to the server.
4.13.9 Tracking Receiver
This monitor-only window shows information about the tracking receiver, as well as the narrow
band and optional monopulse settings.
 Press Monitor > System > Tracking Receiver.
Control – Shows which unit is in control of the system (such as ACU or PMU).
Frequency – Beacon frequency being tracked.
Input Level – Input RF signal strength in dBm.
External Status Bits – External status bits from the LNAs and BDCs.
RF Synthesizer – Indicates whether the RF synthesizer is locked on its nominal frequency

value.
IF Synthesizer – Indicates whether the IF synthesizer is locked on its nominal frequency

value.
Temperature – Temperature of the receiver board in degrees C.
Temperature Fault – Indicates whether the temperature of the receiver board is causing a
fault condition.
Narrow Band Settings
The narrow band values on the window depend on whether an analog or digital receiver is
connected.
For an analog receiver: For a digital receiver:
scroll to see the VCO Range field
Bandwidth – Shows the bandwidth of the narrow band signal.
Auto Sweepwidth – When the voltage control oscillator (VCO) is in Auto mode, the receiver
sweeps around the beacon frequency. The width of the frequency search is twice the Auto
Sweepwidth value.
Signal Present – Indicates whether a signal is being received.
VCO Mode (analog only) – Shows whether the voltage control oscillator automatically
sweeps for the beacon when signal lock is lost (Auto), or if the VCO must be tuned manually
(Manual).
VCO Offset (analog only) – When the VCO is in Manual mode, this fields shows the
cumulative frequency offset from the frequency entered on the RF Mode screen.
VCO Range (analog only) – Indicates whether the beacon signal is within VCO's operating
range, or whether it is nearing the limit.
Monopulse Settings (for Monopulse systems)
On the Tracking Receiver window, scroll down to view the Monopulse area.
XEL Error, EL Error – RF pointing error with respect to the antenna’s AZ (XEL or
Cross-Elevation) and EL axes in degrees.
XEL Slope, EL Slope - Slope of the Cross-Elevation and Elevation error signals in volts
per degree.
XEL Offset, EL Offset - Null offset of the Cross-Elevation and Elevation error signals in
degrees.
XEL Phase, EL Phase - Cross-Elevation and Elevation phase shift angles in degrees.
RF Switch - Status bits that represent the bit pattern of the current RF path
configuration.
4.13.10 Encoder Feedback
This monitor-only window shows Encoder Feedback information. The current angle for the
encoder is listed, as well as the encoder type. This window also displays the digital encoder
signal for both the coarse and fine values. The Least Significant Bit (LSB) is the rightmost digit.
 Press Monitor > System > Encoder Feedback.
NOTE
The type of encoders depends on the Setup > System Options
settings. Some encoders do not show both coarse and fine values.
4.13.11 Commands/Offsets
These monitor-only windows show the commanded and offset angles for the AZ/EL modes and
the Geo (LAT/LON geosynchronous) modes.
4.13.11.1 Commands/Offsets AZ/EL

 Press Monitor > System > Commands/Offsets > AZ EL.
AZ, EL FMode Cmd - Command issued by any fundamental (pointing only) mode.
AZ, EL FMode Offs - Appears only when a fundamental mode can have offsets added to it.
Standard modes with this capability are Moon Track, NORAD Track, Star Track, and Sun
Track. Refer to those sections for details.
AZ, EL Track Offs - Offsets created after a Steptrack cycle has found the peak. If the servo
is a Steptrack system, these offsets are updated only after a successful Steptrack cycle
park.
AZ, EL Manual Offs - Offsets entered manually through the Manual Offsets window.
AZ, EL Center Offs - Offsets that define the “center” of the Steptrack box during an active
Steptrack peaking cycle. When the active Steptrack process locates the target, it parks and
moves the center offsets into the Track offsets and zeros out the Center offsets.
AZ, EL Target Cmd - Sum total of the fundamental mode command and all of the Mode,
Track, Manual, and Center offsets.
AZ, EL Corner Offs - Offsets that depict the current “corner” of the Steptrack box during any
active Steptrack cycle.
AZ, EL Scan Offs - Command offsets from the fundamental mode position that creates the
scan pattern. These offsets are similar to “seeing” Steptrack move the antenna.
AZ, EL Total Cmd - Sum total of the Target Command and the Corner and Scan offsets.
AZ, EL FMode Vel - Velocity of the target as predicted by the fundamental mode.
AZ, EL Total Vel - Total velocity command issued by the ACU mode to the Velocity Feed
Forward loop to allow smooth tracking of targets.
4.13.11.2 Commands/Offsets Geo

 Press Monitor > System > Commands/Offsets > Geo.
LON, LAT FMode - Command issued by any fundamental (pointing only) mode.
LON, LAT Target - Sum total of the fundamental mode command and all of the Mode,
Track, Manual, and Center offsets.
LON, LAT Total - Sum total of the Target command and the Corner and Scan offsets.
4.13.12 Power Supplies
This monitor-only window shows the voltages of various power supplies.
 Press Monitor > System > Power Supplies.
4.13.13 Software Version and Contact Information
This monitor-only window shows the version and date of the ACU GUI, ACB, and Tracking
Receiver Board (TRB) software, as well as the firmware version of the Field Programmable
Gate Array (FPGA) and Digital Signal Processor (DSP) on the ACB. The ACB Configuration
version number is also displayed. This window also shows contact information for obtaining
support from GDST, if needed.
 Press Monitor > System > Software Version.
4.13.14 Preview
If trajectory data has already been entered using one of several available modes, you can select
one of the existing data sets and see a preview of that data for a specified date and time.
Results are displayed by date, time, and AZ/EL coordinates. Preview is useful for finding out if
an object is visible from your location (see Section 4.16.16, Site Setup) or when it might be
visible in the future. It is also used to verify that NORAD data was entered correctly by checking
to see if a reasonable/expected trajectory is generated.
1. Press Monitor > System > Preview.
2. Specify the data and parameters you want to preview:

Mode - Selects which mode contains the data: Intelsat Track, Optrack, Star Track,
NORAD Track, Sun Track, or Moon Track.
Data Source – If the selected Mode has presets, selects which preset to use.
Start Date, Start Time - Enter the preview start date in MM/DD/YYYY format, and the
start time in HH:MM:SS format.
Stop Date, Start Time - Enter the preview stop date in MM/DD/YYYY format, and the
stop time in HH:MM:SS format.
Delta Days, Delta Time - Enter the incremental number of days (0 - 500) between each
preview data point, and the incremental time between each data point per day in
HH:MM:SS format.
3. Press Preview Data to generate and display the preview.
Section 4 - Antenna Control Unit : Button Bar 5 - Control
4.14 Button Bar 5 - Control
The Control button on the button bar at the bottom of the screen transfers control of the ACB
from one device to another.
The ACU or a manual maintenance unit such as the PMU or optional MCU can directly control
and monitor the ACB to varying levels. A supervisory computer can also control the ACB. At any
given time, however, only one can have control.
ACU Supervisory
Computer
PMU,
ACB MCU
The ACU may retain or offer control to any other unit. When another unit is offered control, the
unit does not actually receive control until that unit accepts it.
NOTE
In general, a unit that is not in control may not take control directly;
control must first be offered by the in-control unit. However, an ACU
can take control from a supervisory computer without permission.
The following procedures describe how to transfer control between the ACU and a supervisory
computer. For information about transferring control to a PMU or optional MCU, refer to
Section 5.1.4, Operating the PMU. (The PMU and MCU use the same procedure.)
NOTE
Switching control between the ACU and another unit automatically
reverts the antenna to Stop mode. The unit that receives and accepts
control must then actively enter a mode that allows antenna operation.
Section 4 - Antenna Control Unit : Button Bar 5 - Control
Transferring Control from the ACU to a Supervisory Computer
1. On the ACU:
a. Press the Control button to open the Control menu.
b. Press Control Change Allowed.
2. On the supervisory computer:

a. Issue the CTAKE command.
Transferring Control from a Supervisory Computer to an ACU
After this transfer, the ACB is no longer controlled by the supervisory computer.
 On the ACU, press Control > ACU Control Only.
NOTE
Supervisory computers automatically allow an ACU to take control.
If Using a Remote-Client Connection
A remote client acts as a second ACU (with certain restrictions described in Section 5.5) and
has the same privileges as the ACU. As such, you do not need to use the Control button to
transfer control to a remote client. Any time the ACU has control, so does a connected remote
client.
NOTE
Be careful about issuing commands with the ACU and a remote client
at the same time. The system processes commands in the order
received and does not attempt to resolve any conflicting commands.
Section 4 - Antenna Control Unit : Button Bar 6 - Utility
4.15 Button Bar 6 - Utility
The Utility button on the button bar at the bottom of the screen lets you set parameters for
tests, perform software upgrades, set parameters for the Simulator mode, and use the
Database Utility to perform operations such as backing up and restoring system databases. You
can also use the Database Utility to load NORAD objects from a USB drive.
 Press Utility and then select the appropriate item from the menu.
The command window opens for the selected item. For information about each menu item, refer
to the appropriate topic in this manual.
Utility Menu Simulator Submenu

 Encoder Test  Simulator Main
 Upgrade  General Params
 Simulator  Intelsat Params
 Database Utility  NORAD Params
 Table Track Params
 Jamset Params
 Simulator Status
4.15.1 Encoder Test
This window stores values for the AZ/EL Margin parameters, which set the sensitivity of software-
based filters used to detect several hardware problems.
NOTE
The Encoder test is always running in the background. This window
does not initiate the test; it only sets the parameters.
1. Press Utility > EncoderTest.
2. Enter sensitivity values for the axes.
3. Press Save.
The system uses these margin parameters as a weighting factor for a detector that monitors the
difference between the outputs of the axis position encoders on successive readings. If the
difference exceeds the margin value, a fault message such as AZ ENCODER FAULT is issued
to indicate a jump in encoder position that is larger than expected. The default value is usually
adequate. Margin values that are too small result in false alarms, and values that are very large
effectively turn off this encoder test.
Refer to AZ or EL ENCODER FAULT in Section 8.1, Fault Messages, for troubleshooting

information.
4.15.2 Upgrade Software
The Upgrade Software window lets you load software upgrades to the ACU, ACB, TRB (tracking
receiver board), FPGA, and/or Configuration. Each time you upgrade an item, the system saves
a copy of the previous load. In most cases, you can also undo an upgrade or reset the current
software version to its factory-default parameter database.
NOTE
If an upgrade is needed, GDST may provide a USB drive that contains
the upgrades or (if the upgrade is needed immediately) may send a set
of upgrade files electronically. If you receive a set of files, you must
load them onto a USB drive before performing the upgrade. GDST will
provide instructions with the files to describe the proper procedure for
loading them onto the USB drive.
1. Insert the USB drive that contains the upgrade files into the USB port on the ACU.
2. Press Utility > Upgrade.
Select item being

upgraded (ACU,
ACB, TRB, FPGA,
Configuration)
Upgrade version
contained in the file Status of the
selected with upgrade, undo, or
Choose File button revert operation
Currently installed
version
Previous version saved as backup

(if blank, no backup is available);
for Undo, system will return to this version
WARNING
To perform any of these operations, use the ACU only. Do not attempt
to use a remote-client connection (refer to Section 5.5) to upgrade,
undo, or revert software.
Upgrading Software
1. For Type, press Upgrade.
2. In the drop-down box, select the software item (ACU, ACB, TRB, FPGA, or
Configuration) to upgrade.
3. Press Choose File.
4. In the Open dialog box, navigate to the USB file that contains the upgrade. Highlight the
file and press Open.
CAUTION
For an ACU upgrade, make sure the upgrade file is in the root folder of
the USB drive. If the file is in a different folder, the upgrade will fail and
the ACU upgrade feature will no longer operate. (Also, fault alarms will
no longer be audible.) To correct the situation, you must reboot the ACU.
5. Note the Selected File Version, Installed Version, and Backup Version as applicable.

The Status field shows messages at various stages during the upgrade. Messages
shown in black are normal, but messages in red indicate errors.
7. Monitor the status messages, and note any messages in red. In case of an upgrade
failure, the red messages can help GDST determine the cause of the failure.
At various times during an upgrade, the ACB and/or FPGA is rebooted automatically.
During a TRB upgrade, a message prompts you to reboot the TRB manually by cycling
power to the unit.
CAUTION
During an upgrade, never cycle power to the system unless prompted
to do so. Otherwise, you could corrupt files that prevent the system
from operating properly.
CAUTION
Changing the configuration version can cause changes to the System
Options window settings. Please note these values before upgrading.
8. After the upgrade is completed:

 Verify that the version noted in Step 5 as the Selected File Version is now listed as
the Installed Version.
 Verify that the version noted in Step 5 as the Installed Version is now listed as the
Backup Version.
NOTE
Only the most recent previous software load is saved. If you upgrade
to the same version twice, the original version is lost and cannot be
recovered from system memory.
NOTE
You can upgrade only one software item at a time. Repeat this
procedure for each item you want to upgrade.
Undoing or Returning to the Previous Version
1. For Type, press Undo.
2. In the drop-down box, select the software item to undo.

If that item can be undone, the Backup Version field lists the previous version. If that
field is blank, you cannot undo the item.
CAUTION
Undoing the configuration can cause changes to the System Options
window settings. Note these values before undoing.
Reverting the Current ACB Software to the Factory-Default Parameter Database
NOTE
Before reverting the ACB database, save a copy of the current
database by using Utility > Database Utility.
1. For Type, press Revert ACB To Fact.
2. In the confirmation message, press Confirm.
The Status box shows the result of the operation.
4.15.3 Simulator
The Simulator mode lets you set up what-if scenarios in the ACU where commands, modes,
parameter entry, statuses, and faults can be tried and verified quickly and easily. Its primary
purpose is to aid supervisory computer software development by allowing complete execution of
all software interface commands and responses.
NOTE
Any database changes made while in Simulator mode are not saved to
internal memory and are lost upon reboot.
CAUTION
Do not use the Simulator mode for a system carrying data. This is a
training/software testing feature, not a mode for a “live” antenna.
In Simulator mode, “real-world” status and fault reporting, sensor/transducer feedback, analog
inputs, and analog outputs are unavailable. The ACU and ACB behave as a stand-alone unit.
4.15.3.1 Simulator Main Window

 Press Utility > Simulator >Simulator Main.
Turning the Simulation On
1. Under Simulation, press ON.
2. In the Track drop-down box, select the type of simulated target.

 Fixed - Uses the fixed values specified by pressing the General Parameters button.
 Intelsat - Uses the trajectory parameters previously entered in the Intelsat data
number specified by pressing the Intelsat button.
 NORAD - Uses the trajectory parameters previously entered in the NORAD preset
number specified by pressing the NORAD button.
 Table Track - Uses the trajectory data points previously entered in one or more
Table Track set numbers specified by pressing the Table Track button.
3. Using the other submenu items on the Utility > Simulator menu, edit the simulator
parameters that correspond to your Track selection. Specify the appropriate conditions
for the simulation.
4. Press Execute.
5. Follow the instructions that appear in a pop-up window.
 Press Utility > Database Utility and execute Initiate DB Backup to save the
operating database to internal storage.
 Cycle the ACU power. When the ACU reboots, it will be in the Simulator mode and
the status message Simulation On - ACU appears.
Turning the Simulation Off
1. On the Utility > Simulator > Simulator Main window, press OFF.
2. Follow the instructions in the pop-up window.

 Press Utility > Database Utility and Initiate DB Backup.
 Cycle the ACU power. When the ACU reboots, it will be in the normal operation
mode.
4.15.3.2 General Parameters
This window sets the general parameters used in the simulation.
1. Press Utility > Simulator > General Params.
POL fields are shown only on POL systems.
Noise Level - Simulated scintillation level in dB. This is not intended to faithfully
reproduce true scintillation, just to show how the meters behave in typical
conditions.
Signal Offset - Allows the signal level to be adjusted to values other than a zero
dB nominal level.
AZ, EL, POL Velocity - Allows the apparent target position to move at the
entered velocities.
AZ, EL, POL Position - Determines the simulated signal peak location (satellite
position) when the Intelsat/NORAD parameters are set to zero.
4.15.3.3 Intelsat Parameters
To use Intelsat parameters in the simulation, the data must already be stored in an existing
Intelsat Track preset.
1. Press Utility > Simulator > Intelsat Params.

Intelsat Number - Enter 1 to 10 to use the trajectory already stored in the corresponding
Intelsat preset number. The simulated signal peak follows this trajectory.
Intelsat AZ, EL Offset - Move the target signal peak from the Intelsat prediction by an
amount equal to the offset value. This allows simulated errors in the Intelsat prediction.
4.15.3.4 NORAD Parameters
To use NORAD parameters in the simulation, the data must already be stored in the NORAD
Track database.
1. Press Utility > Simulator > NORAD Params.

NORAD Number - Select the appropriate NORAD object number from the NORAD
Track database. The simulated signal peak follows this object’s trajectory.
NORAD AZ, EL Offset - Move the target signal peak from the NORAD prediction by an
amount equal to the offset value. This allows simulated errors in the NORAD prediction.
4.15.3.5 Table Track Parameters
To use Table Track parameters in the simulation, the data must already be stored in an existing
Table Track preset.
1. Press Utility > Simulator > Table Track Params.
POL Offset field is shown only on POL systems.

To Set - Sets the Table Track table (1 - 21) that contains the data to simulate.
 1 thru 20 - Specifies the Table Track data entered in the corresponding profile
number.
 21 - Specifies the Table Track data entered in Direct Mode.
Type - Does not apply to this system.
AZ, EL, POL Offset - Add an offset amount to the entered value to corresponding axis
position specified in the current table preset.
4.15.3.6 JamSet Parameters
This window causes the simulator to force the current position to the jamset angles when the
Jamset command is executed.
1. Press Utility > Simulator > Jamset Params.
POL Jamset field is shown only on POL systems.
2. Specify the AZ, EL, and POL jamset positions.
4.15.3.7 Simulator Status
This window is used to create faults and status messages when the ACU is in Simulator mode.
The fault and status messages are arranged into 80 bytes. Each byte contains the assigned
fault and/or status messages as defined by the ACU Software Interface Specification. See the
Drawings and Parts List for more information regarding this specification.
1. Press Utility > Simulator > Simulator Status.
2. For each byte you want to set:

a. In the Byte drop-down box, select the byte number (1-80).
b. In the check boxes (0-7), select which fault and status messages to turn on. The
check box definitions change according to the selected byte number.
4.15.4 Database Utility
By default, the system automatically backs up its software parameters and settings database to
internal storage every 60 seconds. Each time the system reboots, it automatically loads the
database from this backup.
The Database Utility lets you force a backup at any time, turn automatic backups off and on,
store the current database as an archive file on a USB drive, or restore an archived database.
You can also archive a file containing internal tracking settings or load NORAD objects from a
file on a USB drive.
 Press Utility > Database Utility.
The Database Action drop-down box contains:
• Initiate DB Backup
• Stop DB Backups
• Resume DB Backups
Forcing a Backup to Internal Storage
This is typically used when automatic backups have been turned off. Particularly when
automatic backups are off, you should force a backup periodically to be sure the current
configuration is saved in case of problems.
1. In the Database Action drop-down box, select Initiate DB Backup.
2. Press Execute.
When the internal backup is finished, the Database Status box shows “Data backup complete”.
Turning Automatic Backups Off or On
1. In the Database Action drop-down box, select either Stop DB Backups or Resume DB
Backups, as needed.
2. Press Execute.
The Database Status box shows either “Backups stopped” or “Backups resumed”.
Downloading the Current Database to a USB Drive
1. Insert the USB drive into a USB port on the ACU.
2. Press the Download Database To USB button.
default name is today’s date and time followed by db.tar.) Then press Save.
NOTE
After the database archive file is saved, the Database Status box shows “Data store
complete”.
Uploading (Restoring) an Archived Database from a USB Drive
1. Insert the USB drive that contains the database archive into a USB port on the ACU.
2. Press the Stop button to execute the Stop mode.
3. Press the Upload Database From USB button.
4. In the Open dialog box, navigate to the appropriate folder (if needed) and open the
archive file.
NOTE
If the Database Status box shows “File Restore Error”, be sure the
USB drive is inserted fully into the USB port and that the selected file is
a valid database backup.
When the Database Status box shows “Data load complete”, the restored database is
loaded into memory and takes effect immediately.
Downloading the Internal Tracking Settings to a USB Drive
The system maintains internal tracking settings that describe the state of the system. This
information is different from the user-defined software parameters and settings stored in the
database described previously. In most cases, an archive file containing these internal settings
is needed only when the system has a problem and GDST needs the file for troubleshooting.
2. Press the Download Tracking To USB button.
default name is today’s date and time followed by dbTrk.txt.) Then press Save.
NOTE
After the file is saved to the USB drive, the Database Status box shows “Tracking store
complete”.
Loading NORAD Objects from the Front USB Drive
If you have a USB drive that contains NORAD 2-line element sets, you can load that data using
the Database Utility. The data must have the same format as the data sets from:
http://www.celestrak.com.
 Spaces are significant.

 The files need to be in a .txt file format.
 The load option reads up to the first 120 objects from the file.
To load the NORAD objects:
2. Press the Load NORAD Objects From USB button.
3. Press Choose File, and then use the Open dialog box to navigate to the file that
contains the NORAD objects. Highlight the file and press Open.
Data from the first object in the file is listed in the Load NORAD Objects window.
NOTE
As needed, you can edit the listed data.
4. Either:
 To load only one specific object, select that object in the Object drop-down box and
press Load.
 To load all the objects in the file, press Load All.
Section 4 - Antenna Control Unit : Button Bar 7 - Setup
4.16 Button Bar 7 - Setup
The Setup button on the button bar at the bottom of the screen opens various windows used to
enter system-level setup parameters. Most of these parameters need to be entered during
system setup only. Afterwards, there is normally no reason to change the parameters or even
open the Setup menu unless major alterations are performed on the antenna.
 Press Setup and then select the appropriate item from the menu.
TRU is shown only if

a GDST TRU is
connected. Shows
ANALOG INPUT if
the TRU type on the
System Options
window is set to
Analog Input.
C AUTION
Altering any setup data may cause the antenna to function improperly
and severely degrade performance. Before changing any setup data,
use Utility > Database Utility to back up the database.
For information about each menu item, refer to the appropriate topic in this manual.
Other Submenu System Options Hardware Submenu Position Submenu

 Date Time  System Options  ACB Serial Port  Motion Detect Faults
 Site Setup  ACB TCP/IP  Tracking Receiver
 Hour Meter  TRU or Analog Input  Encoder Offset
 Data Log Options  Band Table  Travel Limit
 Screen Control  Custom POL  Error Correction
 Major Events  Latched Faults  Axis
 Monopulse
4.16.1 Motion Detect Faults
The Motion Detect Faults window specifies whether to trigger a fault when the movement of the
AZ and/or EL axis is not responding properly to commands.
1. Press Setup > Position > Motion Detect Faults.
2. For each field, select Disable or Enable to indicate whether to trigger a fault for that
condition.
AZ Immobile, EL Immobile - The AZ/EL axis was commanded to move but did not.
AZ Unexpected Motion, EL Unexpected Motion - The AZ/EL axis is moving when it

was not commanded to move.
AZ Runaway, EL Runaway - The AZ/EL axis is moving faster than specified.
4.16.2 Encoder Offset
The Encoder Offsets window controls the displayed AZ, EL, and POL angles. When encoders
are not aligned perfectly, the angle read by the encoder does not exactly match the actual
position of the antenna. An offset amount compensates for this difference so the reading shown
on the ACU is the actual, corrected angle.
NOTE
Be sure to perform a database backup before altering any of these
parameters.
1. Press Setup > Position > Encoder Offset.
The POL fields are available on POL systems only.

AZ Offset - Angular value added to the AZ position display. This is used to fine-tune the
position display. The encoder offsets are added to the actual encoder readings. Thus, a
positive offset increases the apparent antenna position.
AZ Rotation - Reverses the incremental count of the AZ encoder. This parameter should
never require alteration after initial encoder setup. The readings should increase as the
antenna rotates clockwise (CW) as seen from above.
AZ Scale - Used when the ratio between the antenna mechanical movement and
position encoder input shaft is any value other than 1. This parameter should never
require alteration after initial encoder setup. The equation for determining the scale
factor is:
(∆ 𝐴𝑛𝑡𝑒𝑛𝑛𝑎 𝑀𝑒𝑐ℎ𝑎𝑛𝑖𝑐𝑎𝑙 𝑀𝑜𝑣𝑒𝑚𝑒𝑛𝑡)
Scale Factor = (∆ 𝐴𝐶𝑈 𝑃𝑜𝑠𝑖𝑡𝑖𝑜𝑛 𝐷𝑖𝑠𝑝𝑙𝑎𝑦)
For example, the axis is moved clockwise one complete revolution (360.000°) using
mechanical measuring techniques. The start ACU position display is 0.247°; the stop
ACU position display is 0.121°. The equation is therefore:
360°
[360°−(0.247°−0.121°)] = 359.874°
= 1.00035012
Enter the number 1.00035012 and re-run the test to verify that the Δ position display
matches the Δ antenna mechanical movement.
EL Offset - Angular value added to the EL position display. This is used to fine-tune the
position display. The encoder offsets are added to the actual encoder readings. Thus, a
positive offset increases the apparent antenna position.
EL Rotation - Reverses the incremental count of the EL encoder. The readings should
increase as the antenna drives up from the horizon.
EL Scale - Used when the ratio between the antenna mechanical movement and
position encoder input shaft is any value other than 1. This parameter should never
require alteration after initial encoder setup.
POL Offset - Angular value added to the POL position display. This is used to fine-tune
the position display. The encoder offsets are added to the actual encoder readings.
Thus, a positive offset increases the apparent antenna position.
POL Rotation - Reverses the incremental count of the POL encoder. This parameter
should never require alteration after initial encoder setup. The readings should increase
as the antenna rotates clockwise (CW) as seen from above.
POL Scale - Used when the ratio between the POL mechanical movement and position
encoder input shaft is any value other than 1. This parameter should never require
alteration after initial encoder setup.
Calculating an Offset
1. Point the antenna at a known position, such as a fixed geosynchronous satellite.
2. In the Encoder Offsets window, press Calculate beside the AZ, EL, or POL Offset field.
3. In the following window, enter the known angle for the applicable axis.

The offset is calculated and displayed as: (known position) – (angle read on encoder)
4.16.3 Travel Limit
This window sets the travel limits (software limits) of the antenna. If the antenna is commanded
to drive to an AZ/EL/POL position outside the limits, a fault message is issued and the antenna
maintains its last position.
NOTE
Manual control units such as the PMU and optional MCU report the
fault but do not prevent the axis from driving past the limit.
1. Press Setup > Position > Travel Limit.
POL fields are used for POL systems only.
NOTE
The limits can be changed only when the system is in Stop mode.

AZ CW, AZ CCW - Absolute travel limits for the AZ axis in the clockwise (CW) and
counterclockwise (CCW) directions.
EL UP, EL DOWN - Absolute travel limits for the EL axis in the Up and Down directions.
POL CW, POL CCW - Absolute travel limits for the POL axis in the clockwise (CW) and
counterclockwise (CCW) directions.
4.16.4 Error Correction
This window provides corrections for various factors that affect the antenna performance.
1. Press Setup > Position > Error Correction > Correction Settings.
2. Specify the appropriate settings for each of the correction types listed across the top of
the window.
Refraction Correction - Selects whether atmospheric refraction corrections are applied
(ENABLE) or not (DISABLE). These corrections are usually helpful in tracking targets
below 5° in EL. Correction values are determined using equations from IESS-412 and
are listed in Table 4-1.
EL Droop Correction - Selects whether corrections entered in the EL Droop table are
applied (ENABLE) or not (DISABLE).
EL Vel Correction - Selects whether corrections entered in the EL Velocity Correction

table are applied (YES) or not (NO).
Table 4-1: Refraction Corrections
Refract Corrections
EL Geometric EL Observed EL Geometric EL Observed
0 0.4922426 50 50.01356824
5 5.1603798 55 55.01132236
10 10.089886 60 60.00933575
15 15.06034726 65 65.00754019
20 20.04442671 70 70.0058854
25 25.03467668 75 75.00433274
30 30.02800726 80 80.00285121
35 35.02309315 85 85.00141469
40 40.01927066 90 90.0
45 45.01617
4.16.4.1 EL Droop Table
To correct for EL droop, use the EL Droop table to specify the droop values at 5° increments in
the EL axis. The corrections are linearly interpolated between the 5° data points. The Elevation
droop value is subtracted from the raw encoder position to generate the displayed angle. The
display angle reflects the calculated RF beam pointing angle. This correction is used to
compensate for mechanical deflection of the antenna subreflector and its support structure.
Display Angle = Raw Encoder - Droop Value
1. Press Setup > Position > Error Correction > EL Droop Data.
2. At every 5° increment in the EL axis, enter the corresponding droop value (-1 to +1) in
the Elevation angle.
4.16.4.2 EL Velocity Correction Table
The EL Velocity Correction Table lets you enter corrections to account for velocity variations
that occur when a jackscrew drive is used to move the antenna up and down the EL axis. With a
jackscrew drive, the EL motor runs at a constant speed but that speed typically results in
different antenna velocities depending on the angle.
NOTE
If you want to clear all existing values from the table before entering
new data, press Clear.
1. Press Setup > Position > Error Correction > EL Velocity Data.
Scroll for additional table rows.
2. Enter the appropriate EL angles and correction values.

EL Angle, Velocity Correction - The table has rows for up to 16 EL Angle values (-5° to
95°). The corresponding Velocity Correction value (0.1 - 1) represents the percentage of
the maximum EL velocity that results at that angle.
For example, at EL = 0°, suppose the motor results in the maximum EL velocity. At 45°,
the same motor speed results in 70% of the maximum EL velocity. In the table, enter:
EL Angle Velocity Correction
0 1.0
45 0.70
4.16.5 Axis Parameters
4.16.5.1 AZ Parameters
This window sets general parameters for all AZ motors.
1. Press Setup > Position > Axis > AZ Parameters.
Note: Single-speed systems, as set on Setup > System Options,

do not show Maximum Velocity or Slew Decision Pt.

Maximum Velocity - Full-speed antenna velocity for this axis in deg/sec. This enters the
velocity for use in internal calculations; it does not control the velocity. Changing this
value does not affect the antenna’s actual full-speed velocity.
Track Velocity – Slow speed used to make the small, accurate position movements
needed for tracking. Refer to the procedure for calculating the Track Velocity given later
in this section.
DeadBand, Hysteresis - The two parameters work together to provide a position loop
closure method that allows intermittent or single AC motor operation. This is
accomplished by disabling the axis motor when the position error is within the Deadband
parameter value. The Hysteresis parameter is provided to prevent an axis from enabling
and disabling continuously. The DeadBand parameter is in units of degrees, whereas
the Hysteresis parameter is a unitless multiplier. For example, if the DeadBand
parameter is 0.005° and the Hysteresis parameter is 1.5, the axis will disable the motor
when the position error is less than 0.005°. When the error reaches 1.5 x .005 = 0.0075°,
the motor will enable and drive the antenna until the error is less than 0.005°.
Setting the DeadBand parameter to 0.000 disables the DeadBand feature. The smallest
DeadBand must be bigger than the encoder resolution or the system will not stop its
motion. If antenna motion cycles back and forth, the DeadBand may be too small.
NOTE
DeadBand should always be active for AC motor systems and disabled
for DC motor systems.
Slew Decision Pt - Distance from the commanded position where the antenna changes
Maximum Velocity to Track Velocity.
Acceleration Time - Time for the antenna to go from stationary to Maximum Velocity,
which is determined by the inverter drive configuration. The default is 1 sec.
Deceleration Time - Time for the antenna to go from Maximum Velocity to stationary,
which is determined by the inverter drive configuration. The default is 1 sec.
Calculating the Track Velocity
Calculate the Track Velocity value using the formula:
Track Velocity = (Fmax / 4) * (TV@fmax)
where:
Fmax = Maximum Receive Frequency of the System (GHz)

TV@fmax (Track Velocity at Max Track Frequency) = 10% * BW
BW = Beamwidth = 21 / (Fmax * D) (in degrees)
D = Dish Diameter (m)
To verify whether the antenna tracks accurately, calculate the Motor Controller Frequency at the
slowest Track Velocity.
Motor Controller Frequency @ TV@fmax = (TV@fmax) / (MV) * (MTR Max Frequency)
where:
MV = Max Velocity of Antenna (in degrees/sec)

MTR Max Frequency = 50 or 60 Hz = _(use motor rated frequency)_
Then verify the result to ensure the motors will respond as required.
If the Motor Controller

Then:
Frequency is:
>= 5 Hz The system should perform as expected with a

steptrack runtime of 1 second for a 10% BW step.
< 5 Hz The motors could cog (causing an uneven, ratcheting

motion) and not provide the torque required to
steptrack properly. Using the Fmax frequency, test the
antenna to verify it is positioned to the accuracy
needed.
Testing the Antenna Position Based on the Calculated Track Velocity
A complete procedure for testing the antenna position is not possible, but some general
guidelines are given below. For more assistance, contact GDST.
 If motor frequency/axis speed is too low, the system may cog or stall and not reach the
desired angle error. In this case:
 Try increasing the Track Velocity value. Systems often work well with track velocities
up to about twice the value calculated previously.
 Review the selected DeadBand value and see if it is appropriate. A DeadBand value
of 1-2% of beamwidth is desired, but not less than ~0.002° for systems with optical
encoders or 0.006° for systems with 1:1 resolvers. Larger DeadBand values are not
desirable, but the system may work acceptably with values up to 4-5% of beamwidth.
 If motor frequency/axis speed is too high, the system may overshoot the desired
position. This is not likely with the calculations used, but the adjustments above may
cause this behavior.
 If the system overshoots once and then makes one correction, ending within the
DeadBand, this normally does not impact tracking.
 If the system repeatedly moves back and forth, this is not acceptable and the system
must be slowed down or a larger DeadBand entered.
4.16.5.2 EL Parameters
This window sets general parameters for all EL motors.
 Press Setup > Position > Axis > EL Parameters.
Note: Single-speed systems, as set on Setup > System Options,

do not show Maximum Velocity or Slew Decision Pt.
For a description of the parameters, refer to Section 4.16.5.1, AZ Parameters.
4.16.5.3 POL Parameters
This window sets general parameters for all POL motors.
 Press Setup > Position > Axis > POL Parameters.
For a description of the parameters, refer to AZ Parameters.
4.16.6 ACB Serial Ports
By default, one RS-232 serial port is available on the ACB and can be configured to interface
with a supervisory computer. However, if your ACB has a daughter card, the card has two serial
ports. Serial 1 is the left serial port on the daughter card and is configured for RS-232; Serial 2
is the right serial port on the card and is configured for RS-422.
NOTE
Excessive traffic at low baud rates on the serial port can interfere with
normal ACU interactions.
1. Press Setup > Hardware > ACB Serial Port.
2. In the Serial Port # field, select whether to configure Serial Port #1 or #2.
The Serial Port # field is shown only if your ACB has a daughter card.

Number Data Bits - Sets the number of data bits as 7 or 8.
HW Flow Control - Turns hardware flow control off or on, only if the RTS (Ready To
Send) and CTS (Clear To Send) lines in the interface specification are wired.
Number Stop Bits - Sets the number of stop bits as 1 or 2.
Parity Bit - Selects None, Odd, Even, Space, or Mark.
Baud Rate - Selects 300, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, or 57600.
Control - Selects Status Only or Full Control.
4.16.7 ACB TCP/IP
This window sets the network parameters used to connect an external host or M&C computer to
the ACB.
NOTE
This window is only for the IP address that supports the external
customer M&C port. This IP address does NOT change any IP
addresses associated with the internal control system network (which
is the ACU-PDU-TRU network). Refer to the System Schematic for
interface details.
1. Press Setup > Hardware > ACB TCP/IP.

IP Address - IP address used by a supervisory computer to access the Antenna Control
System. (Refer to 8200-05-0009 for details about the interface protocol.)
Subnet Mask - Subnet Mask address.
Gateway - Gateway server address.
Control 5001, Control 5002 - Selects Status Only or Full Control, which limits the
amount of control available from the selected port.
 Status Only – A supervisory computer can fully monitor the system but cannot
change any settings.
 Full Control - A supervisory computer can fully monitor the system and change
the settings.
MAC Address (display-only) - Media Access Control address assigned to the ACB
network adapter associated with the specified IP address. Typically, the MAC address is
“burned” into the device at the factory.
NTP Server - IP address of the NTP time server, if available.
3. Press Execute.
A message reminds you to wait one minute and then restart the ACB after executing the
new settings.
4. Press Execute.
NOTE
The system does not restart automatically. You need to restart the
ACB manually (power cycle the CB1 logic power to the PDU) before
the new TCP/IP settings will take effect.
4.16.8 TRU (Tracking Receiver Unit)
4.16.8.1 TRU External Status
This window sets the external status bits for the TRU. The 16 status bits are grouped into four
banks, as indicated on the window.
1. Press Setup > Hardware > TRU > TRU External Status.
2. For each bank, select either:

 LOW – By default, pulls down the external status lines for the bits in this bank. Use
this setting if LNAs and BDCs connected to these bits use pull-ups to signal faults.
 HIGH – By default, pulls up the external status lines for the bits in this bank. Use this
setting if LNAs and BDCs connected to these bits use pull-downs to signal faults.
4.16.8.2 TRU Serial Port
This window configures the serial port for the tracking receiver.
1. Press Setup > Hardware > TRU > TRU Serial Port.

Type - Specifies an RS-232 or RS422 connection.
Baud Rate - Selects 300, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, or 57600.
4.16.8.3 TRU TCP/IP
This window sets the IP address for the TRU. Use caution when changing the address. The
system will not operate properly with an incorrect address.
1. Press Setup > Hardware > TRU > TRU TCP/IP.
Note
In case you accidentally enter an
incorrect IP address, the window lists
the last known working address and
the factory-default address.
2. Specify the IP address for the TRU.

The MAC Address is a display-only field that shows the Media Access Control address
assigned to the TRU. Typically, the MAC address is “burned” into the device at the
factory.
4.16.8.4 TRU DAC Output
This window sets the output scaling and bandwidth for the DAC outputs that provide analogs of
the signal strength.
1. Press Setup > Hardware > TRU > TRU DAC Output.

Sum Maximum – Beacon signal strength value corresponding to a 10 V output on the
TRACKING OUT connector. The Sum Maximum value should be greater than the Sum
Minimum value.
Sum Minimum – Depends on whether the unit has digital or analog software:
 For digital: Beacon signal strength value corresponding to a -10 V output on the
TRACKING OUT connector.
 For analog: Beacon signal strength value corresponding to a 0 V output on the
TRACKING OUT connector.
Sum Filter – Bandwidth for the first-order filter that is applied to the analog voltage
representation of the beacon signal strength.
4.16.8.5 BITE Generator
This window sets up a Built-In Test generator that allows the RF front-end to be tested without
an RF source input to the TRU.
1. Press Setup > Hardware > TRU > TRU BITE Generator.

BITE Flag – Turns the BITE generator on or off.
Frequency – Specifies the input frequency in GHz.
4.16.9 Analog Input
This window is available only when the TRU Type on the System Options window is set to
Analog Input. Use this window to specify the operating parameters of the optional ADAM
module that is used to connect the system to a third-party analog TRU.
1. Press Setup > Hardware > Analog Input.

 PLC IP Address – IP address of the ADAM module (not the TRU). Typically, the IP
address is set by General Dynamics and should not be changed.
 PLC IP Port (display only) – Shows the port used for the IP connection.
 PLC Slave ID (display only) – Used when multiple ADAM modules are connected,
which is not currently supported.
 Active Channel – Selects which channel connector on the ADAM module is
connected to the TRU.
 Input Type – Selects the voltage range (±10 V or ±5 V) that matches the signal
range output by the TRU.
 Scale – Typically, leave this set to 1.000. Change the value only if the method
described below for the RF window will not adjust the TRU signal properly.
NOTE
To control how the ACB interprets the TRU signal, use the Tracking
Slope and Offset fields on the RF window. For Tracking Slope, enter
the slope value shown on the TRU or given in the TRU documentation.
For Offset, enter a value (+ or - ) that shifts the TRU signal into an
appropriate range for the threshold values in the RF window.
3. Press Save.
A message reminds you to wait one minute and then restart the ACB after executing the
new settings.
4. Press Save.
NOTE
The system does not restart automatically. You need to restart the
ACB manually (power cycle the CB1 logic power to the PDU) before
the new settings will take effect.
4.16.10 Band Table
This window sets the frequency range and hardware configuration for up to six frequency
bands. When a block converter is used to down-convert a frequency range to L-band, the input
frequency to the tracking receiver is determined by the difference between the command
frequency and Local Osc. For additional details about how the Band Table works and how to set
it up properly, refer to Appendix B - Setting the Band Table.
NOTE
For band table settings specific to your TRU, refer to the label on the
TRU’s lid.
1. Press Setup > Hardware > Band Table.

Table (left side) - Press anywhere inside a table row (1 - 6) to select that frequency
band. The fields on the right side of the window display the parameters for the selected
frequency band.
NOTE
Pressing a table row is only used to select a frequency band. To edit
its values, use the input fields and Relay buttons on the right.
Min Freq, Max Freq - Sets the frequency range in GHz for the selected band. These
fields should be set to the actual ranges allowed by the RF hardware. The Min frequency
must be lower than the Max frequency.
Local Osc - Sets the local oscillator (LO) frequency in GHz, which should be set to the
frequency of the block down converter’s local oscillator. The local oscillator frequency
may be either a low side LO with a frequency less than or equal to the Min frequency or
a high side LO with a frequency greater than or equal to the Max frequency. If no block
converter is used, this should be set to 0.
Relays - Band select relay bits (00000000 to 11111111). The Relays entries should be
distinct for each of the six frequency bands. Set these bits according to the discrete logic
used to control the RF transfer (baseball) switches in the downlink.
NOTE
If the TRU supports only L-band RF inputs, the band table should
contain information for all down-conversion devices that feed L-band to
the TRU. These are commonly LNBs. In this case, the relay settings
are not applicable.
The receiver checks the current beacon frequency to see if it is still valid. If it is not valid, the
receiver resets the beacon frequency to the Min frequency of the most recently entered band.
4.16.11 Custom POL
By default, all RF bands in the Band Table (refer to Section 4.16.10) use the POL configuration
specified on Setup > System Options. However, the Custom POL feature lets you specify
customized POL settings for each separate band.
IMPORTANT
Before setting up Custom POL, you should first configure System
Options for a generic POL setup where Linear POL Axis, LP/CP
Switchable, and Simultaneous POL are all set to Yes. Otherwise, the
options available for Custom POL may be limited.
1. Execute the Stop mode.
2. Press Setup > Hardware > Custom POL.

The table shows the current POL settings for each band.
These options are not displayed

when Use Default POL = Yes.
3. For each band you want to customize:

a. Press the band to select it.
b. For Use Default POL, press No.
The customize POL options appear. These options initially have their default settings
from System Options.
c. Use the POL options to customize the POL settings for the selected band.
d. Press Save, and then press Execute in the confirmation window.
NOTE
Be sure to press Save before you select another band. Any unsaved
changes are lost.
The POL descriptions for that band are updated accordingly.
Be Aware When Selecting RF POL Settings Using Custom POL
On the RF window, available POL selections depend on the POL configurations specified on
Setup > System Options and are not affected by any settings on the Custom POL window.
This may mislead you into selecting POL options on the RF window that do not match your
actual system.
For example, suppose:
 The System Options window has Linear POL Axis = Yes and LP/CP Switchable = Yes,
meaning you can select either Linear or Circular POL.
 The Custom POL setting for a particular band has Linear POL Axis = No and
LP/CP Switchable = No, meaning only Circular POL is available.
 On the RF window, the POL Mode field lets you select either Circular or Linear as
specified in System Options, where Circular conflicts with the Custom POL setting.
 If you attempt to save POL settings on the RF window that are inconsistent with the
Custom POL settings, an error message appears. Press OK, and then select settings
that match Custom POL.
Similarly, conflicts with Simultaneous POL = Yes/No can make it appear that you can select
LHCP/RHCP or Vertical/Horizontal POL when those options are not actually available.
4.16.12 Latched Faults
The Latched Faults window determines whether fault messages continue to be displayed on the
Faults List window until they are acknowledged by the operator or a supervisory computer. The
window also determines how the system responds to certain types of faults.
NOTE
Latched faults help the operator locate and troubleshoot any rare or
fast transient faults that might disappear before they are noticed.
1. Press Setup > Hardware > Latched Faults.
2. For Latched Faults, press either:

 DISABLE - Fault messages are removed from the Faults List automatically when the
fault condition clears, even if they have not been acknowledged.
 ENABLE - Fault messages remain on the Faults List until they are acknowledged,
even if the fault condition has cleared. (Active faults do not clear after
acknowledgment.) This option can help troubleshoot intermittent faults that might
otherwise be removed from the Faults List before you can see them.
4.16.13 Monopulse
4.16.13.1 Phase Shift Table
The Phase Shift Table allows the use of redundant LNAs, path switches, etc. The values
entered here allow tables to be set to allow the selection of different RF paths prior to the
Monopulse Scanner plate.
1. Press Setup > Hardware > Monopulse > Phase Shift Table.
Scroll to view all 50 table rows.

bit #15 bit #0
Up to 50 bit patterns can be stored in the Phase Shift Table, where the bit pattern on
each table row represents a different RF path configuration.
2. Press the table row you want to modify (1, 2, 3, etc...) to select it.
3. In the Description field on the right, enter a unique name that identifies the bit pattern for
the selected row.
4. Use the16 bit pattern buttons to set the bit pattern appropriately. Press each button
repeatedly to cycle through 0 (low), 1 (high), and X (don't care).
5. Press Save, and then press Execute in the confirmation window.
Determining Bit Patterns
These values are determined during initial installation and test, and are then stored in the ACU.
If any RF component is replaced in the RF path prior to the Monopulse Scanner Plate or if RF
cables are replaced, the values need to be retested and stored in the ACU.
The bit pattern for the current RF path can be displayed on the Tracking Receiver by pressing
the System OK / Fault button and then the Ext Status button. The bit pattern can also be
displayed on the ACU by scrolling to the Monopulse area of the Monitor > System > Tracking
Receiver window.
Example
This example applies to a simplified system where there is a 1:2 redundant LNA controller with
a POL 1 and POL 2 path with a single backup LNA for both paths and a tracking receiver
connected to each path.
Table No. Bit Pattern Description
1 110001X0100X0X01 Master Phase Shift 1
2 110000X00110X10X Master Phase Shift 2, etc.
bit #15 bit #0

(16th digit) (1st digit)
In each bit pattern, the LNA status switch is represented by status bit #7 (8th digit from the
right).
 In normal operation, the RF path uses its primary LNA in which the status switch is
closed and the receiver reads 1 (high) in bit #7. Because table 1 has a 1 in bit #7, the
system uses the phasing values entered for this bit pattern in the RF window.
 If the primary LNA fails, the LNA controller switches the RF path to the secondary LNA in
which the status switch is open. Now the receiver reads 0 (low) in bit #7, and the system
uses the phasing values entered for this bit pattern in the RF window.
Notice that both bit patterns have an X in bit #9. An X in any one of the bit locations indicates a
DON'T CARE or IGNORE. For example, in a multi-feed system, when tracking using Feed A,
the status bits relative to Feed B are ignored with respect to the current phase angles in use. If a
bit toggles on the RF path but that bit has an X (don’t care) in the bit pattern, the ACU continues
to use the same phasing values that were in effect before the bit toggled.
Deleting a Table Row
1. Select the table row you want to delete.
2. Press Delete, and then press Execute in the confirmation window.
4.16.13.2 Mono Filter
The Mono Filter runs the monopulse error signal through a low-pass filter. The filter can help
smooth an excessively noisy signal or is useful when the position loop is jittery. Antenna motion
can also be smoothed by changing the Dead Band and/or Hysteresis parameters in the Setup >
Position > Axis windows for AZ and EL.
1. Press Setup > Hardware > Monopulse > Mono Filter.

 Enable Filter – Enables (Yes) or disables (No) the filter.
 Sample Rate – Sets the time frame over which monopulse error is averaged to help
eliminate excessive axis movement. For example, 10 Hz averages the error over
1/10 second.
4.16.13.3 Autophase Algorithm
The Autophase Algorithm window specifies whether autophase angles are calculated using the
“maximum” or “minimum” algorithm.
1. Press Setup > Hardware > Monopulse > Autophase Algorithm.
2. Specify the appropriate setting:

 Max (recommended) – Use this setting in most cases.
 Min – Use this only if Max produces unsatisfactory tracking results. This may be
necessary with non-ideal feeds that have some degree of cross-coupling.
4.16.14 System Options
This window is used to configure the system during initial installation and setup. Many other
system settings are based on the selected options.
NOTE
After these options are set up during initial installation, you should not
change them under normal circumstances. Changing these options will
have adverse effects on system performance. Only authorized system
personnel should change these settings.
1. Press Setup > System Options.

AZ Brakes, EL Brakes – Selects:
 None – No brakes.
 Brake in DeadBand - Sets the brakes every time the antenna moves to a
position inside the DeadBand, which is set in the Setup > Position > Axis
window for each axis. Use this setting when brakes are needed during normal
conditions to prevent low winds from back-driving the antenna. This setting
cycles the brakes more often, requiring more frequent maintenance. Normally
used for bull-gears or turning-head antenna drives.
 Hold in DeadBand – Holds the brakes disengaged during any active mode and
sets them only when the antenna is in Stop mode. The antenna holds position by
commanding zero rate on the motor controllers. Use this setting when brakes are
not needed for normal conditions but are needed for high-wind or stow situations
or for maintenance. Normally used for jack drives with brakes.
TRU Type – Selects the type of TRU (500 Analog, 500 Digital, None, or Analog Input).
AC Drive Type – Selects single- or variable-speed motors.
AZ Feedback Device, EL Feedback Device, POL Feedback Device – Selects the type of
resolver or encoder used for the AZ and EL axes, and selects the type of resolver or
potentiometer used for the POL axis.
Horn Delay – Selects the number of seconds (3, 5, 10, or Disable) from the time the
warning horn sounds until the system axes will be enabled.
NOTE
This system has an optional Custom POL feature that lets you
customize the POL settings for each RF band in the Band Table (refer
to Section 4.16.10). If you want to use Custom POL, set Linear POL
Axis, LP/CP Switchable, and Simultaneous POL to Yes.
Linear POL Axis – Selects whether the system has a Linear polarization axis (Yes). If
No, the system is assumed to have Circular polarization only.
LP/CP Switchable – Selects whether the system can switch between Linear and
Circular polarization.
 If Yes, the POL Mode field on the RF window lets the operator select either
Circular or Linear.
 If No, the POL Mode field is fixed according to the setting of the Linear POL
system option.
 If Linear POL Axis = Yes, the POL Mode is fixed at Linear.
 If Linear POL Axis = No, the POL Mode is fixed at Circular.
NOTE
Use a combination of Linear POL Axis and LP/CP Switchable settings
to specify which POL modes are available on your system.
To Specify: Set:
Linear POL only Linear POL Axis = Yes

LP/CP Switchable = No
Circular POL only Linear POL Axis = No

LP/CP Switchable = No
Both Linear and Linear POL Axis = Yes

Circular POL LP/CP Switchable = Yes
Executing conflicting selections will generate an error. For example,

Linear POL Axis = No (implying Circular only) and LP/CP Switchable =
Yes (implying both Linear and Circular) is an invalid combination.
Simultaneous POL – Used if the available feed contains two polarization types and the
TRU is set up for two polarization types.
 If Yes, the POL Select field on the RF window lets the operator select either
Horizontal or Vertical for Linear polarization or LHCP or RHCP for Circular.
 If No, the POL Select field is fixed at either Horizontal or Vertical for Linear
polarization or LHCP or RHCP for Circular.
Monopulse – Enables Monopulse as a selectable Track mode option.
 If Yes, Monopulse is available as a Track mode option.

 If No, Monopulse is not available.
NOTE
You should enable Monopulse only if your system is properly equipped
and configured to process monopulse signals, which requires a
monopulse feed, scan plate, and appropriate TRU.
3. Press Save.
A message reminds you to wait one minute and then restart the ACB.
4. Cycle power to the PDU to activate the settings and reconfigure the system parameters.
4.16.15 Date Time
The Date Time window sets the current date and time for the system. The time and date appear
in the title bar of the main ACU screen and in various log reports.
NOTE
Some systems use time sources such as NTP to set the date and UTC
time automatically. With these systems, you can still specify a UTC
offset to display the local time. Also, be sure to verify the automatic
date and time are loaded properly into the ACU.
1. Press Setup > Other > Date Time.

UTC Time - Current Universal Coordinated Time (HH:MM:SS) or Greenwich Mean Time.
Date (MM/DD/YY) - Today’s UTC date.
Time Display - Press LOCAL or UTC to specify which time zone the ACU uses to
display the time.
UTC Offset - Number of hours difference (+ or -) between UTC and local time.
4.16.16 Site Setup
This window sets the site location and size of the antenna.
1. Press Setup > Other > Site Setup.

Latitude - Site latitude in degrees north, which are positive.
Longitude - Site longitude in degrees east, which are positive. To convert degrees west
to degrees east, subtract the site longitude in degrees west from 360 degrees.
For example, if the site’s longitude is 96.0° W: 360 - 96 = 264° deg E
Altitude - Altitude at the antenna feed in meters above mean sea level.
NOTE
For high-performance applications, Latitude and Longitude should be
accurate to within 0.0001 degrees (50 ft). The altitude should be
accurate to within 50 meters.
Dish Aperture - Size of the antenna used with the system from 0.1 to 100 meters. Be
sure to set this correctly because automatic parameter calculations are based on this
number. The beamwidth of the antenna is determined from the aperture and frequency.
If the dish size or beamwidth is not correct, the aperture should be modified to make the
beamwidth correct.
Name - Up to 20 alphanumeric characters that identify the site. This name is shown in
the Title bar at the top of the main ACU screen.
4.16.17 Hour Meter Monitor
The Hour Meter Monitor window tracks the number of hours elapsed since the last time
maintenance was performed on the AZ and/or EL mechanical drive systems. The system
compares the elapsed time with the suggested number of hours until the next maintenance
service.
NOTE
You should set up the monitor immediately after each regular
maintenance service.
1. Press Setup > Other > Hour Meter.
2. Enter the appropriate values:

AZ Current Hours, EL Current Hours - Specify how long ago the maintenance was
completed.
NOTE
If you set up the monitor immediately after maintenance, enter 0.
Otherwise, enter the number of hours. For example, if the maintenance
was performed yesterday at this time, enter 24.
AZ Alarm Limit, EL Alarm Limit - Enter the suggested number of hours until the next
maintenance service.
The system now begins to update the AZ and EL Current Hours fields every hour. When those
elapsed times equal the number of hours in the AZ and EL Alarm Limit fields, a non-disabling
AZ Hour Limit or EL Hour Limit fault message is issued. At that time, maintenance should be
performed on the AZ and/or EL drives.
4.16.18 Data Log Options
This window sets up a data log that automatically contains periodic fault/status messages, mode
changes, and position information. The data log is saved in the ACU’s memory.
NOTE
To view the contents of this data log, press Monitor > Data > Data
Log Functions.
1. Press Setup > Other > Data Log Options.
2. Press Off or On to turn the data log off or on.

Periodic Report - Periodic update interval at which the log data is saved, in increments
from 1 to 600 seconds. Any fault or status change is reported immediately, regardless of
the interval setting.
Log Name - Up to five alphanumeric characters shown at the beginning of each log line
that is stamped with a date/time, as well as all status and fault lines. If you turn the data
log on and off to record specific situations, use this field to identify the log lines that
occurred during each situation.
4. Select On or Off for the following fields to specify what kind of data to include in the log.
Include Faults – Includes all fault messages.
Include Status - Includes all status messages.
Include Fund Modes - Includes information about the current fundamental mode.
Include Enh Modes - Includes information about the current enhanced mode.
Include POL Modes - Includes information about the current POL mode.
Include Periodic - Includes a periodic sample snapshot of position, signal, mode, and
time. When set to Yes, the log contains periodic samples and other selected data.
4.16.19 Screen Control
By default, the ACU’s touch screen locks automatically if it is inactive for a specified number of
seconds. This window sets that automatic locking period.
NOTE
To unlock the screen, press anywhere on the screen. A pop-up window
prompts you to press an Unlock button.
1. Press Setup > Other > Screen Control.
2. Enter the number of seconds for the automatic screen lock, from 30 to 3600 sec
(1 hour).
NOTE
To disable the automatic screen lock, check the Disable Lock Screen checkbox.
4.16.20 Major Events
The Major Events window determines how the system responds to certain types of faults.
1. Press Setup > Other > Major Events.
2. For ACB Power Cycle, select an option to specify how the system responds to a power
cycle.
 Resume - After powering on, the system is placed into the mode that was active
when the power was removed.
 Stop - After powering on, the system is placed into Stop mode.
3. For Motor Control Fault and Motor Power Loss, select an option to specify how the
system responds to that type of fault.
 Resume - The axis that caused the fault is disabled. When the fault clears, the
system transitions back to the current state and enables all axes. The transition time
depends on the Horn Delay setting in the Setup > System Options window.
 Stop - The axis that caused the fault is disabled. The system stays in the same
mode as before the fault, and the other axes remain enabled. To re-enable the axis,
execute the Stop mode and then re-enter an antenna command.
NOTE
To prevent unexpected motion during maintenance, either change the
settings to Stop or verify the system is in Stop mode.
Section 5 - Other Control Units : Portable Maintenance Unit (PMU)
SECTION 5 - OTHER CONTROL UNITS
The Portable Maintenance Unit (PMU) is used to move the antenna manually. The PMU cannot
access the modes and parameters available on the ACU, so it is used primarily for maintenance
or inspection. The Manual Control Unit (MCU) is an optional, rack-mounted version of the PMU.
5.1 Portable Maintenance Unit (PMU)
The handheld PMU has controls and status indicators to execute manual control and position
jogging for all axes of antenna control – normally Azimuth, Elevation, and Polarization. The unit
has a pendant cable and connector that can be plugged in at the PDU or a PMU J-Box. The
PMU is powered by the PDU. The PMU is independent of the Antenna Control Unit (ACU) and
can take control when control is offered by the ACU or when the ACU is powered down.
To prevent a lack of antenna control if the PMU-to-PDU data link fails while a command is
active, the PMU periodically transmits a heartbeat message to the PDU. If the heartbeat
message stops while the PMU is in control, the PDU disables the system.
5.1.1 PMU Controls and Indicators

 AXIS Button – Selects which two antenna axes are controlled by the PMU.
 MODE Button – Selects the PMU mode of operation.
 DATA Button – Used to alter data appropriate to the given selected mode of the PMU.
 POWER Indicator – Illuminates green (indicating the PMU is operational) when the
PMU cable is connected to the PDU or PMU J-Box and the PDU is powered up.
 ENABLED Indicator – Illuminates green when the PMU is offered control of the
antenna.
 ACTIVE Button/Indicator – When the PMU is offered control, pushing the ACTIVE
button accepts control and precludes other units from taking control. When the PMU is in
control, the ACTIVE indicator illuminates green. After the PMU takes control, other units
may not regain control until the PMU relinquishes it. Relinquishing control requires
another push of the button.
 AXIS 1 (AXIS 2) FAULT Indicator – Illuminates red when an axis or system fault is
reported by the system. This condition inhibits control of the axis from the PMU.
 AXIS 1 (AXIS 2) ENABLE Button/Indicator – After the PMU takes control, pushing the
ENABLE button allows the successive enabling and disabling of each axis without
affecting the operation of the other axis. The ENABLE indicator illuminates green when
an axis is enabled.
 AXIS 1 (AXIS 2) Adjustment Knob – Each knob controls a 32-count incremental rotary
encoder for parameter selections and fine adjustment of antenna rate or position. Each
knob also has a switch function that is activated by pushing in the knob.
 AXIS 1 (AXIS 2) ZERO, -MAX, and +MAX Indicators – Provide feedback that the rate
command or position offset selected by the adjustment knob is at the zero, maximum
negative, or maximum positive value.
5.1.2 PMU Display
The display is a four-line, 20-character LCD that shows a variety of information.
Speed or Offset Speed or Offset

Information, Information,
Depending on Mode Depending on
Mode
The speed or offset information shown on the display for each axis depends on the current
mode as indicated below.
Upper speed limit, 100% of maximum.

HISP
Mode
Currently commanded speed as a percentage of maximum.
Upper speed limit, 10% of maximum by default.

LOSP Use the DATA button to set a different speed limit.
Mode
Currently commanded speed as a percentage of maximum.
Upper angular speed limit, 0.5 degrees/sec by default.

AXSP Use the DATA button to set a different speed limit.
Mode Currently commanded angular speed in degrees/sec.
Incremental offset in degrees applied with each jog.

PJOG Use the DATA button to set a different increment.
Mode
Total angular offset from the HOME position in degrees.
5.1.3 PMU Operating Modes
Mode selection can be made at any time and causes the axes to be disabled and the control
knobs' encoder counts to be set to zero. The associated ZERO LEDs are also illuminated.
Available modes are:
 LOSP (low speed) – The default setting. This speed command is sent directly to the
motor controller and is appropriate for use without any position feedback. Low speed
mode gives reduced speed capability and the display shows the actual commanded
speed and speed limit set as a percentage of the full speed.
 HISP (high speed) – Allows up to full-speed operation. This speed command is sent
directly to the motor controller and is appropriate for use without any position feedback.
The PMU display shows the actual commanded speed and speed limit set as a
percentage of the full speed.
 AXSP (axis speed) – Useful when full positional control of the antenna is possible and
variable speed drives are used. AXSP lets you specify (via the control knob) an axis
speed in deg/sec. This speed is true axis encoder speed and is actively controlled by the
position loop.
 PJOG (position jog) – An incremental position jog. The current position is taken as the
HOME position. Turning the control knob results in position offsets from the HOME
position. The PMU display shows the total offset from HOME in degrees. The offset is
NOT zeroed if an axis is disabled.
5.1.4 Operating the PMU
Be sure the PMU is plugged into either the PMU connector bracket on the side of PDU or at an
optional PMU Junction Box (J-Box) placed at convenient locations around the antenna. The
PMU powers up automatically, the display comes up, and the green POWER indicator lights up.
Transferring Control from the ACU to the PMU
In general, any time another unit relinquishes control (and no other unit has yet taken control),
the green ENABLED indicator on the PMU lights up to show that control is available for any unit
that takes it. In most cases, you will transfer control from the ACU to the PMU.
1. On the ACU currently in control:

 On the button bar at the bottom of the screen, press Control > Control Change
Allowed.
The PMU's green LED on the ENABLE button turns on, indicating that no unit is
currently in control and that any unit can now take control.
2. On the PMU:
 Press the ACTIVE button.
The green LED on the ACTIVE button turns on, indicating the PMU has control.
All axes are disabled automatically. Any speed commands or position offsets are reset to zero,
which turns on the ZERO indicators for both axes on the PMU.
Releasing Control from the PMU
When the PMU has control:
 Press the ACTIVE button.

The green LED on the ACTIVE button turns off and the green LED on the ENABLE
button turns on, indicating that no unit is currently in control.
All axes are disabled automatically. Any speed commands or position offsets are reset to zero,
which turns on the ZERO indicators for both axes on the PMU.
Selecting Which Axes to Display and Control
The PMU refers generically to AXIS 1 and AXIS 2. By default, Axis 1 is set for AZ and Axis 2 is
set for EL, but you can assign any one of the antenna’s axes to Axis 1 or Axis 2. For example, if
your system has a POL axis, you can assign POL to either Axis 1 or 2.
NOTE
You cannot assign the same axis to both Axis 1 and Axis 2.
1. Press the AXIS button one time.

The currently assigned axes flash on Line 1 in the display.
Both axes are disabled automatically. Any speed commands or position offsets are reset
to zero, which turns on the ZERO indicators for both axes.
2. Turn the AXIS 1 and AXIS 2 control knobs until the display shows the axes you want to
select for each knob.
NOTE
Be sure to complete Step 3 within 10 to 15 seconds, before the display
stops flashing; otherwise, the display returns to its previous axes.
3. Press the AXIS button again to lock in the displayed axes.
Enabling or Disabling the Axes
To switch each axis between enabled and disabled:
 Press the ENABLE button for Axis 1 or Axis 2.
When the axis is enabled, a green light appears in the upper-right corner of the ENABLE
button.
Selecting the Operating Mode
1. Press the MODE button one time.

The current MODE setting flashes on Line 3 in the display.
2. Rotate either control knob until the display shows the mode you want to select.
NOTE
stops flashing; otherwise, the display returns to its previous mode.
3. Press the MODE button again to lock in that mode.

The new MODE setting on Line 3 stops flashing.
4. Press ENABLE for one or both axes to re-enable them.
To control the axis speed/offset according to the new mode setting, turn the large control knob
for the appropriate axis. (Allowable speeds/offsets are determined by the selected mode.)
Selecting the Mode Data
Most operating modes let you select from several available values for that mode. For example,
LOSP mode lets you select the upper speed limit and PJOG mode lets you select the
incremental jog amount.
1. Press the DATA button one time.

The AXIS 1 and AXIS 2 settings on Line 2 in the display start to flash.
2. Turn the AXIS 1 and AXIS 2 control knobs until the display shows the settings you want
to select for each axis.
NOTE
stops flashing; otherwise, the display returns to its previous settings.
3. Press the DATA button again to lock in that setting.

4. Press ENABLE for one or both axes to re-enable them.
Viewing Faults
When a fault occurs that disables a particular axis, the red FAULT indicator lights up for that
axis. The fault message appears across the bottom of the PMU display. Non-disabling faults are
not indicated or displayed on the PMU.
Quickly Zeroing a Speed Command or Position Offset for an Axis
To zero a speed command or position offset immediately:
 Push the control knob for that axis.
This shortcut is easier than turning the control knob until the ZERO indicator lights up and the
display shows zero.
Backing Out of a Prelimit or Limit Condition Using the PMU
If an axis has moved beyond the prelimit hardware switch, the ACU can no longer control the
axis. However, as long as the axis has not contacted the final limit switch, you can use the PMU
to back the axis out of the limit condition. (If the axis contacts the final limit switch, you need to
use the motor's handcrank switch to move it.) After the PMU backs the axis out of the limit, the
ACU can again control the axis.
1. Press and continue holding down the ENABLE button for that axis.
The axis is re-enabled after the button is held down for approximately 3 seconds, but
you must continue holding it down to override the fault condition.
2. While continuing to hold down the ENABLE button, use the PMU to drive the antenna
back out of the limit condition.
3. When the antenna is out of the limit, release the ENABLE button.
NOTE
 Do not release the ENABLE button before the antenna is out of
the limit; otherwise, the prelimit fault will reoccur.
 You can also use the Point > Manual Rate mode to back the
antenna out of a prelimit.
Section 5 - Other Control Units : PMU J-Box (Optional)
5.2 PMU J-Box (Optional)
The PMU can always be plugged into the PMU connector bracket on the side of the PDU, but
this may be inconvenient for some systems. When one or more optional PMU Junction Boxes
(J-Boxes) are installed on or around the antenna, such as the AZ and/or EL platforms, the PMU
can be connected at a location that allows more direct observation of the antenna.
The J-Box is waterproofed for outdoor duty, but be sure to seal the conduit fittings to protect
against water leakage.
5.3 Manual Control Unit (MCU)
The MCU is a rack-mounted version of the PMU. It is functionally identical to the PMU and has
the same controls, indicators, modes, and display to manually control and jog all antenna axis
positions. The MCU is independent of the ACU and the PMU. It can take control when control is
offered by the ACU or PMU, or when the ACU is powered down.
For information about the MCU's controls, indicators, modes, and display, as well as how to
operate the MCU, refer to the PMU descriptions in Section 5.1.1.
Section 5 - Other Control Units : Supervisory Computer
5.4 Supervisory Computer
An external supervisory computer can perform Monitor & Control (M&C) operations with the
antenna. Valid commands are specified in the Software Interface Specification. A supervisory
computer accesses the system through the Customer LAN port on the ACB or through a
properly configured serial port.
NOTE
To use a serial port, an optional daughter board for the ACB must be
installed. Port 1 uses RS-232, and Port 2 uses RS-422/485.
To view or change the IP address of the LAN port:
 Open the Setup > Hardware > ACB TCP/IP window (refer to Section 4.16.7).
To view or change the serial port configuration:
 Open the Setup > Hardware > ACB Serial Port (refer to Section 4.16.6).
Connection details are handled by the software in the supervisory computer. If the Customer
LAN port is connected to an external network and firewall, any computers with access to that
network can access the ACB. Otherwise, the computer must be connected to the LAN port.
NOTE
If a network exists, it must be set up and maintained by the customer.
GDST is not responsible for providing or maintaining a network.
5.5 Remote-Client Connections
The remote GUI client can be accessed with a web browser via the Customer LAN port on the
ACB. As with a supervisory computer, the client computer can access the system through an
existing network (if provided by the customer) or a direct connection to the LAN port.
To view or change the IP address of the LAN port:
 Open the Setup > Hardware > ACB TCP/IP window (refer to Section 4.16.7).
The web browser for the remote client must access the URL:
 http:// ip_address : 8080
The remote client displays the same graphical interface as the ACU, although minor discrepancies
may be appear due to browser differences. Although the ACU GUI and remote client behave the
same, keep in mind the following important points when using the remote client.
 The remote client was tested on Google Chrome v60, Microsoft Edge v15, and Mozilla
Firefox v52. Full functionality is not guaranteed with other browsers or browser versions.
 The ACU software version fields are not applicable on the remote client.
Section 5 - Other Control Units : Remote-Client Connections
 Do not use the remote client to upgrade, undo, or revert software.
 The remote client has the same privileges as the ACU. All commands from remote
clients are treated as though entered directly at the ACU. Take care if multiple remote
clients or if a remote client and the ACU are operated simultaneously. The system
processes commands in the order received and does not attempt to resolve any
conflicting commands.
Section 6 - Hardware : ACU - Antenna Control Unit
SECTION 6 - HARDWARE
The Hardware section describes the principles of operation for the major units of the Antenna
Control System, depending on the system configuration.
 ACU - Antenna Control Unit

 PDU - Power Drive Unit
 PMU - Portable Maintenance Unit
 MCU - Manual Control Unit (optional)
 Position Transducers and Encoders
 Position Transducer 1:1 (optional)
 Optical Encoder (optional)
 RF Scanner (Monopulse) Plate
 Emergency Stop (E-Stop) Switches (optional)
 Travel Limits (optional)
6.1 ACU - Antenna Control Unit
The ACU is the primary operator interface for antenna control. Through the touch screen
interface, a local operator can command operational antenna modes, set parameters, and
monitor fault/status information in a windowing environment. The ACU communicates to the rest
of the Antenna Control System via a standard Ethernet connection to the Antenna Control
Board in the PDU.
The ACU has two USB ports on the back panel, with one of those ports cabled to the USB port
on the front panel. Although either USB port can be used to back up system parameters and to
load the operating system, typically only the front USB port is used. The USB port can also be
used as a keyboard or mouse port, if needed.
The ACU's power supply accepts 120 or 240 VAC at 50/60 Hz.
6.2 PDU - Power Drive Unit
6.2.1 General Information
The PDU is a free-standing aluminum chassis that contains the electrical/mechanical interface
necessary to move the antenna. A lockable handle secures the access door when the system is
operating. A lockout/tagout power disconnect is provided on the cabinet exterior.
Section 6 - Hardware : PDU - Power Drive Unit
The PDU provides control to the AC drive motors and contains the hardware and firmware logic
to close the position and tracking loops with high resolution. It also provides controlled
acceleration and deceleration profiles and a speed regulation range of up to 15:1 with a
conventional inverter rated AC motor. In addition, the PDU provides all of the hardware
necessary to close the rate and torque loops. A dedicated microprocessor system called the
Antenna Control Board (ACB) closes the position and rate loops. The motor controllers close
the torque loops.
The chassis contains a panel assembly consisting of the ACB logic, power supply, inverter
drives and various ancillary devices. Status interlocks and position signals report to the ACB
and, while in constant communication with the ACU, the ACB transmits information and receives
commands to move the antenna on any axis. The PDU may also contain an optional
thermostat-controlled internal heater for cold weather operation and an internal fan for ambient
air circulation and “hot spot” avoidance.
Antenna-mounted emergency stop and axis travel limit status switches report to the PDU. The
PDU interlocks these switches with enable logic and reports their status to the ACU for display.
Major features of the PDU are:
 NEMA 4 (outdoor) enclosure
 Variable speed for high-performance, zero-to-full-rate controllability
 High-speed Ethernet link to the ACU for all drive status and controls
 Embedded microprocessor for local position loop closure
 Redundant, fail-safe interlock logic for immediate disable of the appropriate drives
upon an axis or system fault or interlock occurrence
The position commands are derived by position modes in the ACU and then issued to the PDU
via an Ethernet link. The position loop closure electronics of the PDU reside the ACB, which
compares the position commands with the position feedback from the on-axis encoders
(resolvers) to generate error terms. When the position error becomes greater than Deadband x
Hysteresis, the motor is enabled to move the antenna in the direction that decreases the error.
When the error is less than the Deadband, the motor stops. If the error is greater than the Slew
Decision Point, the antenna moves at full speed. Otherwise, it moves at the Track Velocity.
The emergency stops, axis travel limits, and other interlock switches are monitored in the PDU
and reported to the ACU. Using redundant field programmable gate arrays (FPGAs), the ACB
combines the system, axis, and motor faults. If all faults are cleared, it will “gate the enables” to
the motor controllers for both axes when commanded by the ACB. Thus, independent of the
ACB or ACU processors, the drive motor controllers may be directly disabled by the critical
safety interlocks.
All PDU systems are designed to be failsafe. That is, if they fail, the system will be in the OPEN
or OFF state, thereby preventing motion when a failure exists. The general philosophy for status
and interlock reporting is that the switch or device must provide a voltage to the PDU to indicate
an operative state.
6.2.2 PDU Components
Figure 6-1: Location of Components Inside the PDU
The following table gives a brief description of each component in the PDU.
NOTE
For information about the specific components used for your system,
contact GDST and provide the part number and serial number printed
on the label inside the PDU (left side panel).
PDU LRUs
Item Component Description
1 Antenna Control Board Main servo control board

(ACB)
2 DC power supplies Supplies DC voltages necessary for the PDU: +5, ±12, and
24 VDC
3 Control relay logic Individual relays for different options
4 24 VDC circulation fan Circulates the heat inside the PDU
5 Heater Allows cold temperature operation
6 I/O relay board Customer interface to antenna safety switches
7 Emergency Stop (E-Stop) Cuts power to the motor devices

switch
8 3-phase power contactor Cuts power to all drive components when either an E-Stop is
depressed or an axis contacts a final limit switch
9 Individual circuit breakers Various sizes of circuit breakers to protect the equipment
10 Single-phase filter Filter for the logic power supplied to the PDU
11 I/O logic interface Different size terminal block/relays to interface to

miscellaneous options on antennas
12 Power disconnect Switch on the outside of the cabinet to allow lock out/tagout
procedures to be performed
13 Motor controllers/3-phase Motor controllers and 3-phase line filters for various sizes of
filters motors
The following figure shows a block diagram of the PDU.
Figure 6-2: PDU Block Diagram
6.2.3 Antenna Control Board
The Antenna Control Board (ACB) is the primary interface for all status, interlock, and axis
position commands. Antenna status is sent continuously to the ACU over the ACU Ethernet link.
The ACB generates axis directional enables and rate signals based on operator input at the
ACU or PMU. The following figure shows a functional block diagram.
Figure 6-3: ACB Block Diagram
Section 6 - Hardware : Position Transducers and Encoders
6.3 Position Transducers and Encoders
Depending on its configuration, the system may have one or more of the following units.
6.3.1 Position Transducer 1:1 (Optional)
This is a mechanical assembly coupled directly to the axis. The assembly contains resolver
windings geared 1:1 with the input shaft. A reference sinusoidal waveform of 26 VRMS and
2000 Hertz is connected to one of the resolver rotor windings. The second winding is shorted for
zero input. The resulting sine and cosine waveforms on the stators are 4.8 VRMS maximum.
The information provided by the output windings is combined in software to formulate the
angular position of that axis to a resolution of 16 bits (0.0055°) for AZ/EL over a temperature
range of -40°C to 71°C. The resolver is packaged in a protective metal enclosure.
6.3.2 Optical Encoder (Optional)
This is an angular position transducer. The position is serially encoded and sent to the Antenna
Control Board. The PDU Power Supply assembly provides power to this unit.
Section 6 - Hardware : RF Scanner (Monopulse) Plate
6.4 RF Scanner (Monopulse) Plate
The RF scanner plate is a link between the received RF signal and the TRU. It combines the
Monopulse Sum/Error signals and downconverts the RF frequencies to L-band frequencies,
typically 950-2150 MHz, that can be processed by the TRU. Depending on which RF bands the
antenna can receive, the scan plate uses one or more built-in BDCs (Block Down Converters).
(graphic is representative)
A built-in digital phase shifter accepts XEL and EL phase shift angles (0 to 360 degrees) from
the TRU to correct for Error signal phase displacement between the mode coupler and the RF
scanner plate. Typically, a variable attenuator is included in the Error signal path (before the
digital phase shifter) to perform the Modulation Index Adjustment. A DC power supply is usually
mounted to the plate to power the BDC, digital phase shifter, and the Sum/Error channel LNAs
(Low Noise Amplifiers).
Section 6 - Hardware : Emergency Stop (E-Stop) Switches (Optional)
6.5 Emergency Stop (E-Stop) Switches (Optional)
6.5.1 Standard E-Stops
These devices are typically “mushroom” switches that disable motion in all antenna axes when
the switch is depressed. Pulling the switch out clears the fault condition and leaves the Antenna
Control System in the Stop mode.
E-Stops are outdoor duty and are mounted in convenient locations for access by site personnel.
The system allows two separate, named E-Stop circuits (ESTOP 1 and ESTOP2). If more
E-Stops are required, they can be wired in series.
6.5.2 E-Stop/PMU J-Box Combinations
A combination E-Stop and PMU Junction-Box is also available. In addition to providing a switch
that can disable the system in an emergency situation, this combination switch also provides a
convenient location for connecting a PMU. Refer to Section 5.2, PMU J-Box (Optional).
Section 6 - Hardware : Safety Switches
6.6 Safety Switches
Limit switch hardware is provided with the antenna structure and is not described in this manual.
Refer to the manual for the antenna structure for more information. However, the purpose of the
limit switches is described below.
6.6.1 Travel Limits (Optional)
Travel limit circuitry recognizes up to two sets of mechanically actuated travel limit switches for
each direction of travel of each axis.
 When the antenna hits the first limit, the ACB logic automatically disables further
movement into the limit. You can override this first limit manually by using the PMU,
MCU, or Manual Rate point mode on the ACU. (Other ACU point modes cannot override
this limit.) With the PMU or MCU, you must depress and continue to hold down the axis
Enable button. After you back out and clear this limit, bi-directional axis movement is
again permitted.
 When the antenna hits the second limit (only for those systems with two sets of limits),
the ACB logic automatically disables all axis movement. You cannot use the PMU, MCU,
or Manual Rate mode to back out of this second limit. An electrical or mechanical
override is necessary to move the antenna after this limit is actuated.
NOTE
On a system with two sets of limit switches, the first limit is called the
prelimit and the second limit is called the final limit.
Section 7 - Status Messages
SECTION 7 - STATUS MESSAGES
Status messages appear in the Status window that is always displayed in the upper-right corner
of the ACU screen. They describe the current state of the system or indicate that a particular
action or situation has occurred. Status messages are typically for informational purposes only
and do not disable any of the axes. However, some status messages can appear in conjunction
with a fault message, which may disable an axis.
7.1 List of Status Messages
Status Message Description
3-PHASE POWER RECOVERY After a 3-phase power loss, the power has been restored and has
remained stable for several seconds. The system is now
attempting to reset the drive cabinet faults automatically.
ACTIVELY PHASING Autophase is determining optimum phase angles.
ACU-COMPTR LINK DOWN This condition does not disable any motors. The link connecting
the ACU to the host computer is not responding to the ACU.
 If the host computer was in control, the ACU will take control
and continue operating in the same mode. But previous
velocity commands issued by the host computer are canceled.
This mainly applies to Position Designate mode commands
containing target velocity values.
 If the host computer was not in control, the ACU takes no
action.
To reestablish ACU-Computer communications, restart the host
computer, repair the ACU-computer cable, or restart the ACU.
Note that incorrectly set link parameters may also cause this
problem.
AUTOPHASE TEST GO For factory test only.
AUTOPHASE TEST ON For factory test only.
AUTOSEARCH INHIBIT An Acquire mode is active.
AZ ENABLED The AZ axis is active.
AZ/EL MONOPULSE ACTIVE Monopulse mode is actively tracking a target.
BOX LIMITS ACTIVE A Box Limit configuration is enabled in the RF Setup window,
which prevents travel outside of the defined box limit region.
CHARGING AZEL OPTRACK D The system is loading the indicated Optrack data table, where D is
CHARGING AZEL OPTRACK1 the Direct Mode table and 1 through 20 indicate a particular profile.
... Optrack operations are not available until the operation is
CHARGING AZEL OPTRACK20 complete.
CIRCULAR POL The POL mode is set for Circular polarization.
CLEARING AZEL OPTRACK D The system is deleting the indicated Optrack data table, where D is
CLEARING AZEL OPTRACK1 the Direct Mode table and 1 through 20 indicate a particular profile.
... Optrack operations are not available until the operation is
CLEARING AZEL OPTRACK20 complete.
COMP IN CONTROL - ACU The supervisory computer is in control of the system.
COMPUTER REQUEST The supervisory computer has issued a command to the ACU.
CONTROL CHANGE ALLOWED A change of control of the ACB is possible. The PMU, MCU, or
supervisory computer is allowed to take control of the system.
CORRECTS OFF NEAR ZENITH Pointing model corrections are no longer being applied due to the
high Elevation angle.
DATABASE BACKUPS OFF The automatic database backup feature, which periodically stores
database changes to internal storage, has been turned off. This
feature is controlled from the Utility > Database Utility window.
EL ENABLED The EL axis is enabled.
ERROR LHCP The Error Channel switch is set to Left-Hand Circular Polarization
(LHCP).
ERROR PRIMARY LNA The RF path for the Error signal is using its primary LNA.
ERROR RHCP The Error Channel switch is set to Right-Hand Circular Polarization
(RHCP).
INTELSAT COEFFS AVAILABLE One or more valid Intelsat sets are loaded into memory.
INTELSAT DATA DATED The Intelsat data in use is more than 7 days old. Intelsat
parameters are normally updated at least weekly, and the
parameters should be loaded as often as available to maintain
optimum performance.
INTELSAT DATA EARLY The present time is before the epoch time of the Intelsat data in
use. Therefore, the data is not yet valid. Better performance is
available with data valid for the current time.
LINEAR POL The POL mode is set for Linear polarization.
MCU AVAILABLE The MCU is powered ON.
NORAD PASSED STOP TIME In NORAD Track mode, the current time is after the specified stop
time.
NORAD WAIT FOR START TIME In NORAD Track mode, the current time is before the specified
start time.
NORMAL CONTROL - ACU The ACU is in control of the antenna.
NTP TIME AVAILABLE NTP time is being received by the system.
NTP TIME NOT AVAILABLE NTP time is not being received by the system.
OBJECT BELOW EL TRAVEL In NORAD Track mode, the target is currently below the allowable
EL software travel limits.
OPTRACK D 12HOURS GOOD 12 hours of Optrack data is available in the indicated data table,
OPTRACK1 12HOURS GOOD where D is the Direct Mode table and 1 through 20 indicate a
... particular profile. Optrack can now predict the ephemeris for up to
OPTRACK20 12HOURS GOOD 24 hours with sufficient accuracy to provide immediate
reacquisition.
OPTRACK D 24HOURS GOOD 24 hours of valid Optrack data is available in the indicated data
OPTRACK1 24HOURS GOOD table, where D is the Direct Mode table and 1 through 20 indicate a
... particular profile. Extended tracking outages will not prevent
OPTRACK20 24HOURS GOOD continued ephemeris prediction. Full Optrack performance is now
in effect.
OPTRACK D COEFS AVAIL Valid Optrack data exists for the data set in use by Optrack, where
OPTRACK1 COEFS AVAIL D is the Direct Mode table and 1 through 20 indicate a particular
... profile. An ephemeris is available for immediate tracking. Optrack
OPTRACK20 COEFS AVAIL will continue pointing for extended periods of time if an RF outage
occurs.
OPTRACK D DATA OLD The indicated Optrack data table does not have recent tracking
OPTRACK1 DATA OLD data, where D is the Direct Mode table and 1 through 20 indicate a
... particular profile. The meaning of “recent” data depends on the
OPTRACK20 DATA OLD amount of data in the Optrack table, but the minimum time before
this message occurs is two days. Typically the data must be closer
to one week old. The accuracy of the predictions degrades rapidly
after this time, so full performance is not available until more
tracking data can be gathered.
PHASING COMPLETE Autophase has completed its sequence.
PMU IN CONTROL - ACU The PMU is in control of the axes.
PMU LINK DOWN Connection is lost between the PMU and ACB. Check the cabling.
PMU PLUGGED IN The PMU is plugged into the PMU connector bracket on the side of
the PDU or into one of the optional PMU J-Boxes located around
the antenna.
POL ENABLED The POL axis is active.
SLOT LIMITS ACTIVE A Slot Limit configuration is enabled in the RF Setup window,
which prevents travel outside of the defined slot limit region.
STAR BELOW EL TRAVEL In Star Track mode, the star is currently not in the allowable EL
axis travel range.
SUM 1 PRIMARY LNA The indicated RF path for the Sum signal is using its primary LNA.
SUM 2 PRIMARY LNA
SUM HORZ/LHCP The Tracking POL Select switch for the Sum channel is set to
Horizontal (for linear polarization) or Left-Hand Circular
Polarization (for circular polarization).
SUM VERT/RHCP The Tracking POL Select switch for the Sum channel is set to
Vertical (for linear polarization) or Right-Hand Circular Polarization
(for circular polarization).
TARGET BELOW HORIZON In NORAD Track, Star Track, or Sun Track mode, the target is
currently below 0° Elevation.
TRU AUTOPHASE ERROR An error occurred in the TRU while the system was autophasing.
Autophase errors can be caused by a system track fault, a sine
wave was not seen in the monopulse error signals while collecting
phasing data, or the zero crossings in the data collected with the
minimum autophase algorithm are not 180° ± 15° apart.
TRU IN CONTROL The 2RU version of a TRU is being used. The front panel of the
2RU has displays and controls that let the operator set it to Local
or Remote. This status message indicates the TRU has been set
to Local, where the operator uses the TRU's front panel to control
the unit (as opposed to the Remote setting where the ACB controls
the TRU).
This status message does not apply to a 4RU version, which does
not have any controls on its front panel. The 4RU is always set to
Remote.
UNACQUIRABLE SIGNAL The received signal strength is not strong enough to allow
Steptrack operation. This can be set in units of dB by the Acquire
Threshold parameter in the RF window.
WARNING HORN ACTIVE The movement warning horn is sounding. After approximately
5 seconds, the axes will enable. The horn delay time is set on the
Setup > System Options window.
Section 8 - Troubleshooting and Maintenance : Fault Messages
SECTION 8 - TROUBLESHOOTING AND MAINTENANCE
8.1 Fault Messages
Fault messages appear in the Faults window that is always displayed on the right side of the
ACU screen. These messages are the primary source of information about problems or errors
with the system. Some faults may disable one or more antenna axes, while other faults are non-
disabling to indicate a problem but allow the system to continue operating.
The following table lists the fault messages that may appear and provides corrective actions that
can help clear the fault.
NOTE
Not all fault messages apply to all systems. For example, systems
without POL do not receive POL-related faults. Portions of fault
descriptions that include "brakes are set" do not apply to systems
without brakes.
Fault Message Description and Corrective Action
ACB FAULT (DSER HOT) Description: One or more digital input serializers on the ACB are
reporting an over-temperature condition.
Corrective Action: Replace the ACB.
ACB SOFTWARE ERROR Description: Internal software error.

Corrective Action: Cycle power for both the ACU and PDU. If the
error persists, contact GDST for assistance.
ACU STOP SWITCH Description: Although the ACU does not have a Stop switch, this
message will appear if jumper J31 on the ACB has been removed
or is not installed correctly.
Corrective Action: Verify J31 on the ACB is installed across both
pins. If the fault persists, replace the ACB or contact GDST for
assistance.
AZ BRAKE FAULT Description: The AZ axis is disabled. The status switch in the
brake did not close when the enable/brake command was issued
or the status switch on the brake was closed when the brake was
set.
Corrective Action: Check the wiring between the brake and the
ACB according to the System Schematic, and verify there are no
loose connections. If the problem is not corrected:
 Check the switch inside the brake to verify the switch is not
loose.
 Check the relay inside the PDU to verify it is switching
properly.
 Replace the brake.
 Replace the ACB.
 Contact GDST for assistance.
AZ CCW BOX LIMIT Description: In a Box Limit configuration, all motors were disabled
immediately after the antenna crossed the box’s width limits in the
CCW direction. Box limits are defined by the AZ/EL Box Center
and Box Width/Height parameters in the RF Setup window, and
the AZ (XEL) box width is secant-corrected using the current
Elevation. Typically, the PMU or MCU was used to cross the limit,
but this fault can occur if the ACU commanded a position close to
the limit and the antenna’s natural “overshoot” crossed the limit.
Corrective Action: Use the RF Setup window to disable the box
limits, which clears the fault. Then use the PMU, MCU, or ACU to
move the antenna back within the limits. If necessary, you can then
re-enable the box limits or change them.
AZ CCW FINAL LIMIT Description: The brakes are set and the axis is disabled. The axis
traveled in the CCW direction far enough to encounter the final
hardware switch.
Corrective Action: This fault should never occur because the
prelimit switch fault is set to occur before this final limit. But if it
does occur:
 Use the handcrank on the AZ motor to manually back the axis
away from the final limit switch and inside the prelimit switch.
 Determine why the antenna encountered the final limit to
prevent it from recurring. Check Setup > Position > Travel
Limit to ensure the software limits are set correctly, and check
Setup > Position > Encoder Offset to verify the Offset
parameters.
 Check the prelimit switch to determine why the antenna
passed it.
AZ CCW PRELIMIT Description: The axis traveled in the CCW direction far enough to
encounter the prelimit hardware switch. The brakes are applied
and the axis is disabled.
Corrective Action:
 Use the PMU, MCU, or Manual Rate point mode on the ACU
to back out of the prelimit manually. (Other ACU point modes
cannot back out of a prelimit.) With the PMU or MCU, depress
and continue to hold down the axis Enable button while
driving the antenna in the CW direction until the limit switch is
cleared.
 Determine why the antenna encountered the prelimit to
Limit to ensure the software limits are set correctly. (If driving
the antenna from the PMU or MCU, the software limits are not
disabling.) Also check Setup > Position > Encoder Offset to
verify the Offset parameters.
AZ CCW SOFTWARE LIMIT Description: The AZ motors are not disabled. The antenna has
moved beyond the AZ CCW software limit set on the Setup >
Position > Travel Limit window. The PMU or MCU can continue to
move the antenna outside the software limits until it crosses a box
or slot limit or encounters a hardware switch. (The ACU cannot
command the antenna to move to a position outside the software
limits. However, this fault may occur if the ACU commanded a
position close to the limit and the antenna’s natural “overshoot”
crossed the limit.)
Correction Action: Use the PMU, MCU, or ACU to move the
antenna back inside the travel limits.
AZ CW BOX LIMIT Description: In a Box Limit configuration, all motors were disabled
immediately after the antenna crossed the box’s width limits in the
CW direction. Box limits are defined by the AZ/EL Box Center and
Box Width/Height parameters in the RF Setup window, and the AZ
(XEL) box width is secant-corrected using the current Elevation.
Typically, the PMU or MCU was used to cross the limit, but this
fault can occur if the ACU commanded a position close to the limit
and the antenna’s natural “overshoot” crossed the limit.
AZ CW FINAL LIMIT Description: The brakes are set and the axis is disabled. The axis
traveled in the CW direction far enough to encounter the final
hardware switch.
does occur:
 Use the handcrank on the AZ motor to manually back the axis
parameters.
passed it.
AZ CW PRELIMIT Description: The axis traveled in the CW direction far enough to

Correction Action:
driving the antenna in the CCW direction until the limit switch
is cleared.
AZ CW SOFTWARE LIMIT Description: The AZ motors are not disabled. The antenna has
moved beyond the AZ CW software limit set on the Setup >
crossed the limit.)
AZ ENCODER FAULT Description: The AZ axis is disabled. The AZ encoder feedback

changed by too large a value.
Corrective Action: Execute the Stop mode, and then issue a valid
position command. If the fault persists:
 Check the System Schematic to confirm the encoder is wired
properly, and check for an intermittent encoder connection.
 Check for a faulty encoder.
 Check for incorrect software parameters on Setup > Position
> Encoder Offset, such as the encoder scale factor.
 Replace the encoder.
AZ FINE RESOLVER FAULT Description: The AZ axis is disabled. The AZ encoder feedback
 Check for a failure in any of the encoders.
 Check the System Schematic to confirm the resolver is wired
properly.
AZ HOUR ALERT Description: The AZ mechanical drive system is operating beyond

the number of hours specified for its next suggested maintenance.
This maintenance period is set on the Setup > Other > Hour Meter
window.
Corrective Action: Perform the AZ maintenance and reset the
Hour Meter window. Execute a mode to clear the fault message.
AZ IMMOBILE Description: The antenna is not moving or is moving very slowly.

Corrective Action:
 Command full speed from the ACU, PMU, or MCU, and verify
that the motor controller speed feedback on the controller's
display shows 50 or 60 Hz (depending on the motor).
 Verify the velocity of the antenna and enter that value as the
Maximum Velocity on the Setup > Position > Axis >
AZ Parameters window.
 Check encoder operation and verify that the encoder changes
position when the antenna is moving.
AZ MOTOR 3-PHASE OFF Description: The AZ motor is disabled, and 3-phase power to the
motor has been lost.
Corrective Action: Determine why the circuit breaker is turned
OFF (operator action, motor controller failure, circuit breaker
failure) and correct any problems. Then turn ON the circuit breaker.
AZ MOTOR CONTROL FAULT Description: The AZ motor controller has a fault.

Corrective Action: Inside the PDU, read the fault code from the
front panel of the motor controller. Refer to the Vendor Data for the
motor controller to troubleshoot this failure.
AZ MOTOR HANDCRANK Description: The AZ axis is disabled. The handcrank switch on

the AZ motor is open.
Corrective Action: Close the handcrank switch.
AZ RESOLVER CAL FAILED Description: The resolver calibration routine did not complete
successfully. This fault occurs if the Azimuth resolver is not
connected when power is turned on at the PDU.
Corrective Action: Cycle the power to the PDU. If the fault
persists, check the resolver wiring.
AZ RUNAWAY Description: The antenna is moving faster than the Maximum

Velocity entered on the Setup > Position > Axis > AZ Parameters
window.
Corrective Action:
 Verify the velocity of the antenna and enter that value on the
AZ Parameters window.
AZ TACH / ENCODER ERROR Description: The velocity of the encoder does not match the
motor velocity as read from the tachometers on the axis motors.
The margin value that activates this fault is set on the Utility >
Encoder Test window.
Typically, this fault does not occur unless the antenna is
commanded at full speed. Also, it occurs only during closed
position loop modes and not when the PMU or MCU is in control.
Corrective Action: Execute the Stop mode. Confirm the encoder
is not malfunctioning, confirm the margin value is set correctly, and
check for mechanical problems in the axis drive train.
AZ UNEXPECTED MOTION Description: The encoder is moving when the axis is disabled.
Corrective Action:
 Verify the motors are actually disabled.
 Verify the encoder couplings are not loose.
 Verify encoder operation.
AZ VARAC DRIVE LINK DOWN Description: The communication link between the AZ VARAC
drive and the ACB is down.
Corrective Action: Verify correct cabling to the motor controller,
and check the motor controller's configuration parameters
according to drawing 08-588-2500.
AZ VARAC DRIVE SETUP ERR Description: An error has been detected in the AZ VARAC drive
parameters.
Corrective Action: Cycle power at the PDU. If the message
persists, reset the drive parameters according to 08-588-2500 or
replace the drive.
AZ- ERROR THRESHOLD Description: In Monopulse mode, the error signal in the negative
(CCW) direction is larger than the AZ Error Threshold parameter
specified in the Track > Monopulse window.
Corrective Action: This fault may occur due to a noisy tracking
signal and should correct itself after the signal quiets down. If the
problem persists, check the monopulse phasing.
AZ+ ERROR THRESHOLD Description: In Monopulse mode, the error signal in the positive
(CW) direction is larger than the AZ Error Threshold parameter
BAD TRACK DATA POINT Description: In Steptrack mode, an estimate of target position is
poor due to high scintillation (noisy signal). The point is still used
unless the Data Point Rejection feature is turned on in the Track >
Steptrack window. This message can be used to indicate when
Data Point Rejection should be turned on or off.
Corrective Action: This fault clears automatically when the next
valid target position is estimated.
BDC 1 (2, 3, 4) FAULT Description: The indicated Block Down Converter for the current
RF path has failed. Tracking functionality is inhibited. For
Monopulse systems, the BDC is typically on the Monopulse RF
scanner plate; for Steptrack systems, the BDC is typically inside
the TRU.
Corrective Action: For a Monopulse scanner plate, refer to the
Top Level Assembly drawing to determine the part number for the
Monopulse plate and then locate the part number for the BDC.
Cycle power for the TRU. If the problem persists, replace the BDC
or the tracking receiver that contains the BDC.
CHECK 12V REF TO POL POT Description: The +12 V reference to the POL potentiometer is
reading outside the acceptable range of 10.8 V to 13.65 V.
Corrective Action: Monitor the DC voltage on the +12 V power
supply. Adjust the power supply voltage as needed. If the problem
persists, replace the power supply or the ACB. Contact GDST for
assistance.
CLI SOCK TASK ERROR Description: Internal software error.

CLI TASK ERROR Description: Internal software error.

CMND > REGION POL CCW Description: The POL motors are disabled. The system ignored
an illegal ACU position command that lies beyond the POL CCW
software limit (outside of the travel region). Software limits are set
on the Setup > Position > Travel Limit window. The PMU or MCU,
however, can move the antenna outside the software limits until it
crosses a box or slot limit or encounters a hardware switch.
Corrective Action: Execute a position that is within the POL travel
range.
CMND > REGION POL CW Description: The POL motors are disabled. The system ignored
an illegal ACU position command that lies beyond the POL CW
Corrective Action: Execute a position that is within the POL travel
range.
COLLECT STATUS TASK ERROR Description: Internal software error.

COMMAND > BOX AZ CCW Description: The AZ motors are disabled. In a Box Limit
configuration, the system ignored an illegal ACU position
command that lies beyond the box’s width limits in the CCW
direction. Box limits are defined by the AZ/EL Box Center and Box
Width/Height parameters in the RF Setup window, and the AZ
Corrective Action: Execute a command inside the box limits, or
disable or change the box limits.
COMMAND > BOX AZ CW Description: The AZ motors are disabled. In a Box Limit
command that lies beyond the box’s width limits in the CW
Width/Height parameters in the RF Setup window, and the AZ
COMMAND > BOX EL DOWN Description: The EL motors are disabled. In a Box Limit
command that lies beyond the box’s height limits in the DOWN
Width/Height parameters in the RF Setup window.
COMMAND > BOX EL UP Description: The EL motors are disabled. In a Box Limit
command that lies beyond the box’s height limits in the UP
COMMAND > REGION AZ CCW Description: All AZ motors are disabled. The system ignored an
illegal ACU position command that lies beyond the AZ CCW
Corrective Action: Execute a position that is within the AZ travel
range.
COMMAND > REGION AZ CW Description: All AZ motors are disabled. The system ignored an
illegal ACU position command that lies beyond the AZ CW
Corrective Action: Execute a position that is within the AZ travel
range.
COMMAND > REGION EL DOWN Description: All EL motors are disabled. The system ignored an
illegal ACU position command that lies beyond the EL DOWN
Corrective Action: Execute a position that is within the EL travel
range.
COMMAND > REGION EL UP Description: All EL motors are disabled. The system ignored an
illegal ACU position command that lies beyond the EL UP software
limit (outside of the travel region). Software limits are set on the
Setup > Position > Travel Limit window. The PMU or MCU,
Corrective Action: Execute a position that is within the EL travel
range.
COMMAND > SLOT LAT- Description: All motors are disabled. In a Slot Limit configuration,
the system ignored an illegal ACU position command that lies
beyond the slot’s latitude limits in the - direction. Slot limits are
defined by the Latitude/Longitude Box Center and Box
Corrective Action: Execute a command inside the slot limits, or
disable or change the slot limits.
COMMAND > SLOT LAT+ Description: All motors are disabled. In a Slot Limit configuration,
beyond the slot’s latitude limits in the + direction. Slot limits are
COMMAND > SLOT LON- Description: All motors are disabled. In a Slot Limit configuration,
beyond the slot’s longitude limits in the - direction. Slot limits are
COMMAND > SLOT LON+ Description: All motors are disabled. In a Slot Limit configuration,
beyond the slot’s longitude limits in the + direction. Slot limits are
CONFIGURATION FILE CHANGE Description: One of the ACB setup files has been altered.
Corrective Action: Contact GDST for assistance.
CONSOLE CLI COMM ERROR Description: Internal software error.

CP TASK ERROR Description: Internal software error.

DATABASE TASK ERROR Description: Internal software error.

DB BACKUP TASK ERROR Description: Contact GDST for assistance with correcting this
fault.
Corrective Action: If an immediate correction is necessary, cycle
power for both the ACU and PDU.
DISABLE AZ KEY DEPRESSED Description: The AZ axis was disabled from the AZ axis status
box in the upper-left corner of the ACU screen.
Corrective Action: Determine why the axis was disabled and
resolve any issues. If no emergency condition exists, press the
Enabled/Disabled button in the AZ axis status box.
DISABLE EL KEY DEPRESSED Description: The EL axis was disabled from the EL axis status
Enabled/Disabled button in the EL axis status box.
DISABLE POL KEY DEPRESSED Description: The POL axis was disabled from the POL axis status
Enabled/Disabled button in the POL axis status box. (You may
need to press the third status box to cycle between LAT/LON and
POL.)
DUAL CLI TASK ERROR Description: Internal software error.

EL BRAKE FAULT Description: The EL axis is disabled. The status switch in the
set.
loose.
properly.
EL DOWN BOX LIMIT Description: In a Box Limit configuration, all motors were disabled
immediately after the antenna crossed the box’s height limits in the
DOWN direction. Box limits are defined by the AZ/EL Box Center
and Box Width/Height parameters in the RF Setup window.
EL DOWN LIMIT Description: The brakes are set and the axis is disabled. The axis
traveled in the DOWN direction far enough to encounter the final
hardware switch.
does occur:
 Use a handcrank to manually back the axis away from the
final limit switch and inside the prelimit switch.
parameters.
passed it.
EL DOWN PRELIMIT Description: The axis traveled in the DOWN direction far enough
to encounter the prelimit hardware switch. The brakes are applied
Correction Action:
driving the antenna in the UP direction until the limit switch is
cleared.
EL DOWN SOFTWARE LIMIT Description: The EL motors are not disabled. The antenna has
moved beyond the EL DOWN software limit set on the Setup >
crossed the limit.)
EL ENCODER FAULT Description: The EL axis is disabled. The EL encoder feedback

 Check the System Schematic to confirm the encoder is wired
properly.
 Check for an intermittent encoder connection.
 Check for a faulty encoder.
 Check for incorrect software parameters on Setup > Position
> Encoder Offset, such as the encoder scale factor.
EL FINE RESOLVER FAULT Description: The EL axis is disabled. The EL encoder feedback
 Check for a failure in any of the encoders.
 Check the System Schematic to confirm the resolver is wired
properly.
EL HOUR ALERT Description: The EL mechanical drive system is operating beyond

the number of hours specified for its next suggested maintenance.
This maintenance period is set on the Setup > Other > Hour Meter
window.
Corrective Action: Perform the EL maintenance and reset the
Hour Meter window. Execute a mode to clear the fault message.
EL IMMOBILE Description: The antenna is not moving or is moving very slowly.

Corrective Action:
 Verify the velocity of the antenna and enter that value as the
Maximum Velocity on the Setup > Position > Axis >
EL Parameters window.
 Check encoder operation and verify that the encoder changes
position when the antenna is moving.
EL MOTOR 3-PHASE OFF Description: The EL motor is disabled, and 3-phase power to the
motor has been lost.
Corrective Action: Determine why the circuit breaker is turned
OFF (operator action, motor controller failure, circuit breaker
failure) and correct any problems. Then turn ON the circuit breaker.
EL MOTOR CONTROL FAULT Description: The EL motor controller has a fault.

Corrective Action: Inside the PDU, read the fault code from the
front panel of the motor controller. Refer to the Vendor Data for the
motor controller to troubleshoot this failure.
EL MOTOR HANDCRANK Description: The EL axis is disabled. The handcrank switch on

the EL motor is open.
Corrective Action: Close the handcrank switch.
EL RESOLVER CAL FAILED Description: The resolver calibration routine did not complete
successfully. This fault occurs if the Elevation resolver is not
connected when power is turned on at the PDU.
EL RUNAWAY Description: The antenna is moving faster than the Maximum

Velocity entered on the Setup > Position > Axis > EL Parameters
window.
Corrective Action:
 Verify the velocity of the antenna and enter that value on the
EL Parameters window.
EL TACH / ENCODER ERROR Description: The velocity of the encoder does not match the
motor velocity as read from the tachometers on the axis motors.
The margin value that activates this fault is set on the Utility >
Encoder Test window.
Typically, this fault does not occur unless the antenna is
commanded at full speed. Also, it occurs only during closed
position loop modes and not when the PMU or MCU is in control.
Corrective Action: Execute the Stop mode. Confirm the encoder
is not malfunctioning, confirm the margin value is set correctly, and
check for mechanical problems in the axis drive train.
EL UNEXPECTED MOTION Description: The encoder is moving when the axis is disabled.
Corrective Action:
 Verify the motors are actually disabled.
 Verify the encoder couplings are not loose.
 Verify encoder operation.
EL UP BOX LIMIT Description: In a Box Limit configuration, all motors were disabled
immediately after the antenna crossed the box’s height limits in the
UP direction. Box limits are defined by the AZ/EL Box Center and
Box Width/Height parameters in the RF Setup window. Typically,
the PMU or MCU was used to cross the limit, but this fault can
occur if the ACU commanded a position close to the limit and the
antenna’s natural “overshoot” crossed the limit.
EL UP LIMIT Description: The brakes are set and the axis is disabled. The axis
traveled in the UP direction far enough to encounter the final
hardware switch.
does occur:
 Use the handcrank on the EL motor to manually back the axis
parameters.
passed it.
EL UP PRELIMIT Description: The axis traveled in the UP direction far enough to

Correction Action:
driving the antenna in the DOWN direction until the limit
switch is cleared.
EL UP SOFTWARE LIMIT Description: The EL motors are not disabled. The antenna has
moved beyond the EL UP software limit set on the Setup >
crossed the limit.)
EL VARAC DRIVE LINK DOWN Description: The communication link between the EL VARAC
drive and the ACB is down.
Corrective Action: Verify correct cabling to the motor controller,
and check the motor controller's configuration parameters
according to drawing 08-588-2500.
EL VARAC DRIVE SETUP ERR Description: An error has been detected in the EL VARAC drive
parameters.
Corrective Action: Cycle power at the PDU. If the message
persists, reset the drive parameters according to 08-588-2500 or
replace the drive.
EL- ERROR THRESHOLD Description: In Monopulse mode, the error signal in the negative
(DOWN) direction is larger than the EL Error Threshold parameter
EL+ ERROR THRESHOLD Description: In Monopulse mode, the error signal in the positive
(UP) direction is larger than the EL Error Threshold parameter
EMERGENCY STOP 1 Description: The E-Stop switch connected at the indicated

EMERGENCY STOP 2 location has been depressed. (The numbered locations depend on
your setup.)
Corrective Action: Correct the issue that caused someone to
depress the E-Stop, and then pull out the E-Stop switch to clear it.
ERROR LNA 1 FAULT Description: The indicated Error Channel LNA has reported a
ERROR LNA 2 FAULT fault.
Corrective Action: Verify power is being supplied to the unit.
EXECUTE STOP MODE Description: This informational message is typically shown

following certain fault messages. After the previously displayed
fault is cleared, the system needs to be reset to restore control.
Corrective Action: Execute the Stop mode, and then execute an
active mode to resume operation.
EXECUTE STOP MODE (SW) Description: This informational message occurs due to AZ/EL
runaway or immobile faults.
Corrective Action: Execute the Stop mode, and then execute an
active mode to resume operation.
FAN FAULT Description: The cooling fan inside the PDU has stopped working.
Corrective Action: Check the wiring to ensure the fan is getting
120 VAC single-phase and Neutral Voltages. If so, replace the fan
assembly or call GDST for assistance.
FPGA CONFIG MISMATCH Description: The FPGA has been loaded incorrectly. The interlock
logic between the main and redundant FPGAs does not match.
Corrective Action: If this occurs due to updating the FPGA
through the ACU:
 Retry loading the FPGA.
 Verify the updated version is correct on the USB drive.
 Contact GDST.
If this occurs without an apparent cause:
 Try loading the FPGA from the USB drive.
 Contact GDST.
FPGA TYPE FAULT Description: During an FPGA load sequence, the type of the
FPGA does not match the board in operation.
Corrective Action: Check that the correct file is being used to
update the FPGA. If the problem persists, contact GDST for
assistance.
INTERLOCK LOGIC MISMATCH Description: The outputs of the interlock logic for the main and
redundant FPGAs on the ACB do not agree.
Corrective Action: Cycle power to the PDU. If the problem
persists, contact GDST for assistance.
KEYPAD TASK ERROR Description: Internal software error.

LAN MAC ADDR ERROR Description: The MAC address for the Local Area Network is not
set.
LAT- SLOT LIMIT Description: In a Slot Limit configuration, all motors were disabled
immediately after the antenna crossed the slot’s latitude limits in
the - direction. Slot limits are defined by the Latitude/Longitude Box
Center and Box Width/Height parameters in the RF Setup window.
Corrective Action: Use the RF Setup window to disable the slot
re-enable the slot limits or change them.
LAT+ SLOT LIMIT Description: In a Slot Limit configuration, all motors were disabled
immediately after the antenna crossed the slot’s latitude limits in
the + direction. Slot limits are defined by the Latitude/Longitude
Box Center and Box Width/Height parameters in the RF Setup
window. Typically, the PMU or MCU was used to cross the limit,
LOAD SITE LOCATION Description: This fault does not disable any motors. All of the
following parameters are still set to their defaults: Latitude,
Longitude, Altitude, Dish Aperture (from Setup > Other > Site
Setup) and UTC Offset (from Setup > Other > Date Time). These
parameters must be defined accurately for your site to ensure that
many of the ACU’s automatic modes operate properly.
Corrective Action: Use the windows listed above to set the
parameters. Changing any one of the parameters will clear the
fault, but be sure to set all of them appropriately for your site.
LON- SLOT LIMIT Description: In a Slot Limit configuration, all motors were disabled
immediately after the antenna crossed the slot’s longitude limits in
the - direction. Slot limits are defined by the Latitude/Longitude Box
Center and Box Width/Height parameters in the RF Setup window.
LON+ SLOT LIMIT Description: In a Slot Limit configuration, all motors were disabled
immediately after the antenna crossed the slot’s longitude limits in
the + direction. Slot limits are defined by the Latitude/Longitude
Box Center and Box Width/Height parameters in the RF Setup
window. Typically, the PMU or MCU was used to cross the limit,
LOOP CLOSURE TASK ERROR Description: Internal software error.

LOW SIGNAL Description: The tracking signal strength is below the low signal
threshold setting. Tracking is inhibited until sufficient signal
strength is again available.
Corrective Action: Check the following possible causes:
 The tracking signal may not be scaled properly using the
Offset parameters on the RF window.
 The signal may be lost in the RF path (such as an LNA
failure).
 The satellite's transponder is turned off.
 The system may be switching from one target to another,
and no signal is available while the antenna is between
targets. If the fault does not clear when the new target
position is reached, corrective actions include scanning to
find the target, rechecking the predicted target position,
and verifying the tracking signal frequency and RF
configuration.
MACRO CLI COMM ERROR Description: Internal software error.

MODE TASK ERROR Description: Internal software error.

MONO PHASING FAULT TRU Description: The system was unable to successfully Autophase
the monopulse signals.
Corrective Action: Refer to the separate TRU O&M manual for
more information. If the message persists, contact GDST for
assistance.
MONOPULSE BANDWIDTH FAULT Description: In Monopulse mode, the receiver bandwidth is set to
the lowest available frequency on the RF window (such as 2.5 kHz
for an analog TRU or 1 kHz for a digital TRU). This lowest
bandwidth does not support monopulse. Tracking is inhibited.
Corrective Action: Select a higher bandwidth. Verify that the
receiver is in the Remote Control mode.
MOTOR OVERTEMP Description: Either the AZ or EL motor is disabled. A normally

closed temperature sensor is embedded in the internal winding in
the motor. If the motor reaches a temperature deemed hazardous,
the sensor contact opens and disables the motor.
Corrective Action: Check the motor temperature. Also, check the
System Schematic to confirm the motor is wired properly and look
for any mechanical interference. If the problem persists, replace
the motor.
OPTRACK D AZEL DATA ERROR Description: The indicated Optrack data table (where D is the
OPTRACK 1 AZEL DATA ERROR Direct Mode table and 1 through 20 indicate a particular profile) is
... unable to compute an accurate ephemeris, even though sufficient
OPTRACK 20 AZEL DATA ERROR data is available. This is normally caused by a change in time or
the site location.
Corrective Action: Clear the Optrack data and restart Optrack.
OPTRACK D TABLE ERROR Description: A bad data point was rejected by the indicated
OPTRACK 1 TABLE ERROR Optrack table, where D is the Direct Mode table and 1 through 20
... indicate a particular profile.
OPTRACK 20 TABLE ERROR
Corrective Action: This error clears when the next valid data point
is stored in the Optrack table. This is normally caused by a change
in time. If the time is changed significantly, clear the Optrack data
and restart Optrack. If the error persists, contact GDST for
assistance.
PDU EMERGENCY STOP Description: The E-Stop switch on the side of the PDU has been
depressed.
Corrective Action: Correct the issue that caused someone to
depress the E-Stop, and then pull out the E-Stop switch to clear it.
PLC FAULT Description: Internal software error.

PLC LINK DOWN Description: The system cannot communicate with the optional
ADAM module used to connect a third-party analog TRU for
Analog Input.
Corrective Action: Check the communication cables to the
module.
POL BRAKE FAULT Description: The POL axis is disabled. The status switch in the
set.
loose.
properly.
POL CCW LIMIT Description: The POL axis traveled in the CCW direction far
enough to encounter a hardware switch. If the system is configured
for manual prelimit backout, the axis will apply the brakes and
disable.
Correction Action: Use the PMU, MCU, or Manual Rate point
mode on the ACU to back out of the prelimit manually. (Other ACU
point modes cannot back out of a prelimit.) With the PMU or MCU,
depress and continue to hold down the axis Enable button while
driving the antenna in the CW direction until the limit switch is
cleared.
POL CCW SOFTWARE LIMIT Description: The POL motors are not disabled. The antenna has
moved beyond the POL CCW software limit set on the Setup >
crossed the limit.)
POL CW LIMIT Description: The POL axis traveled in the CW direction far
enough to encounter a hardware switch. If the system is configured
for manual prelimit backout, the axis will apply the brakes and
disable.
Correction Action: Use the PMU, MCU, or Manual Rate point
mode on the ACU to back out of the prelimit manually. (Other ACU
point modes cannot back out of a prelimit.) With the PMU or MCU,
depress and continue to hold down the axis Enable button while
driving the antenna in the CCW direction until the limit switch is
cleared.
POL CW SOFTWARE LIMIT Description: The POL motors are not disabled. The antenna has
moved beyond the POL CW software limit set on the Setup >
crossed the limit.)
POL MOTOR OVERLOAD Description: The POL drive motor has tripped due to current
overload.
Corrective Action: Press the blue button on K1 in the PDU to
reset the fault. If the fault persists, check the feed rotator for
mechanical binding.
POL RESOLVER CAL FAILED Description: The resolver calibration routine did not complete
successfully. This fault occurs if the POL resolver is not connected
when power is turned on at the PDU.
PROCESS INPUT TASK ERROR Description: Internal software error.

RCVR DATALINK DOWN Description: The link between the Receiver board and the ACB is
down or an error has been detected. The antenna remains
controllable, but signal feedback and faults/status information are
not available at the ACU.
Corrective Action: Check the receiver cabling according to the
System Schematic, and cycle power for both the ACU and PDU. If
the problem persists:
 Replace the Receiver board.
RCVR FAULT Description: Receiver is reporting a fault condition to the ACU.

problem persists, replace the Receiver or contact GDST for
assistance.
RE-CAL POL POT TO CENTER Description: The wiper voltage returned from the potentiometer
indicates the potentiometer’s current position is in the bottom or top
15% of the travel range.
Corrective Action: Mechanically realign the potentiometer so the
center of the potentiometer’s travel range is in the center of the
POL axis travel range.
REAL TIME CLOCK ERROR Description: No motors are disabled. The real-time clock circuit on
the ACB has failed. Time is not lost because the higher-priority
XCO clock is still functioning.
Corrective Action: Cycle power at the PDU. To set the real-time
clock, use Setup > Other > Date Time on the ACU. If the problem
persists, replace the ACB or contact GDST for assistance.
REAL TIME CLOCK STUCK Description: No motors are disabled. The real-time clock on the
ACB is stuck. Time is not lost because the higher-priority XCO
clock is still functioning.
Corrective Action: Cycle power at the PDU. If the problem
persists:
RTC DATE RANGE ERROR Description: The date and time read from the real-time clock is
before 1/1/1990 or after 12/31/2040.
Corrective Action: Use Setup > Other > Date Time to reset the
clock. If the problem persists, contact GDST for assistance.
SAFETY CIRCUIT FAULT Description: The ES Config (Relay) board did not pass its self-
check during bootup.
fault persists, replace the ES Config board or contact GDST for
assistance.
SIMULATION ON - ACU Description: The ACU has been placed in Simulation mode.
Normal operation is not available.
Corrective Action: When ready to return to normal operation, use
Utility > Simulator > Simulator Main to turn off the Simulation
mode.
SIMULATION TASK ERROR Description: Internal software error.

SNMPD TASK ERROR Description: Internal software error.

TRU IF SYNTH UNLOCKED Description: The Intermediate Frequency Synthesizer is

unlocked.
Corrective Action: Cycle power for the PDU. If the condition
persists, attempt to clear the fault by re-entering the beacon
frequency.
TRU RECEIVER UNLOCKED Description: No signal is present within the detection window of
the entered beacon frequency. The detection window refers to the
Sweep Width setting in the RF window or TRU (typically 120 kHz).
The TRU searches for a signal at the beacon frequency plus or
minus the Sweep Width. Refer to the separate TRU manual for
more information.
Corrective Action: Move the antenna to the location of the signal.
Select a beacon frequency with a valid signal.
TRU RF SYNTH UNLOCKED Description: The Radio Frequency Synthesizer is unlocked.

Corrective Action: Cycle power for the PDU. If the condition
persists, attempt to clear the fault by re-entering the beacon
frequency.
TRU TRACK FAULT ACTIVE Description: The TRU has detected an error that makes it unable
to track.
Corrective Action: Verify that a signal is present at the RF input,
and verify that the unit is operating within its operational
temperature range. If the problem persists, contact GDST for
assistance.
WAN MAC ADDR ERROR Description: The MAC address for the Wide Area Network is not
set.
XCO TIMER ERROR Description: No motors are disabled. The XCO (crystal controlled
oscillator) clock circuit on the ACB has failed. Time is not lost
because the lower-priority real-time clock takes over timing/clock
duties. This error is relevant only for systems that rely on the time-
keeping properties of the precise crystal.
Corrective Action: Replace the ACB.
Section 8 - Troubleshooting and Maintenance : General Troubleshooting Guide
8.2 General Troubleshooting Guide
This guide lists problems from most likely to least likely. However, common sense should dictate
performing some steps before others. For example, it is much easier to replace wiring than
replace a motor.
Problem Possible Cause Corrective Action
Motor Controller Motor controller faults can occur for a Refer to the Vendor Data for the motor
Faults variety of reasons. Observe the LCD controller and determine the fault mode.
display on the motor controller to identify
the fault mode.
Encoder Faults or Encoder coupling is defective or loose. Repair as necessary.

Tach / Encoder
Errors Encoder is not mounted correctly. Repair as necessary.
Encoder cabling is defective. Verify continuity and shorts between

conductors, correct and replace as
necessary.
Encoder is defective.  Verify voltages at the power supply.

 Refer to O&M instructions for where
to verify voltage.
 Can also swap encoder with spare
unit to speed up troubleshooting.
ACB is defective. Likely R/D chip is defective.
Antenna Off Signal ACU console has incorrect settings. Verify that all offsets are zero and that no
Peak information has been entered
erroneously (such as dish diameter and
beacon frequency).
In a Point mode such as Intelsat Track or
NORAD Track, verify the data is current
and the site, date, and time are set
correctly.
Signal input is saturated.  Ensure that signal input to TRU is

between the limits specified on the
TRU's datasheet. Attenuate as
required.
 Adjust signal offset parameter at
ACU to match 0 dBm to signal peak.
Antenna velocities are set incorrectly. Verify by timing with a stopwatch and
adjusting the max velocity parameter if
necessary.
Mechanical problems exist. Encoder windup, antenna backlash.

Refer to the Site Acceptance Test
Procedure.
All Faults Displayed Usually indicates that +24 V is shorted Refer to the System Schematic and PDU
On Screen at the to ground through one or more normally Schematic in the Drawings and Parts List
Same Time closed switches (E-Stop switches, travel section of this manual.
limit switches, etc.). There is protection
that does not allow a direct short.  Locate the faulty switch.
Sequentially disconnect and
reconnect +24 VDC to each switch.
When a switch is disconnected:
 If all faults are still present, that
switch is not causing the
problem. Reconnect the switch.
 If only the fault message
associated with that switch is
still present, that switch is short-
circuited.
 Repair or replace the faulty switch.
Antenna Will Not May stem from a variety of sources.  Verify no axis-disabling fault is
Move In One Or
prohibiting movement. If a fault
Both Axes
exists, trace it down and repair the
wiring or replace the switch if
necessary.
 Verify brakes are truly releasing by
monitoring command and status. If
not, verify wiring and make
adjustments as required.
 Verify the unit used to control
antenna is not defective by trying to
move with another unit. For
example, if the antenna is not
moving correctly while under control
of the PMU, transfer control to the
MCU and try again.
 Verify commands are getting to the
motor controllers by tracing enable
path through the ACB. If necessary,
replace one or both of these boards.
If the commands are getting to the
motor controller, replace it if
necessary.
Antenna Will Not May stem from a variety of sources.  Check the axis loop parameters.
Stop Oscillating
Verify DeadBand is not set to 0.
Around the Target
Verify the Maximum Velocity is
accurate by driving the antenna at
full rate and recording the time
travelled with a stopwatch.
 Verify the active RF frequency is the
actual satellite beacon frequency.
ACU-ACB Link May be caused by multiple sources.  Verify cable integrity between the
Down
ACU and ACB by checking for
continuity and shorts between wires.
 For fiber-optic data links, verify the
integrity of fiber-optic cable with a
Time Domain Reflectometer (TDR)
or flashlight.
 Verify connectors are plugged into
correct ports per system schematic.
 Verify the switch has power and is
working properly.
 Verify fiber-optic modems are
functioning.
 Verify board configuration in ACU
and ACB. Verify ACU first because it
would be most likely changed.
 Replace ACU.
 Replace ACB.
ACU-TRU Link Press Monitor > System >Tracking  Address this problem in the same
Down Receiver or Setup > Hardware > TRU manner as ACU-ACB link problems
to view detailed TRU information such (cable wiring, bit rate and parity
as power supply voltages, synthesizer parameters, board configurations,
lock statuses, and VCO status. correct connections, defective
boards).
 Reassign the TRU IP address back
to the factory default setting of
10.165.50.200. Wait 1 minute after
making this change and then cycle
power.
TRU Signal Level RF path has a problem.  Ensure the input signal to the TRU is
between the limits specified on the
TRU's datasheet. Verify the signal is
a true beacon signal by observing it
with a spectrum display.
 Verify that the frequency is correct.
Frequency Can’t Be ACU-TRU link is down or not working  For internal TRU systems, check the
Set From ACU correctly, or the band table is not set up. Ethernet cable between the TRU
and ACB.
 For external TRU systems, verify the
unit is in Remote mode and the data
link is working. (The unit has to be
put into Remote via its front panel.)
 Verify the Setup > Hardware >
Band Table window is set properly
on the ACU.
Internal Faults TRU phase lock loops. Ensure the block down converter is tuned
Present (VCO Near correctly (not near end of frequency
Limit, PLL Near range for VCO and PLL).
Limit)
Power Supply Internal TRU power supply has a Verify voltages with a digital voltmeter. If
Faults problem. voltages are correct at power supply
output, they should be traced through the
receiver up to the multiplexer. If the
problem is there, replace the TRU.
Otherwise, replace the power supply or
voltage regulator.
Safety Circuit Fault The 24 V used for all interfaces on the  Be sure to turn on CB12 before CB1.
I/O board is not being observed during CB12 is the breaker for 24 V power.
ACB boot. CB1 is the breaker for 5V, +12 V,
and -12 V. The ACB boots with CB1.
The absence of 24 V power during
the ACB boot causes the safety
circuit fault because the ACB cannot
observe 24 V if CB12 is not passing
24 V.
 Verify the 24 V power supply is
functional and is within 10%
tolerance.
 Verify the antenna is not in a limit
state. If it is, handcrank the antenna
to a position where the limit faults are
cleared.
 Verify that jumpers are present on
the I/O board for optional features
that are not being used. For
example, if only final limits are used,
place a jumper for prelimits.
 If all else fails, replace the ACB
enclosure.
Runaway Fault May be caused by multiple sources.  Check the axis loop parameters.
Message when
Verify the Maximum Velocity is
Operating at Track
Velocity accurate by driving the antenna at
full rate and recording the time
travelled with a stopwatch.
 Increase Track Velocity in 5%
increments. At very low track
frequencies (less than 5 Hz
typically), motors may have trouble
moving the antenna at the expected
velocity. An increased track
frequency from the VFD to the motor
can resolve this issue.
During Monopulse A low signal-to-noise ratio can cause a  Use Setup > Hardware >
Tracking, Error noisy monopulse signal. Excessive axis Monopulse > Mono Filter to enable
Signal is movement can be caused when the
Excessively Noisy the low-pass monopulse filter.
system tracks this noise.
or There is  Adjust the Dead Band and/or
Excessive Axis
Hysteresis parameters in the Setup
Movement
> Position > Axis windows for AZ
and EL.
Autophase A non-ideal feed may have some Use Setup > Hardware > Monopulse >
Produces degree of cross-coupling. Autophase Algorithm to switch to the
Unsatisfactory Min algorithm. (Max is recommended in
Tracking Results
most cases.)
Latitude/Longitude The LAT/LON box on the ACU screen Note: If the system is set up to support
Coordinates are represents the pointing angle of the linear polarization, press the box to
Moving antenna, not the location of the antenna toggle between LAT/LON and the
on the earth. polarization angle.
8.2.1 Troubleshooting Test and Safety
Test And Safety The Field Test procedure has many  Verify PMU with their specific tests.
Issues tests that can be used to troubleshoot
problems in the system.  Perform fault and status testing by
using the fault and status sections in
the test procedure.
 Find problems in the structure,
motors, and/or gearboxes by
performing the current test and
comparing the results against
previous data.
 Verify limits and limit switches by
performing the limits test.
8.2.2 Troubleshooting Motion Issues
Most motion problems are indicated by various faults messages. Be sure to address any faults
that prevent motion, such as limit switches. Motion performance problems can be complex
because several different areas may be involved. Troubleshoot the following:
 Encoder performance
 Are the encoders providing correct feedback?
 Does the encoder correctly represent the location of the RF beam?
 Refer to the encoder wind-up test in the Site Acceptance Test Procedure.
 Mechanical wear and appropriate installation

 Refer to the separate antenna documentation.
 Incorrect parameters
 Refer to Section 4.16.5, Axis Parameters, regarding parameter settings and
adjustments needed to achieve the precision motions needed for tracking.
 Safety limits
 Refer to Section 2.13, Set the AZ and EL Hardware Limits, and Section 4.16.3,
Travel Limit.
 Component failures
 Motor controller and ACB failures are quite rare, but they can prevent motion or
cause motion problems.
8.2.3 Troubleshooting Tracking Issues
Tracking problems are normally due to:
 Motion control problems
 Encoder feedback problems
 RF signal issues
Motion control and encoder feedback tests are discussed in Section 8.2.2, Troubleshooting
Motion Issues. If the antenna does not position correctly, tracking will not optimize the signal.
Similarly, if the encoder does not correctly report the position, the algorithm cannot align the
encoder position to the signal strength, resulting in tracking problems. Perform motion tests and
encoder wind-up tests to determine if the system is working correctly. Also try both Optrack and
Steptrack modes. If Steptrack works well but Optrack does not, the encoder may not be
reporting the antenna position correctly.
The most common RF signal issues are configuration errors. If the RF signal is too low but still
recognized as a valid level, the system will attempt to track on noise. This creates random
results. If the signal level is too high and saturates the input, the system will appear to track but
the input data is invalid and constant. Troubleshoot to determine if the signal is valid.
Other unlikely examples of signal problems include:
 The signal modulation is incompatible with the tracking receiver.
 The signal is out-of-bounds of the frequency search window.
 The RF signal is being jammed from terrestrial sources.
While all possibilities cannot be listed, these examples provide several starting points for RF
signal issues. If these items are carefully checked and the problems persist, contact GDST.
To summarize, tracking requires:
 The antenna to make precise, predictable small motions
 The RF signal level to change in relation to these motions (and not other factors)
 The encoder to report the motions accurately
When tracking issues arise, test each of these fundamental requirements to help resolve the
problem.
Section 8 - Troubleshooting and Maintenance : Component Troubleshooting
8.3 Component Troubleshooting
This section describes troubleshooting and repair for each major system component. For all
systems units, verification of performance may be done through the Site Acceptance Test
Procedure by re-running the appropriate section and verifying results with previous data.
8.3.1 ACU
The ACU is not a field-serviceable unit. In case of failure, verify that power is supplied to the unit
before returning it to the vendor for repair.
8.3.2 PDU
8.3.2.1 ACB Troubleshooting
1. Check that all connectors are installed correctly, the compact flash card is seated firmly,
and the board is powered up.
2. Check voltages on the board for proper levels. Test points are available to ease
measurement. Red test points (5 total) are onboard voltages and should match the
voltage labeled on the board. Black test points (14 total) are Ground. White test points
provide easy access to various signals. Refer to the ACB Schematic for more information
on white test point functions.
3. If any voltages are low, check the power supply and replace if necessary. All the power
supplies have a potentiometer that can adjust the voltages as necessary. If the power
supply is operating fine, check the state of the onboard fuses; check for a short on one of
the onboard power rails and correct as necessary. If no short exists, replace the board.
8.3.2.2 ACB Replacement
The ACB is a multi-layer board that uses high-density surface-mount components and typically
cannot be repaired in the field. If an issue is discovered, replace the board with a new unit and
return the defective board to the factory for repair or replacement.
To replace the board:
1. Remove power from the board by turning off the Logic Power Circuit Breaker.
2. Disconnect the cables going to the ACB.
3. Remove the screws holding the ACB to the panel, and remove the ACB.
4. Remove the compact flash card containing the software from the old board and insert it
into the new board. This transfers the software and the configuration and database
parameters to the new board.
5. To replace the ACB, reverse the above procedure.
6. After replacing the ACB, use Setup > Other > Date Time to set the date and time to the
proper values.
8.3.2.3 Motor Controller Troubleshooting
Each motor controller supplied by GDST has an LCD to indicate the state of the controllers. All
manufacturer’s data is located in the Vendor Data section. Only generic problems are discussed
below. The Vendor Data supersedes any of the following instructions; always refer to the
Vendor Data before beginning repairs or troubleshooting.
The Drive Amplifiers used in the PDU are not field repairable and should be replaced with a
pretested spare unit from GDST. The amplifiers are programmed, configured, adjusted, and
tested in the factory. Any changes to switch settings or adjustments could lead to axis instability
or damage to the drives, motors or other system components. If adjustments are required,
please contact GDST.
WARNING
 MOTOR CONTROLLERS CONTAIN AC 3-PHASE AND DC
VOLTAGES THAT ARE POWERFUL ENOUGH TO KILL!
PROCEED WITH CAUTION.
 LETHAL VOLTAGES ARE PRESENT ON THIS AMPLIFIER.

REMOVE POWER FROM AMP AND ALLOW 5 MINUTES
FOR THE DC BUS TO DISCHARGE. VERIFY DISCHARGE
WITH A DVM AT THE ARMATURE OUTPUT TERMINALS
BEFORE SERVICING.
1. Verify that power is supplied at the motor controller by checking circuit breaker status.
2. Verify that any internal fuses have not blown.
3. Isolate any fault indicated by the LCD display.
4. Before replacing motor controller fuses, isolate the problem that led to the blown fuse.
As with any system of this magnitude, external problems can be masked by an
occasional blown fuse.
5. For other problems not listed, consult the manufacturer’s information in the Vendor Data
section.
8.3.2.4 Motor Controller Repair/Replacement
1. Remove power by turning OFF the respective disconnect for that controller.
NOTE
On some systems, motor controller disconnects may be locked in the
OFF position.
2. If antenna operation during this replacement procedure is not necessary, remove power
to the PDU.
3. Using a voltmeter, verify that three-phase power is absent at the controller.
4. Mark all wires, and disconnect.
5. Remove amp from the filter assembly (as required).
6. Replace with new amp, ensuring all hardware is replaced along with any ground straps
and capacitors.
7. Remount amp assembly.
8. Reconnect all wires as marked previously.
NOTE
Use extreme caution during this process since improper connection
could result in a motor runaway condition causing the antenna to
quickly drive off the satellite creating a service outage.
9. Apply power to the PDU, and verify no drive-associated faults are displayed at the ACU.
10. For dual motor per axis systems, turn OFF the on-axis motor not affected by the
replacement amplifier.
11. Connect the PMU to the PDU, and then transfer control to the PMU.
12. With the PMU in LO Rate mode and the Rate Control knobs centered, enable the
affected axis. Observe the axis for possible runaway. Slowly increase the rate command
in each direction to verify axis control and proper direction. Use caution to keep the
antenna from driving off target, causing service outage.
13. Disable the PMU, and execute the Stop mode.
14. Restore system to the normal mode of operation.
8.3.3 PMU and MCU
8.3.3.1 PMU and MCU Troubleshooting
Power No  Verify power at mating connector.

Indication  Verify proper mating of connectors.
?  Verify LED is functional.
Yes
Enabled No  Verify control has been passed to PMU / MCU.

Indication  Verify command to LED.
?  Verify LED is functional.
Yes
Active No  Verify command to switch.

Indication  Verify proper operation of membrane switch.
?  Verify proper operation of LED.
Yes
Axis
Fault
No  Verify power at mating connector.
Indication  Clear fault.
?
Yes
Axis No  Verify proper operation of membrane switch.

Enable  Verify there are no faults.
?
Yes
Rate No
Control  Verify rate potentiometer is operational.
?
Yes
Rate No
Selection  Verify proper operation of membrane switch.
?
Yes
Display
No  Verify proper operation of internal voltage regulator.
?  Clear proper operation of inputs to display.
Yes
PMU / MCU Fully Functional
All components in the PMU are designed for trouble-free operation. When not in use, keep the
PMU clean and store it in an environmentally controlled area. Take care when using the PMU
outdoors; prolonged exposure to sunlight, cold, and/or wet conditions is not advised.
NOTE
The most common problem with the PMU is leaving it outside in the
rain. The PMU is NOT waterproof and is designed to be stored
indoors.
When troubleshooting the PMU:
 Verify that the connection points are clean and dry.
 Verify no physical damage has occurred to the PMU.
 If power is present at the PMU but the link is not communicating, the ACB or the PMU
may be damaged. Verify that no shorts have occurred on the cables.
 Try a different PMU, if possible.
8.3.4 Position Transducer and Resolver, 1:1
The position transducer is comprised of a 1:1 resolver that provides position data through a
mechanical shaft coupling. The resolver follows all theoretical resolver operations with a
reference input signal of 4.4 VRMS (2000 Hz) and an output signal peak of 2.2 VRMS (±5%).
Friction torque must remain less than 2 oz-in.
8.3.4.1 Troubleshooting
If an encoder-related fault occurs, use the following steps to isolate the problem.
1. Execute the Stop mode.
2. Verify the encoder reference voltage is 4.4 VRMS, 2000 Hz at the reference
connector ACB.
3. Disconnect the encoder cable for the affected axis at the ACB (J13 AZ, J3 EL, J5 POL).
4. Measure the resistance of each encoder winding. This verifies both the cable and
encoder.
5. Using the System Schematic as a reference, measure the resistance of each winding
and measure each pin to each other pin and the connector back-shield to verify there
NO shorts in the cable or connectors. Each resolver winding will read ≈120 ohms, except
the reference will read ≈60 ohms because it is two windings in parallel. Most encoder
failures are the result of an open winding or bad connection.
 If an open encoder winding is found, replace the unit.
 If no problems are found above, attach a spare encoder to the affected axis cable
(without uncoupling or removing the suspected encoder) or to a test cable (to
eliminate the cable as the cause of the fault). Then slowly rotate the encoder shaft
through full travel (360° for AZ, 90° for EL) while observing the ACU readout. Ensure
the readout count is smooth with no jumps and no encoder faults displayed.
6. If the problem is still not found, connect the cable from the other axis at the ACB end
with the spare on the encoder end of this cable and rotate again through travel range. If
the problem is not found, this eliminates the cable as the cause.
7. Replace the ACB with a spare.
8. Verify proper operation and resolution of the fault using the spare encoder.
9. Monitor the sine and cosine output signals of each resolver at the ACB, ensuring the
signals follow their theoretical trigonometric relation. Ignoring the phase of the signals,
one signal's maximum magnitude should coincide with the other's minimum magnitude;
as one signal decreases in magnitude, the other increases.
The equations for the unit are:
ES1-S3 = KER1-R2 COS 

ES2-S4 = KER1-R2 SIN 
where EX-Y is the voltage measured at X referenced in the resolver angle. The signal ER1-R2
is referred to as the Sine output and appears across stator leads 2 and 4.
The Encoder Monitor screen at the ACU displays the resolver position in the angular and raw
binary format. This screen should be used to test the path of the Position Encoder feedback, not
the Position Encoder unit alone.
8.3.4.2 Encoder Replacement
The 1:1 encoder is a sealed assembly and is not a field-serviceable unit. When the unit is
replaced, Encoder Offset parameters at the ACU must be updated. The procedure for
replacement is as follows:
1. Drive the antenna to a known reference position and record the position.
2. Set the axis encoder offset to 0.000.
3. Remove the defective unit and replace with new unit.
4. With encoder coupling loosened at the antenna pickoff end, rotate coupling while
observing the encoder reading at the PMU or ACU display. It is recommended that the
encoder be adjusted to within one-half beamwidth of the reference position.
5. From the Encoder Offset screen (Setup > Position > Encoder Offset), adjust the offset
to the difference in the Position Encoder reading and the reference position.
6. Insert a USB drive into the USB port, and then use the Database Utility (Utility >
Database Utility) to archive the new offsets to the USB drive. Refer to Section 4.15.4,
Database Utility.
7. After the encoder scale factor and offsets are set, drive to the travel limits and set the
software limits to 0.1 degree within the travel range of the sector.
8.3.5 Optical Encoder
The optical encoder is a sealed assembly and is not a field-serviceable unit. In case of failure,
return the unit to the vendor for repair.
When the encoder data on the ACU locks up and does not respond to any antenna movement,
typically either the ACB or the encoder has failed. To troubleshoot the problem, swap the AZ
and EL encoders. If the failure swaps to the other axis, replace that encoder. Otherwise, the
problem is with the ACB.
8.3.5.1 Encoder Replacement
When the unit is replaced, Encoder Offset parameters at the ACU must be updated. The
procedure for replacement is as follows:
1. Drive the antenna to a known reference position and record the position.
2. Set the axis encoder offset to 0.000.
NOTE
To avoid damaging the unit, power should be removed before
connections are broken or made.
3. Remove the defective unit and replace with new unit.
4. With encoder coupling loosened at the antenna pickoff end, rotate coupling while
observing the encoder reading at the PMU or ACU display. It is recommended that the
encoder be adjusted to within one-half beamwidth of the reference position.
5. From the Encoder Offset screen (Setup > Position > Encoder Offset), adjust the offset
to the difference in the Position Encoder reading and the reference position.
6. Insert a USB drive into the USB port, and then use the Database Utility (Utility >
Database Utility) to archive the new offsets to the USB drive. Refer to Section 4.15.4,
Database Utility.
7. After the encoder scale factor and offsets are set, drive to the travel limits and set the
software limits to 0.1 degree within the travel range of the sector.
8.3.6 RF Scanner (Monopulse) Plate
If a component on the RF scanner plate fails and the L-Band signal to the TRU is lost, the fault
messages LOW SIGNAL and TRACK FAULT appear. If Monopulse mode is active when the
RF scanner plate fails, fault messages such as AZ AUTOTRACK RUNAWAY may also appear.
Refer to the Drawings and Parts List section in this manual for the RF scanner plate assembly
drawing, schematic, and test procedure.
1. Turn OFF power to the RF scanner plate.
2. Disconnect all power cables to the RF scanner plate, and use the proper RF torque
wrench (identified in the test procedure) to disconnect the RF cables.
3. Remove the mounting hardware and carefully remove the RF scanner plate.
4. Test the RF scanner plate according to the procedure provided. The test procedure
identifies the required test equipment and tools.
5. Replace any failed components only with those listed on the assembly drawing.
6. Upon successful test completion, reverse steps 1 through 3.
8.3.7 Emergency Stops
If an Emergency Stop switch fails, the fault message associated with the switch may not appear
when the switch is depressed. When the Emergency Stop switch is not depressed, +24 VDC is
routed from the PDU, through Normally Closed contacts, and back to the PDU. Depressing the
Emergency Stop switch will OPEN the return path and the fault message will report at the ACU.
Refer to the System Schematic and PDU Schematic in the Drawings and Parts List section in
this manual.
1. Using a digital voltmeter, verify +24 VDC is present at the PDU connection to the failed
switch.
2. Remove the cover from the Emergency Stop and verify +24 VDC is present at the
Common terminal.
3. With the Emergency Stop switch not depressed, verify +24 VDC is present at the
Normally Closed terminal.
4. Depress the Emergency Stop switch and verify +24 VDC is not present at the Normally
Closed terminal.
5. Pull the Emergency Stop switch and verify +24 VDC present is at the Normally Closed
terminal.
6. Verify +24 VDC is present at the PDU where the return path from the switch is
connected. If the return path connection is directly to the ACB and +24 VDC is present,
board-level troubleshooting is required. Refer to the drawing in the Drawings and Parts
List section.
CAUTION
Replace components only after removing power from the cabinet.
Opening the emergency switch circuit disables antenna motion.
7. Replace the component that failed in the previous steps and repeat the test.
8.3.8 Safety Switches
Limit switch hardware is provided with the antenna structure and is not described in this manual.
Refer to the manual for the antenna structure for more information.
8.3.8.1 Travel Limits
Travel limit switches route +24 VDC through normally CLOSED contacts when the antenna is
not in a limit condition. When the antenna is in a limit condition, the contacts should OPEN,
remove +24 VDC from the ACB, and report the appropriate fault message.
Refer to the System Schematic and PDU Schematic in the Drawings and Parts List section of
this manual.
1. With the antenna not in a limit condition, verify +24 VDC is connected to the limit switch.
If +24 VDC is not present at the input to the limit switch, verify cable continuity from the
PDU to the switch. Replace or repair the cable as required. At the ACB, verify the
+24 VDC source to the limit switch is present. Verify the continuity of the +24 VDC path
from the ACB to the I/O module and that +24 VDC is present at the output of the I/O
module. If +24 VDC is not measured at the ACB, troubleshoot the ACB. Refer to the
ACB schematic in the Drawings and Parts List section.
2. If +24 VDC is present at the input to the limit switch, verify +24 VDC is at the switch
output. If +24 VDC is not at the output, exercise the switch manually to confirm the
switch contacts will OPEN and CLOSE. If they will not, replace the switch. If the contacts
will OPEN and CLOSE, try adjusting the physical switch position using the Site
Acceptance Test Procedure.
3. Verify +24 VDC is present at the ACB for the appropriate axis and limit switch. If
+24 VDC is not present at the ACB but is at the output of the CLOSED switch, verify the
continuity of the path from the switch to the ACB. Replace or repair cable and
connections as required.
4. If +24 VDC is present at the ACB, remove +24 VDC for the suspect switch at a
convenient location to simulate the limit condition. Verify the appropriate fault message
is displayed at the ACU. If the message is not displayed, troubleshoot the ACB. Refer to
the ACB schematic in the Drawings and Parts List section.
Section 8 - Troubleshooting and Maintenance : System Software
8.4 System Software
If you have updated the system software for the ACU, ACB, TRB (tracking receiver board),
FPGA, or ACB Configuration and that update becomes corrupted, use the Utility > Upgrade
window to attempt to reload a previous version.
 Each time you use Software Upgrade to perform an upgrade, the system saves a copy
of the previous version. Use the Undo/Revert option to return to that previous version.
 Some items retain a copy of their factory-default database. Use the Reset Factory
option to see which items are available for reset.
If you have a problem with corrupted software, contact General Dynamics SATCOM
Technologies about getting a new copy of the software. If possible, use Monitor > System >
Software Version to find the current version number and date of your system software and
provide that information to GDST.
For details about reloading or upgrading software, refer to Section 4.15.2.
8.5 Regular Maintenance
Component Description Maintenance Period
PDU Inspect the ACB for loose connections Once per year
between the PDU chassis and the other
boards that communicate with the ACB.
Verify the ACB maintains correct time.
Disconnect any GPS or NTP servers, and
reboot the PDU. Verify the time and date are
accurate.
Inspect system cable interfaces for loose
connections. Verify connections between
motors, brakes, and other power connections.
Note: No lubrication is required for the PDU.
Position Encoders and Verify the integrity of environmental closure to Once per year
Resolvers ensure accuracy of mechanical and electrical
components.
Section 8 - Troubleshooting and Maintenance : Regular Maintenance
Section 9 - Drawings and Parts List
SECTION 9 - DRAWINGS AND PARTS LIST
Group 1 - System Level

System Schematic 8200-02-0002
System Cable Diagram 8200-02-0004
Site Acceptance Test 8200-02-0045
Software Interface Specification 8200-05-0009
System Software 8200-05-0012
Hardware Interface Specification 8200-02-0007
Group 2 - Antenna Control Unit (ACU)

ACU Assembly 8200-02-1140-01
Group 3 - Power Drive Unit (PDU)

PDU Schematic, 1-10HP 8200-02-2011
Motor Controller, Yaskwawa 08-588-2500
ES-Config Board Assembly, I/O Relay Board 08-588-2820-01
ES-Config Board Assembly, I/O Termination Board 08-588-2815-01
ES-Config Board Schematic, I/O Relay Board 08-588-2821
ES-Config Board Schematic, I/O Termination Board 08-588-2816
Antenna Controller Board Schematic 08-588-2771-00
Group 4 - Miscellaneous
-- TRU (4RU)
Mounting Installation Kit 8200-02-5199
4RU TRU Assembly 8200-02-5110
Wire List 8200-02-5102
Schematic 8200-02-5101
Section 9 - Drawings and Parts List
-- Monopulse
Model 950A Monopulse RF Option, Ka Standard 950A-12-5010
Scan Plate Assembly, 17.0-18.1 GHz 0520-12-5245-01
NOTE
The referenced monopulse drawings are intended as example
drawings only. Antenna systems often have unique configurations for
scan plates that depend on factors such as RX frequency
requirements.
 If the monopulse control system was purchased for a new General
Dynamics antenna, consult the antenna documentation.
 If the monopulse control system was purchased to interface with an
existing antenna, consult the project-specific documentation.
Section 10 - Vendor Data
SECTION 10 - VENDOR DATA
# Description Part Number Vendor Location
1. Ethernet Switch ESW205-MC B+B SmartWorx ACU
2. Power Supply MDR-60-5 (+5 VDC) Mean Well PDU (PS1)

MDR-10-12 (±12 VDC) Mean Well PDU (PS2,3)
MDR-60-24 (+24 VDC) Mean Well PDU (PS4)
3. Motor Controller Yaskawa AC Drive V1000 Yaskawa PDU
Section 10 - Vendor Data
Appendix A - Miscellaneous ACU Operations
APPENDIX A - MISCELLANEOUS ACU OPERATIONS
A.1 Configuring the AZ and EL Graphical Displays
You can customize the AZ and EL graphical displays to specify what and how AZ/EL
information is shown, such as a Strip Chart or Meter.
Strip Chart Meter
 Press the hot spot for either the AZ or EL graphical display to open the AZ/EL Display
Configuration window. (Pressing either the AZ or EL display opens the same window.)
Configuring a Strip Chart Display
1. In the Configuration window, press Strip as marked below.
General Dynamics Proprietary A-1 M950-02-0857 Rev C
2. Define the information to show on the strip chart:

AZ/EL to Display – Selects which signal is displayed in this strip chart.
Window Size – Sets the time interval for the X-axis on the strip chart, from a minimum
of 30 seconds to a maximum of 18 hours. This is a continuous reading, so the
information displayed graphically on the left side of the strip chart is the newest data set,
and the information on the right side is the oldest data set.
Scaling - Scales the Y-axis (degrees or dB) either manually or automatically.
 Manual - You must enter appropriate values in the Min Range and Max Range
fields.
 Auto - The system scales the Y-axis automatically based on the strip chart. The
Min Range and Max Range fields are disabled.
Min/Max Range AZ/EL - Enabled only if Scaling = Manual. These set the Y-axis ranges
for the AZ and EL strip charts.
Lower Limit Lines, Upper Limit Lines - Press Enabled or Disabled. When enabled,
the corresponding limit lines are displayed in red on the chart so you can easily see
whether the monitored signal is within the specified range. Depending on the use, these
may best be used when Scaling = Manual.
Lower Limit AZ/EL, Upper Limit AZ/EL - Enabled only if the corresponding lower and/
or upper limit lines are enabled. When enabled, you must set the values for the limit
lines.
Configuring a Meter Display
1. In the Configuration window, press Meter as marked below.
2. Define the information to show on the meter:

AZ/EL to Display – Selects which signal is displayed in this meter.
For the AZ and EL axis individually, specify:
Low Critical, High Critical - Lower and upper range of critical levels.
Low Warning, High Warning - Lower and upper range of warning levels.
NOTE
In a meter, colored bars represent the various ranges. Each value
must be entered in ascending order as shown in the following example.
Min Range Normal Max Range

Range High Critical
Low Critical
Low High
Warning Warning
NOTE
Press Preview to show the entered values for Min Range and Max
Range on the sample meter in the window. This also shows the
calculated value at the middle of the meter.
A.2 Configuring the Tracking RF Graphical Display
You can customize the Tracking RF graphical display to show signal strength in dB or dBm. You
can also show the information as a Strip Chart or Meter.
Strip Chart Meter
 Press the hot spot for the Tracking RF graphical display to open the RF Display
Configuration window.
Configuring a Strip Chart Display
1. In the Configuration window, select Strip Chart as marked below.
2. Define the information to show on the strip chart:

Signal to Display – Selects whether signal strength is displayed in dB or dBm.
Window Size – Sets the time interval for the X-axis on the strip chart, from a minimum
of 30 seconds to a maximum of 18 hours. This is a continuous reading, so the
information displayed graphically on the left side of the strip chart is the newest data set,
and the information on the right side is the oldest data set.
Scaling - Scales the Y-axis (dB or dBm) either manually or automatically.
 Manual - You must enter appropriate values in the Min Range and Max Range
fields.
 Auto - The system scales the Y-axis automatically based on the strip chart. The
Min Range and Max Range fields are disabled.
Min/Max Range - Enabled only if Scaling = Manual. These set the Y-axis ranges for the
strip chart.
Lower Limit Lines, Upper Limit Lines - Press Enabled or Disabled. When enabled,
limit lines are displayed in red on the chart so you can easily see whether the monitored
signal is within the specified range. Depending on the use, these may be best used
when Scaling = Manual.
Lower Limit, Upper Limit - Enabled only if the corresponding lower and/or upper limit
lines are enabled. When enabled, you must set the value for the limit lines.
Configuring a Meter Display
1. In the Configuration window, select Meter as marked below.
2. Define the information to show on the meter:

Signal to Display – Selects whether signal strength is displayed in dB or dBm.
Low Critical, High Critical - Lower and upper range of critical levels.
Low Warning, High Warning - Lower and upper range of warning levels.
NOTE
In a meter, colored bars represent the various ranges. Each value
must be entered in ascending order as shown in the following example.
Min Range Normal Max Range

Range High Critical
Low Critical
Low High
Warning Warning
NOTE
Press Preview to show the entered values for Min Range and Max
Range on the sample meter in the window. This also shows the
calculated value at the middle of the meter.
A.3 Changing Your Password
1. In the upper-right corner of the main ACU screen, press your user name (which is
followed by the arrow).
NOTE
2. Press Change Password.
If your old password

was marked as
“Strong”, the new
password must also
be Strong.
3. Enter the requested password information.
4. Press Save.
The system verifies that the old password is correct and that the new password entries
match and are valid. If there is an error, a message appears and you must correct the
entries.
5. After the password information is verified, press OK in the confirmation window.
A.4 Managing the User Database
The user database contains all the user names that can log into the system. For each user, the
database sets the password and permissions.
NOTE
To manage the user database, you must have “All Permissions” set for
your user permissions.
A.4.1 Opening the User Management Window
1. In the upper-right corner of the main ACU screen, press your user name (which is
followed by the arrow).
NOTE
2. Press User Management.
The User Management window lists all current users and shows their permission level.
A.4.2 Creating a New User
In the User Management window:
1. Press the Create New User button.
2. In the window:
a. Enter the user name and password as requested. (Remember that passwords are
case-sensitive.)
b. To log the user out automatically after a specified time, check the Auto Logout box
and enter the number of seconds.
c. Check the appropriate box(es) for User Permissions.
 All - The user has administrative permissions.
 Maintenance - The user can only view the parameters on the ACU screen. The
user cannot change or stop modes, enable/disable axes, or enter any setup
configurations.
 Select Profiles and Modes - The user can execute and stop preset profiles and
modes, but cannot configure any setup parameters.
 Enable and Disable Axes - The user can enable/disable each axis.
 Edit Parameters - The user can edit profiles, modes, and setup parameters.
d. Press Save.
The system verifies the information is valid. If there is an error, a message appears
and you must correct the information.
3. After the information is verified, press OK in the confirmation window.
A.4.3 Editing a User’s Database Information
In User Management window:
1. Check the box to the left of the user you want to delete.
The window shows Edit and Delete to right of that user.
2. Press Edit to open the Edit User window, which is similar to the Create New User
window shown previously.
3. Make any changes, and press Save.

The system verifies the changes. If there is an error, a message appears and you must
correct the information.
4. After the information is verified, press OK in the confirmation window.
A.4.4 Deleting a User
In User Management window:
1. Check the box to the left of the user you want to delete.
The window shows Edit and Delete to right of that user.
2. Press Delete, and press Delete in the confirmation window. Then press OK to
acknowledge the deletion.
Appendix B - Setting the Band Table
APPENDIX B - SETTING THE BAND TABLE
The Band Table gives the settings for each available BDC (Block Down Converter). BDCs shift
the frequency of a received RF signal into a specified range, in this case an L-band frequency
that can be processed by the TRU. The Band Table window is described earlier in
Section 4.16.10. This appendix provides additional details about how the Band Table works and
how to set it up properly.
B.1 Band Table Overview
To open the Band Table:
 Press Setup > Hardware > Band Table.
IMPORTANT
Incorrect Band Tables are a common source of tracking problems. If
the settings are not accurate, the system will not operate properly.
Some TRUs from GDST have built-in BDCs. Newer TRUs show the Band Table on a label on
the TRU’s lid. For older TRUs, Band Tables are given in drawing 8200-02-5106. (This document
is not included with newer systems.)
An example Band Table label for a full C- and Ku-band TRU is:
START STOP LO RELAYS

3.40 4.20 5.15 0000 0001
3.70 4.80 5.75 0000 0010
10.70 11.90 9.75 0000 0100
11.80 13.00 10.85 0000 1000
0 0 0 0000 0000
0 0 0 0000 0000
General Dynamics Proprietary B-1 M950-02-0857 Rev C
B.2 How the Band Table Works
The system searches through the Band Table from the top to find a BDC whose Start/Stop
range (band) includes the received RF Center Frequency.
 If several BDC bands include the received frequency, the system uses the first one
found.
 If no BDC bands include the received frequency, the system is unable to find the signal.
TRU
START STOP LO RELAYS Typical TRU processor
Received RF signal
(Center Frequency 3.40 4.20 5.15 0000 0001 BDC 1 range is 0.95 – 2.15 GHz.
on RF window) 3.70 4.80 5.75 0000 0010
BDC 2 L-Band RF
10.70 11.90 9.75 0000 0100 Processor
11.80 13.00 10.85 0000 1000 BDC 3
For example,
12 GHZ signal is
received signal 0 0 0 0000 0000 BDC 4 down-converted to
is 12 GHz 0 0 0 0000 0000 | 12 – 10.85 | = 1.15 GHz.
For the selected BDC band, the TRU uses the Relays value to set internal switches that route
the received signal to the correct BDC.
The BDC down-converts the signal to an L-band frequency as the absolute value of:
L-Band Freq = | Center Freq – Local Osc |
The down-converted L-band signal is routed to the TRU’s RF processor.
IMPORTANT
The Band Table must be set properly so the system can identify which
BDC to use. The down-converted L-band frequency must be supported
by the TRU.
B.3 Common Band Table Errors
Example 1:
Each row in the Band Table gives the settings for the corresponding BDC. Do not enter Start
and Stop as the operating range of the TRU.
In this example, the TRU has only a single BDC. In the Band Table, the operator did not enter
the settings for the BDC. Instead, the operator entered the operating range of the TRU.
TRU
START STOP LO RELAYS Typical TRU processor
Received RF signal
0.95 2.15 0 0000 0001 BDC 1 range is 0.95 – 2.15 GHz.
(Center Frequency
on RF window) 0 0 0 0000 0000
L-Band RF
0 0 0 0000 0000
12 GHZ is not found Processor
0 0 0 0000 0000 in the Band Table, so the
For example,
received signal 0 0 0 0000 0000 signal is not routed
to a BDC.
is 12 GHz 0 0 0 0000 0000
Suppose an operator uses the incorrect Band Table shown above even though the BDC has a
built-in LO = 10.85. The BDC can down-convert a 12 GHz signal to 1.15 GHz (12 – 10.85),
which is in the TRU’s range, but the Band Table does not find 12 GHz. Therefore, the signal is
not routed to the BDC.
CAUTION
Do not “trick” the TRU by using false settings.
Some operators “trick” the TRU by entering 1.15 GHz as the Center Frequency on the RF
window. However, the Center Frequency is used to calculate various system parameters. For
example, beamwidth is calculated as 21 / (F * D), where F is the Center Frequency.
Calculations based on F = 1.15 instead of the actual incoming 12 GHz can cause significant
tracking problems.
IMPORTANT
Always set the Band Table and the Center Frequency correctly.
Example 2:
A typo in the Band Table range entries can make it appear that an appropriate BDC is not
available, even if one is. Even when the signal is routed to the correct BDC, a typo in the LO
entry can cause the TRU to look for the wrong down-converted frequency.
In the following example, the BDCs are external to the TRU.
Received RF signal BDC uses its built-in 10.85 LO to

(Center Frequency START STOP LO RELAYS BDC 1 down-convert to 1.15 GHz.
on RF window) 3.40 4.20 5.15 0000 0001
BDC 2
3.70 4.80 5.75 0000 0010 TRU
10.70 11.90 9.75 0000 0100
BDC 3
For example,
But the TRU expects the signal
received signal 11.80 13.00 10.05 0000 1000 BDC 4 at 1.95 GHZ (12 – 10.05), so
is 12 GHz 0 0 0 0000 0000 the signal cannot be found.
0 0 0 0000 0000
Entered 10.05
instead of 10.85
According to the Band Table settings, the system should down-convert the 12 GHz signal to
12 - 10.05 = 1.95 GHz. But the BDC uses its actual, built-in LO of 10.85 to down-convert the
signal to 12 – 10.85 = 1.15 GHz. In this case, the TRU looks for 1.95 GHz, not 1.15 GHz, and
cannot find the signal.
Appendix C - Inverter Drives and Long-Term Storage
APPENDIX C - INVERTER DRIVES AND LONG-TERM

STORAGE
When inverter drives are unused over long periods, they need to be powered up for 30 to 60
minutes every six months to prevent deterioration in their electrolytic DC bus capacitors.
Otherwise, the capacitors may require reformation, especially if stored in high temperatures.
NOTE
After 2 to 3 years without power, drive functionality may not be
restored fully with bus cap reforming alone. If drive functionality is not
restored, the manufacturer recommends replacing the PCBs.
C.1 Long-Term Storage Problems
An aluminum electrolytic capacitor may be adversely affected by storage in high temperatures

such as exposure to direct sunlight or heating elements. The higher the temperature, the faster
the capacitor’s electrical characteristics will deteriorate. For example, the anode foil may react
with the electrolyte; then after storage, applying even normal voltages to the capacitor may
result in higher than normal leakage current. In most cases, the leakage current decreases after
a short time as the normal chemical reaction occurs in the capacitor. However, in extreme
cases, the amount of gas generated may cause the safety vent to open. Additionally, humidity
causes the lead wires/terminals to oxidize, which affects solderability.
Therefore, store aluminum electrolytic capacitors at room temperature, in a dry location, and out
of direct sunlight.
C.2 Procedure for Reforming the Inverter Bus Capacitor
When inverter drives are stored for long periods, use the following procedure to reform the
capacitor’s dielectric and return the leakage current to the initial level.
1. Remove the fuse from the 3PCB tap change card.
2. Connect the inverter input L1, L2, and L3 to a Variac.
3. Make sure the Variac voltage setting is turned down so the output of the Variac will be at
or near 0 volts when input power is applied to the Variac.
4. Apply power to the Variac, checking for abnormal sounds or visual indications in the
drive. If the Variac has an output current indicator, make sure the current is very near 0
with 0 or a steady output voltage applied.
5. Slowly turn up the Variac, increasing its output voltage to nominal rated input voltage
over a period of 2 to 3 minutes. Ramp the voltage up at a rate of approx. 75 – 100
volts/min for 230 VAC units and 150 – 200 volts/min. for 460 VAC units.
General Dynamics Proprietary C-1 M950-02-0857 Rev C
Appendix C - Inverter Drives and Long-Term Storage
6. Let the output voltage remain at rated voltage for 30 to 60 minutes while keeping close
watch for abnormal signs in the inverter. While increasing the Variac's output voltage,
the current increases momentarily because current is necessary to charge the
capacitors.
7. After 30 to 60 minutes, remove power and package the drive for shipment.
If any abnormal indications occur during this process, repeat the process.
General Dynamics Proprietary C-2 M950-02-0857 Rev C
Appendix D - ACU Quick Reference Guide/Menu Map
APPENDIX D - ACU QUICK REFERENCE GUIDE/MENU MAP
Press to initiate the Stop mode, which quickly stops the antenna and disables
all axes.
Press the user name in the Title bar on the main screen to access:
■ Lock/Unlock Screen ■ Change Password ■ User Management
■ Login/Logout
Appears only when the Title bar changes to the Status bar. Shows whether or
not the system has any existing faults, as shown in the Faults window. When
a new fault occurs, the System Fault button flashes.
or
Press the Enabled/Disabled buttons to control each axis individually.
If using the optional POL axis, press the and arrows

in the upper-left corner of the 3rd box to cycle between
the POL and LAT/LON displays. For non-POL systems,
LAT/LON is always displayed.
General Dynamics Proprietary D-1 M950-02-0857 Rev C
Press the hot spot to configure how the AZ and EL positions are displayed.
You can select the type of signal and whether it is shown as a strip chart or
meter.
Press to configure how the RF tracking signal is displayed. You can show the
signal strength in dB or dBm and as a stripchart or meter.
Press the hot spot to set up or execute Profiles used to track satellites. You
can also press the Profile button in the button bar along the bottom of the
screen.
or
Press the hot spot to configure or execute a Point mode:

■ Stop ■ Geo Designate ■ Geo Preset ■ Intelsat Track
■ Manual Position ■ Manual Rate ■ Moon Track ■ NORAD Track
■ Optrack ■ POL Auto ■ Position Designate ■ Preset Position
■ Star Track ■ Stow ■ Sun Track ■ Table Track
Press the hot spot to configure or execute an Acquire mode:

■ Box Scan ■ Geo Scan
Press the hot spot to configure or execute a Track mode:

■ Steptrack ■ Optrack ■ Autophase ■ Monopulse
Press the hot spot to set up or execute the RF parameters used to track a
satellite.
Shows all status messages.
Shows all fault messages. Unacknowledged faults are highlighted. Press

ACK-ALL at the bottom of the window to acknowledge a fault.
("Acknowledging" indicates you know the fault exists; it does not clear it.)
Press to select a Point mode, Acquire mode, Track mode, RF settings, and/or
POL mode to execute in Direct Mode. You can also use this button to edit any
parameters or change any modes.
Press to enter manual offsets that are superimposed on the current Point
mode.
Press to monitor a variety of system-related information:

Data: ■ Data Log Functions ■ Record Data Log
Display: ■ Edge Meter ■ Round Meter ■ X/Y Plot ■ Strip Chart
■ Spectrum Display
System: ■ NTP ■ Tracking Receiver ■ Encoder Feedback
■ Commands/Offsets (AZ/EL and Geo) ■ Power Supplies
■ Software Version ■ Preview
Press to offer control to another unit or return control to the ACU:

■ ACU Control Only ■ Control Change Allowed
Press to access various utilities:

■ Encoder Test ■ Upgrade ■ Simulator ■ Database Utility
Press to access various setup and maintenance-related items:

Position: ■ Motion Detect Faults ■ Encoder Offset ■ Travel Limit
■ Error Correction ■ Axis (AZ/EL/POL)
Hardware: ■ ACB Serial Port ■ ACB TCP/IP ■ TRU (TRU External
Status, TRU Serial Port, TRU TCP/IP, TRU DAC Output, TRU BITE
Generator) or Analog Input ■ Band Table ■ Custom POL ■ Latched
Faults ■ Monopulse (Phase Shift Table, Mono Filter, Autophase
Algorithm)
System Options: ■ System Options
Other: ■ Date Time ■ Site Setup ■ Hour Meter ■ Data Log Options
■ Screen Control ■ Major Events
— End of Document —
General Dynamics Proprietary M950-02-0857 Rev C

General Dynamics SATCOM Technologies Antenna Control System 950A

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

General Dynamics SATCOM Technologies Antenna Control System 950A

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

May 2018

Revision and Change Record

Date ECN Aff. Reason for Authorized

A 2017/09/07 111190 All Original release of Model 950A with J. Kailukaitis

B 2018/01/26 112020 All Updated General System J. Spears

C 2018/05/14 114655 All Added support for monopulse J. Kailukaitis

General Dynamics Proprietary i M950-02-0857 Rev C

This page intentionally left blank.

General Dynamics Proprietary ii M950-02-0857 Rev C

General Dynamics Proprietary iii M950-02-0857 Rev C

This page intentionally left blank.

General Dynamics Proprietary iv M950-02-0857 Rev C

Revision and Change Record ........................................................................................... i

SECTION 1 - SYSTEM OVERVIEW........................................................................... 1-1

SECTION 2 - INSTALL THE SYSTEM ....................................................................... 2-1

General Dynamics Proprietary v M950-02-0857 Rev C

2.13.1 Setting a Final Switch ................................................................................... 2-21

SECTION 3 - SATELLITE TRACKING QUICK START GUIDE .................................. 3-1

General Dynamics Proprietary vi M950-02-0857 Rev C

SECTION 4 - ANTENNA CONTROL UNIT ................................................................ 4-1

General Dynamics Proprietary vii M950-02-0857 Rev C

4.11.1.2 Geo Designate........................................................................................ 4-29

General Dynamics Proprietary viii M950-02-0857 Rev C

4.11.5.5 Table Track - POL .................................................................................. 4-87

General Dynamics Proprietary ix M950-02-0857 Rev C

4.16.3 Travel Limit ................................................................................................. 4-137

SECTION 5 - OTHER CONTROL UNITS ................................................................... 5-1

General Dynamics Proprietary x M950-02-0857 Rev C

5.1.2 PMU Display................................................................................................... 5-3

SECTION 6 - HARDWARE........................................................................................ 6-1

SECTION 7 - STATUS MESSAGES ............................................................................ 7-1

SECTION 8 - TROUBLESHOOTING AND MAINTENANCE ......................................... 8-1

General Dynamics Proprietary xi M950-02-0857 Rev C

8.3.1 ACU ............................................................................................................. 8-36

SECTION 9 - DRAWINGS AND PARTS LIST ............................................................. 9-1

SECTION 10 - VENDOR DATA ............................................................................... 10-1

APPENDIX A - MISCELLANEOUS ACU OPERATIONS ........................................... A-1

General Dynamics Proprietary xii M950-02-0857 Rev C

APPENDIX B - SETTING THE BAND TABLE ............................................................B-1

APPENDIX C - INVERTER DRIVES AND LONG-TERM STORAGE .......................... C-1

APPENDIX D - ACU QUICK REFERENCE GUIDE/MENU MAP ............................. D-1

General Dynamics Proprietary xiii M950-02-0857 Rev C

This page intentionally left blank.

General Dynamics Proprietary xiv M950-02-0857 Rev C

List of Figures and Tables

Figure 2-1: Motor Controller Front Panel ............................................................................... 2-15

Figure 2-2: DIP Switch S2 ..................................................................................................... 2-17

Figure 2-3: DIP Switch S3 ..................................................................................................... 2-18

Figure 4-1: Typical Tracking Signal Beam Pattern ................................................................ 4-69

Figure 4-2: Steptrack Process ............................................................................................... 4-70

Figure 6-1: Location of Components Inside the PDU............................................................... 6-3

Figure 6-2: PDU Block Diagram .............................................................................................. 6-5

Figure 6-3: ACB Block Diagram .............................................................................................. 6-6

Table 2-1: Minimum Conductor Sizing, per EN 60950-1.......................................................... 2-9

Table 2-2: PDU Configuration for Optional Equipment .......................................................... 2-10

Table 2-3: Motor Controller Configuration Parameters .......................................................... 2-16

Table 2-4: S2 and S3 DIP Switch Settings ............................................................................ 2-17

Table 4-1: Refraction Corrections ........................................................................................ 4-138

General Dynamics Proprietary xv M950-02-0857 Rev C

This page intentionally left blank.

General Dynamics Proprietary xvi M950-02-0857 Rev C

Warnings, Cautions, and Notes

General Dynamics Proprietary xvii M950-02-0857 Rev C

 Safeguard personnel and property by complying with all local